Home

This Manual - Lemke Software GmbH

1. Format Import Export Comment WBIN MacWavelet 2d format MacWavelet 2d WBMP Format of the new WAP technology wbz Five variants are recognized wdb HD photo format from Microsoft Can only be imported with the UB version of GraphicConverter Webp Format for the Internet Newer versions can contain metadata WinFax fxm Winmail dat All readable images it contains will be opened in a multiple page document WMF Windows Meta File Contains vector and bitmap graphics WPG Word Perfect graphic format Can contain vector and bitmap graphics X Face Supports 48 x 48 pixels for1 bit Used for small photos in newsgroups X11 Bitmap format X3F Format of the Sigma digital camera XCF Gimp format XBM Black and white format coded in C XPM ASCII Bitmap XWD Dump from X Windows YUV If the width and height cannot be determined automatically a dialog opens where you enter the values Z04 Z08 Z16 z3d format Z24 Z32 New in GraphicConverter 7 Please see http www lemkesoft com content 162 new functions and versions html 288 New in GraphicConverter 7 New in GraphicConverter 7 2 Edit Select last Selection reactivates the last selection If MooV is selected as Destinatin Format a Dialog with options for compression and size etc will open In order to do so you need to select multiple pictures which will be combined to a movie Webp import and export added Intel only This format is si
2. c eee e cece eee e en eeeeee 266 Color BINMONGSS sene 5 ace d vackS ae a ast ec ee ya ca a eRe eK 267 AppleScripts peat starsat oy seed neh to ho Sey Hs Se AW RAT er A Sone Eee 268 Automator soas Toran Ea Eaa tae hea c EE Oe Laie ead ee uh eee Glee 271 TemMitiall o5 3 vacaasieeeasteva tensa asa a aaa a aaas a e a eaea 272 TroubleshootiNg sensen oaks oo cea ee a eee AA aid wa Nees bie era oad Gwe 272 SHOMCUIS nsien yee leek deoei tebe dit eie ice bite te hie hoa te baa Eeth 274 Supported Formats sess tse e ig ad avy aw as foyad E EE peed dab ieG as VESA 276 New in GrapicConverter cece cece ccc cece cnet ene en eee eeeeeeeeeneeees 276 WOE Material vale eE ah EE EEN oleate cela nen eet hale as 331 Welcome to GraphicConverter Introduction After dealing with installation of the program the first section of this manual looks at the most important functions for everyday use Welcome to GraphicConverter GraphicConverter converts pictures into other picture formats allowing you to use graph ics files from other computer systems for example The most important functions are Converting the most frequent Atari Amiga UNIX Organizer and IBM graphics formats to and from Macintosh formats Numerous format related parameters can be configured page 20 Image editing Multiple conversion page 26 Importing Pictures from Digital Cameras page 120 Browser for quick viewing of all pictures contained in a folder p
3. Key Combination Result Hold down Alt and click picture Zoom picture to 100 The cut section can be moved with the mouse ESC End slide show Command 0 9 0 is 10 Moves the picture to defined folders 1 to 10 Ctrl Command 0 9 0 is 10 Moves the picture to defined folders 11 to 20 Alt Command 0 9 0 is 10 Moves the picture to defined folders 21 to 30 0 5 Set 0 5 stars to rate JPEG and TIF images 6 9 Set Label You can also call up this table via the GraphicConverter Help menu File Slide Show with Find allows a slide show of all pictures matching search criteria defined in the dialog opening eo Slide Show with Find Where Hagens Mac mini Name Contains File Format All Formats label amp BBO BBB B ALL Match with Regex Show Slides Randomly In sequence Start with File 1 Sort Files By Name Order Ascending Cancel oK OK Similar to a slide show when a picture is opened in the normal way with Edit Navi gation you can switch to the next or previous picture in the folder where the opened picture is saved using Next Previous Image in folder in the submenu The current pic ture is closed and the next or previous picture is opened RegExLite is a standard for renaming files with regular expressions For more informa tion please read the introduction on programming regular expressions http www regenechsen de phpwcms index php regex_englisch RegEx
4. You can use Set EXIF Date from File Name if your files contain the date in the name This date will be set as EXIF Date Additionally you can select the option Set the file date identical to the EXIF date in the dialog that opens If you scanned pictures and typed the date in the file name you can adapt these files to modern digital photos in order to import them in database based programs like Apperture or Lightroom Interpolate missing EXIF Date assigns an EXIF date that is interpolated from the exist ing EXIF dates of individual pictures in the series to the selected pictures This is useful if for example you have scanned slides and have entered the date or even the time of a birthday party in the EXIF data for individual pictures If in our example the first selected picture has January 1 2011 as the date and the last one has December 31 2011 and if there are 363 pictures inbetween one day of the cal endar year is entered in each picture in series If individual pictures inbetween contain a date the pictures between the two pictures with a date will be interpolated 222 The Browser GraphicConverter calculates the time period in seconds and divides this value by the pictures inbetween The result is calculated into days hours minutes and seconds so that a time in the night may be set for pictures that were taken during the day As you see this is just a helper tool Rotate depending on EXIF rotates the selected picture
5. integer the number of elements data size v Return the size in bytes of an object data size reference the object whose data size is to be returned as type class the data type for which the size is calculated integer the size of the object in bytes delete v Delete an element from an object delete reference the element to delete duplicate v Duplicate objects s a duplicate reference the object s to duplicate to location reference the new location for the object s reference exists v Verify if an object exists exists reference the object in question boolean true if it exists false if not make v Make a new element make new type class the class of the new element at location reference the location at which to insert the element with data anything the initial data for the element with properties record the initial values for the properties of the element reference to the new object s move v Move object s to a new location move reference the object s to move to location reference the new location for the object s reference to the object s after they have been moved af open v Open the specified object s U yF Examples for AppleScript An example for using AppleScript is the starting of a slide show 000 Show Slideshow scpt ooo o s gt Aufzeichnen Stopp Ausf hren bersetzen i Bundle Inhait AppleScript G lt Kein Element aus
6. 213 The Browser Note the shortcuts indicated in the context menu for example Command for Edit Comment They will help speed up your work Context menu options Open the context menu of the preview area by right clicking or Control clicking one of the images You can then access the following options Edit Open With Finder Open With b Copy C Move to Trash amp Duplicate Make Alias Reveal in Finder Edit Filename New Folder CHEN Fast Preview Slide Show Open Folder in Convert amp Modify Label eat a yen Rating Refresh F5 Open opens the selected images in GraphicConverter Open With Finder opens the images as if they have been double clicked in the Finder i e with the program that is specified for the respective file extension You can select the program for a file extension via the information dialogue of the file concerned in the Finder Open With opens the images with the program that you selected in the Browser Misc section of the preferences Copy copies the selected files to the clipboard You can then for example switch to a different folder and paste the files with Command V You can also use the context menu for this by right clicking the background between the pictures Using this method of copying does not place the content of the files in the clipboard but instead only saves the path to the files The original is then copied to the destination folder upon pasting You should therefor
7. Cancel Ec Auto trim allows you to define the size of the selection rectangle Enter 2 for exam ple to trim the edges slightly Enter 0 to disable this option Selected Items Process images from subfolders causes the pictures in subfolders to also be opened for trimming Select Copy files of another format into target folder if your picture folder also con tains text files for example that should be copied into the target folder Resolution Save with resolution allows you to change the resolution This is not nor mally necessary 110 Cropping for Photo Prints Use Format Save in original format if possible to keep the pictures in their format If GraphicConverter can open the original format but cannot save that format the pic ture will be saved as a JPEG If you want to crop these types of pictures and save them ina lossless format you need to first convert them into a format such as TIFF using the con vert option see p 26 A JPEG quality of 95 allows both very good quality and a manageable file size The files are saved web ready without a preview or resource if Remove all metadata is enabled to maximize compatibility You should enable Crop JPEGs lossless will round selection since further JPEG com pression which causes a loss in quality is not required despite the cropping When you scale the selection it will move in steps of 8 pixels as this is the only way to crop without losses Select Save
8. 3 mm E Schreibtisch i A Applications E Alle meine ICloud Drive AirDrop Programme T Dokumente Al hagenhenke GraphicConverter 9 app Bilder o Downloads E senfkorn J I Jahrbuch E Jahrbuch gt LensTRUE E Johannesg J Cloud Drive D C Micr kes Toneriffa k Teneriffa f ae WEE Teneriffa B O LENSTRUE Order Online webloc E LENSDISK E Graphic x 4 Objekte Installation Read Me Lisez moi Bitte lesen more In Mac OS X drag the GraphicConverter folder into the Applications folder on your hard drive Installation is not complete To delete the volume image from the RAM click it and press Command E Eject Open the Programs folder on your hard drive and start the GraphicConverter program by double clicking To make opening GraphicConverter easy we recommend dragging the program file into the dock Alternatively you can drag the file to the Desktop while holding down the Command and Option keys to create an alias via which you can start the program Installation Possibility 2 You purchased GraphicConverter in the Mac App Store In this case GraphicConverter will be installed automatically eee x E 2 O SENS Highighes pHs Kategoren Einkikule Updates z GraphicConverter 9 DAS UNVERSALGENE DER BILDBEARBEITUNG o 6 Uber 1 5 Matonen Nutrer weltwet schw ren auf den GraphicConventer vom Hobiy Fotograten bis zum Prof Designer Von der P
9. 50K Disable Show grid during rotation to hide the grid while rotating images 139 Operator Crop white areas of rotation before saving trims the image to a centered rectangle before saving The cropped version is not displayed If you would rather crop by hand you can rotate the picture with one of the rotate options under Picture Rotate and then crop it The rotate options under Picture Rotate allow you to rotate images more than 10 degrees Disable Keep proportions if the aspect ratio is not important The automatic function can often retain a larger picture area in this way Back and Forward save image if modified allows you to save and scroll to the next picture even if you are moving backwards through a folder You can also use Save amp Next to save and switch to the next picture Select the Format and whether you want to save to the source folder You can use Change label after save to to recognize edited pictures more easily If the target format is this same as the source format the source image will be overwrit ten Saving to a sub folder avoids overwriting originals Save to source folder and copy original into sub folder first copies the original into a subfolder named Original Files and then saves the edited version in the source folder Save onto desktop saves the files on the desktop To quickly access the edited versions of your pictures via the left hand column of the browser we recommend copying t
10. nology fade in is used as standard 252 Slide show Slide Show Metadata General pace Metadata C Deine Export to Movie M Show metadata on the slide Misc Font color Restore to Defaults Metadata Define opens a dialog where you can choose which metadata is displayed under the picture during the slide show Available Texts Selected Texts Name Name Name without Extension Size Size File Format Resolution Colors Frames Add gt Memory Usage File Format Come Remove on File Length NY File Creation Date File Modification Date Compression Req Time for Decompression Comment Select the color and size of text with Font color and Font size To do so click the color field or select the font size from the pop up menu 253 Slide show Slide Show Misc Set Alias Folder to Choose from the pop up menu The alias files that you create dur ing the slide show with the Make Alias icon from the top toolbar are created in the se lected folder Slide Show Hal mi A oa General Open Save Print Slide Show Convert Browser Folders Search General General More Alias Folder lt None gt Transitions i Allow Apple Remote control during Slide Show Export to Movie Metadata Ignore Extensions THM TXT HTM HTML EXE DLL P C PAS CC ASM COM SYS LST DOC XLS PST OST INI PPT INF SIT ZIP TAR MIM GZIP ARJ MDX MSH RTF WEBLOC TEXTCLIPPING XMP Play sound file with same name as the image
11. B background color 166 brightness and contrast 135 Browse Folder 17 Browser 202 Burn In 116 169 C Calculate Mean 32 Calculate Mean Values 32 Catalog 78 Catalog HTML for WWW usage 28 Centric Involution 189 Change bit depth dynamically 71 179 changing filenames to lowercase characters 84 Chromatic Involution 187 Close 25 CMYK 161 Cold Warm Involution 190 color HSV model 187 color blindness 267 color correction 141 color depth 171 color permutations 186 color pictures 179 color profile with ColorSync 142 Color Rotation by 15 Degrees Clockwise 189 Colors 171 Index ColorSync 142 Comment 63 Compare Pictures 70 Control click 130 Convert amp Modify 26 converting 20 Converting a Picture with Save as 20 Copy files 28 Create LOWSRC 25 creating an alpha channel from transparency 197 D Darken Linear 177 Date Created 35 Delete All Slices 77 Delete Slice 77 Destination 30 destination format 28 Detail 60 deutan color blindness 267 Diagonal Sharpen Edges 133 digital cameras 120 directory structure 210 disclabel 220 Display Content from Low to High Resolution 66 Display Name 81 Display Picture from Top to Bottom 65 dither 177 Don t alert before overwrite 45 DRIMaker 265 drop area 211 Duplicate 137 E Edit Comment 233 Edit Slice URL 77 e mail 15 E Mail send image to e mail program 208 Error Correction Rotate 130 Escape 124 EXIF Shift Set
12. Display Windows on which monitor the browser is opened and on which monitor new picture windows are opened In the Preferences under Browser Edit you can specify with Cursor navigation stop at first and last item whether the cursor should stop at the start and at the end when you jump from thumbnail to thumbnail with the s or whether it should jump from the last picture to the first and from the first to the last Export of old formats like PAC OTA and PBM mostly 1 bit is supported again If you drag a file into a browser window where a file with the same name already exists a rename dialog will open In the dialog for the import options rotating according to EXIF information can be selected for JPG pictures In the option dialog for the operator you can specify that images are not sent to the Trash with Delete amp Next but that instead they are immediately deleted permanently If you work with Apple s image editing program Aperture you can now access the Aperture library on the left hand side of the browser The EXIF orientation tag is displayed in the browser thumbnails because GraphicConverter does not display non rotated images rotated If you forward these images they will often be displayed unrotated on the recipient s computer We recommend rotating images with an orientation tag using the Rotate Depending on EXIF JPGs only function If you import images from a camera or a card into GraphicConverter we recommend sele
13. E Set Creator for Saving as Mark as 3D image Use original Format gt Conditional gt Adjustments Effects gt Size Crop Scale gt Alpha Channel gt Colors Profile gt Drawings gt Others v3d 1080p Frame Packing 1080p HSBS E 1080p Interlaced Mark as 3D Swap left and right 192 Color Permutations Select the newly created file with the two pictures next to each other from the sub folder and open or create a destination folder in the right hand column Click Go at the bottom left to start the conversion The 3D file will be created in the destination folder eco G 0 uro name S Mark as 30 Lot 2 mem i teme Open this file to check it and click the triangle pointing right in the lower window frame to switch to the second picture If the second picture appears the conversion was suc cessful The MPO file is displayed in 3D on suitable devices EEE gt EUS EARR 193 Text in Pictures Text in Pictures Click a picture with the text tool from the toolbox Window Toolbox and a rectangular text object that you can write in will appear If the font is too small you can select the font size font and different styles like in a word processor Select the required text part and for example modify the font size in the text palette that opens when you select the text tool The size of the text object adapts itself to the text as you write so that you do not
14. In this case you can swap color 0 with your transparent color if it is not in position 0 in the color table Click the color example for color 1 or color 2 and select the color in the table displayed for palette pictures in the bottom section of the dialog Note the further instructions for searching and replacing in the next chapter 171 Colors Mode and Colorize Sepia allows you to color an image as was common at the start of the 20th century Colorize opens the Color Picker where you can select a color to color the picture after you click OK If you want to convert just part of a picture to grayscale select it with one of the selec tion tools and open the context menu Select Convert Selection into Grayscale If you want to leave just specific parts in color you can select them and then select Invert Selection from the Edit menu You thus create an effect like with partly colored in black and white pictures You can select several parts of a picture by holding down the Shift key and dragging open other selections For further information on selecting see p 150 onwards What is color depth Pictures can have different color depth levels Black and white pictures without gray scales for example an engraving have the shallowest color depth Only one piece of in formation needs to be stored for each pixel black or white The computer requires two characters i e one and zero to display black or white Only a single dig
15. Long Side ng Short Side 3A Naming n cc rr x Use the following characters for the name n name c column add more c s to add digits r rows add more r s to add digits absolute number add more s to add digits x extension Sample The naming n cc rr x will create the first segment of sample gif as sample 01 01 gif Cancel ox The individual files are automatically given a numbered name The scheme for the auto matically created name is shown in the Naming box The n stands for the file name of the source file and should not be changed The letter c stands for column and r stands for row You can then determine the position of each individual picture using the file names The x at the end of the name is automatically replaced by the respective format extension You can also specify in the file selection dialog whether just the current selection should be saved The two additional Save only selection and Save picture with selec tion options are only available in the file selection dialog if you have made a selection Save only selection saves a picture containing just the selection 24 Saving and Closing If the selection is not rectangular a picture is created in which the selection fits Save picture without selection saves the picture as if there were no selection A selection that is simply an outline without content cannot be saved File Format JPEG JFIF JPG JPEG
16. Modes and Colorize 1 0 0 ccc ce ccc cece cen cence e nen e ence ene een eens 171 INVErt oo bose bates daveter cee ketal ne Sonasieths eeiecsaiots lense usetuadeesxiecsoceeds 180 Mirroring Sid Se ater tt iea lot Sasi ail A teed eas Sa Re bad Slane het Ot a 180 WNSKEWE garrett tiie sieta nae fe caked AE E etsy ere aia aed yee eet eae ts 183 White COPECO ee arm yas te ee hed asta aoe A IPR DR aby as oa T 185 User defineditilt rs sesto aie vis aed a Kemi Moe taeda We Gita eda RS Gane eds 186 Color Permutations lt 3 2523440 8ateeicetwsas besaetasteunees dees bas evesneisataneeess 186 Alpha Channels seiersen a sada oe oa A pean wees aes Severe E AA sn regains 196 Layers yeere iin aed tea E AE ad eave deena dung E EE ques E ana eae ae 199 Text 1h PICUGIGS 2 4 snag a soa Soe te ES dae HANNE pele As Tee Sa es SS 200 Viewing amp Sorting TAESBEOWSEL scot etc iet alec oa E E a cain fossa wae Celanese AER 202 Pictures on your iPod 2 5 oc5 ites ks eta oes 5 ieee wde oe eed bee ee Lee ca es See ae 243 Slid SHOW sasins2x8 sta E E ota elaatweuleesendsadbw une eadeuses Serr eesd suse seuss 244 Fimeauplicatestiles lt 624255 vo te eee E E E ER A Rca et Osea 257 Special Geo Coordinate S 5565 sch yay egestas ad aRaeal sph baw Si see Ash se O4 a SNS GN 260 Setior xport GPS data 25 oceans se cavddis dad EE n kash iu deredene eas cued 263 DRINAkKerinstedd Of ADR At Seats ba a eel Vane Meadow e aa eae Galea 265 Recording Points for Determining Measurements
17. Unscew Set Proportions you can correct leaning lines in pictures You can now set the points easier with Alt clicks as you do not need to first click on the points Please note you need to start with point one in the lower left corner When you enter a search word in the upper search field in the Browser you can select further criteria in the lines below New is the criteria Images only with which you can blind out text files and folders for example 329 New in GraphicConverter 9 7 1 GPS data can be entered in the format Degree Minutes Seconds too When you create a polygone selection you now can delete the last points with back space or delete if you did a mistake In the Preferences Browser Libraries you can disable the display of the Media Lib rary and the content of iPhoto and Aperture In Preferences Slide Show General More you can select Delete Remove sidecar and RAWS in addition to automatically delete the RAW file and the side car file when you delete the JPG file of the same name during a slide show This makes sense if you create RAW files with side car file and JPG files simultaniously in your camera and want to delete bad pictures New in GraphicConverter 9 7 1 The formats SWS used in video production NPO Nokia phone format and SPE microscope format can be opened In the Pure Carbon filter dialog a new button Copy for Batch allows to copy the set tings into the batch so you can use it in batch
18. ioe a af m we a leah T Save Print Slide Show Convert Browser Folders Search Clipboard Display Content Devices Display Windows Camera M Notify if a new camera is connected Edit Check for connected camera during startup External Editors Memory Map Misc Open Download Images from Connected Camera dialog Images Format Modifications M Rotate images depending on EXIF Data m Rotate thumbnails will rewrite EXIF data Add offset to index ol TWAIN Acquiring Ask whether to scan another page after each scan Saving Results M Reset file index after restart Format Multipage TIFF document Multipage PDF document Separate single paged documents Restore to Defaults Last Values The Saving Results Reset file index after restart option allows you to reset the index in the filename to zero when the program is started so that the first picture is given an index of 0001 again If you scan several pages you can combine them in a Multipage TIFF or PDF docu ment or create Separate single paged documents A normal file is created at first for multipage documents and the other pages are then attached Note the navigation tools at the bottom left of the window frame that you can use to switch to the other pages Using the Stamp for Touching Up Scanned pictures often have small marks caused by dust You can see these faults easiest if you display the picture at a zoom level of 100 Select Stamp in the toolbox and
19. necessarily have to use the handles at the corners You can rotate a text object via the palette Position To do this switch to the pointer tool and click the text object Click the round control in the palette and turn it like a real control knob You can also enter the angle in the neighboring input box Here it is easier to adjust the control in small steps if you hold down the mouse button move it away slightly from the control and adjust it there The size and the position of the upper left hand corner of the selected object is also displayed in the palette 194 Text in Pictures If you click next to a text object a new text object will be created You can edit the different text objects by clicking them and then double click the text to show a cursor The cursor keys move the text frame you can also use the mouse Sankt Laurentius Zu Lorenzkirch Wer nicht liebt der kennt Gott nicht denn Gott ist die Liebe 1 Joh 4 5 All text objects are listed in the Text Objects palette The start of the text in the object is automatically used as a name Click a text object in the list to select it x Text Objects Saint Laurentius Lorenzkirch Delete Flatten Flatten all Delete allows you to delete text objects and Flatten incorporates text objects into the picture so that they can no longer be edited Flatten all flattens alle text objects at once If a picture has several layers the text is flattened into
20. of your photo frame You will find the resolution in the documentation for your photo frame or on the packaging Prepare for Picture Frame Device Physical Resolution of the Digital Picture Frame 4 Width 1024 Height 768 A Scaling Method O Crop Letterbox Cancel fo If your pictures have the aspect ratio 4 3 and your photo frame 16 9 a lot will have been trimmed off the image with the Crop option In this case it is better to select Letterbox to add black margins on the right and left of the image You can also specify the crop method yourself before you use this option by selecting Export Crop for Photo Ser vice Click OK to select the destination folder Remember that some picture frames make a collage from several pictures or add mar gins so it is not absolutely necessary to edit images beforehand We recommend choos ing picture frames with a high resolution of approx 90 ppi and testing them beforehand at a store Only buy a frame with an aspect ratio of 16 9 if you are using a camera that can be set to this aspect ratio 220 The Browser The submenu Metadata EXIF IPTC 2 ee WOECEER gt al ome gt EXIF Date gt Set Creation and Modification Date Depending on EXIF Set Creation Date Depending on EXIF Move Folders gt Set EXIF Date to File Creation Date Rotate Mirror gt Shift the EXIF Timestamp Set EXIF Date Misc gt Rotate Depending on EXIF PGs only Remove
21. recognized PICT resource PICT graphic that was read into or out of a resource fork PIX Modified BMP format used by some iPod games PM UNIX xv format PNG New file format for the Internet Supports 1 2 4 8 and 24 bit per pixel anda gamma value Das Format APNG ist eine Weiterentwicklung des PNG formats und erlaubt auch Animationen see p 276 The Apple Touch Icon for bookmarks on the iPhone and iPod Touch is saved in PNG format PORST Photo on disk format Variation of the JPEG format PowerPoint Only the pictures contained are shown ina multiple page document 284 Supported Formats Format Import Export Comment Ppat PSD Photoshop format for Version 3 0 or higher Supports 1 8 16 and 24 bit per pixel PSF Can contain several JPGs PSP PaintShop Pro format PTG ArtRage PWP Format of a developing service Pxx Degas Atari Degas program format 320 x 200 pixels 16 colors PI1 PC1 640 x 200 pixels 4 colors P12 PC2 640 x 400 pixels 2 colors P13 PC3 QDV Giffer format Supports 1 4 and 8 bit per pixel QNT QTIF e QuickTime graphic format QuickTime 3 or higher is required for opening these files QTL RAF Can contain JPEG RAW You can use the Raw filter to import raw data data types You must specify the width height and color depth when importing or saving There are many
22. the angle or additional circles New in GraphicConverter 9 6 Photoshop Pattern files can be imported In the lower right section of the Browser you can display a map in the tab Map If a picture containes geo data now a needle is displayed in the corresponding position You can move the needle it the position is not correct The geo data will be updated after a security question If a picture does not yet contain geo data you can enter the place into the search field over the map and drag the needle to the exact place to set the geo data If during copying of files a name conflict occures you can now rename the files automatically which is handy when you copy more than one file An index will be added to the file name This option is located in the dialog File Exists The Brush tool now supports pressure sensitive pens In Preferences Slide Show Misc you can select the Screen mode Use Custom Value crop larger Images For example if you enter 500 as zoom value all pictures greater than display resolution will be cropped In Preferences Browser Thumbnails you can select HDR Text for hdr files so HDF files of iOS devices will be marked with the text HDR In Convert amp Modify you can convert SVG files into PDF files keeping the vector content as vectors with Convert SVG to PDF vectors The format Better Portable Graphics BPG can be imported It offers the modes lossy and lossless and is based on the HEVC format In
23. Basic HTML Meta HTML Text Batch Addition to the Body Tag Text after lt body gt Text before lt body gt Addition to the Head Tag Open J Save Gane Addition to the body tag allows you to enter additional HTML tags for the body Text after lt body gt allows you to enter additional HTML tags after the body Text before lt body gt allows you to enter additional HTML tags before the body Addition to the head tag allows you to enter further HTML tags for the head section 85 Photo Albums on the Internet Catalog You can enter so called Meta tags on the HTML Meta tab if you want your pages to be found by search engines and displayed for corresponding search names Catalog General File HTML Basic HTML Meta HTML Text Batch 1 Allow Search Site to build an Index Author Description Language Keywords Add text before lt a gt Add text inside lt a gt Add text after lt a gt Open X Save Cancel eo First enable the Allow Search Site to build an index option Enter an Author and describe your page in the Description box Enter en for English in the Language entry field We recommend entering terms that you think might be entered as search strings by Internet surfers as Keywords You can save your settings with the Save button at the bottom left and then use them again by clicking
24. Creator Rename Insert Profile Edit File Info IPTC Edit Comment XSI Create Preview creates a preview for graphics that do not yet have one You can also use this option to create a larger preview Remove Resource Fork allows you to delete the resource in images to make them smaller for Internet use or compatible for editing in Windows The resource fork contains previews in various sizes among other things Add Image as Folder Icon sets the selected image as a folder icon so that the folder in the Finder shows the selected image Change Type and or Creator opens a dialog where you can change the document type and creator I Change Type to JPEG Use Values of First File Type and creator of first selected file JPEG GKON Set Values from Another File C Change Creator to 7 231 The Browser Enable the required option and enter the type or creator you want to set Clicking Use values of first file inserts the values shown below from the first selected file in the browser window in the boxes Rename opens a dialog where you can rename files systematically see p 35 You can also open the rename dialog by selecting Edit Find compare replace rename Rena me selected Files If all or several graphics are selected at the same time you can deselect them by press ing any button other than the control keys Command key etc Insert profile will apply a profile to the select
25. Double Orientation Tags and Reset Them JPGs only Change Orientation Value Rebuild EXIF Preview PGs only Remove EXIF Preview PGs only Edit or Add EXIF Data Delete Host amp Software Correct File Date Export EXIF Data into Text File Delete EXIF Tags PGs only Remove Maker Note and Comment Add or Edit GPS Values Copy EXIF to XMP Copy XMP IPTC to other IPTC Records PTC Copy Comment to IPTC Caption Copy IPTC Caption to Comment Copy Filename to Object Name Copy Filename to Caption Copy Filename to End of Caption Copy EXIF Date to IPTC Date Copy IPTC Date to EXIF Date Copy Windows EXIF Tags to IPTC Copy Spotlight Comment to IPTC Caption Copy Spotlight Comment to IPTC Keywords Create XMP Sidecar File Find and Replace IPTC Data General Change Resolution Value Lossless PGs only Extract JPG from Photo Raw PhotoRaw only Fix File Length of Recovered JPEGs JPGs only Remove Metadata Rebuild Metadata nsert DESCRIPT ION File Content into IPTC Caption All options can be used for JPG files All options where JPGs only is specified can be used for the formats CR2 CRW EPS EPSF GIF NEF NRW PDF PNG PS PSD THM TIF TIFF PNG PDF and other formats that are indicated with R W at http www sno phy queensu ca phil exiftool in the Support column of the Supported File Types table EXIF Set Creation and Modification Date depending on EXIF overwrites the creation and modific
26. Editors Memory Image Capture z SS 7M Show warning if disk is nearly full Mise Temporary Folder GraphicConverter Temporary Items It is recommended selecting a folder on a different hard drive in which the temporary files for the undo option can be written P Restore to Defaults gt Last Values __ Cancel Ca If a picture cannot be opened for example because it is corrupt or has an unknown for mat the preview saved in the picture file will be used for printing This may result in a loss of quality Print Folder To print all the pictures in a folder individually select File Print Folder Each picture is printed on one page 99 Print Folder Processing Pictures Non destructive image editing with the Cocooner One new feature in GraphicConverter 9 is the possibility to edit images non destructively The image file is left unchanged Only the modifications are saved The actual image file remains completely unchanged because the modifications are written in the XMP section of JPG and TIFF files as simple instructions in text form In the case of files in a RAW format like for example CRW NEF or DNG the modification instructions are written in an additional XMP file that has the same name as the image file but with the extension xmp A database with these modification instructions is not created as is often the case with other programs The XMP files are written to the folder where the image file is al
27. Flatten all Delete allows you to delete text objects and Flatten incorporates text objects into the picture so that they can no longer be edited Flatten all flattens alle text objects at once If a picture has several layers the text is flattened into the active layer If you save the image in a normal file format the text objects in the saved file are always incorporated into the image as GraphicConverter supports levels in it s own format only To keep the text objects you need to save as GraphicConverter Image Document gcimgqd If you insert text over a picture that features prominent structures it is often difficult to read the text In this case you can open a speech bubble dialog by double clicking the text tool in the toolbox and selecting the Erase Background option Antialias E Erase Background A colored bar will then be inserted behind the text You can select the color via the foreground color The Anti alias option allows you to smoothen the edges of the font Viewing amp Sorting It is easy to lose your overview even when there are only several pictures open Graphic Converter helps you to view and sort these graphics with the browser and the slide show This way you can maintain your overview and achieve your goals The Browser Summary GraphicConverter has a powerful browser function that allows you to oversee manage sort and edit larger numbers of graphics and movies You can export to an e mail progr
28. Labe Show Icon and Text E Use small size Drag additional icons from the dialog onto the toolbar or remove the icons by dragging them downwards off the toolbar The browser toolbar can be customized in the same way see p 203 onwards Converting a picture with Save as Summary Select File Open then the target format in the File Save as dialog and save 20 Converting a picture with Save as 1 Open the picture to be converted with File Open If pictures have already been opened using this option they can be opened again quickly from the File Open Recent submenu 2 Select File Save as to convert the picture The file selection dialog may appear different in older Mac OS versions The necessary options are also available in the old file selection dialog however Save As 20150320 MG_8488 tif a Tags 88 a m mw He E Sonnenfinsternis Schoo E Favorites Name Date Modified v Size Kind Recents gt Dropbox iCloud Drive gt gt Applications EJ Desktop T Documents Au hagenhenke W Pictures BMP Windows BMP GIF GIF Downloads GraphicConverter Image Document E senfkorn Juni Juli 15 JPEG 2000 JP2 p vahrbuoh Werkachine MooV QuickTime Movie MOV 7 Jahrbuch Werkschule PDF portable document format PDF F LensTRUE PICT PICT PCT PNG PNG PSD Photoshop PSD File Formal v TIFF TIF TIFF j Options Show All Set Format from Extension
29. Line a m he Overwrite the value for example with a 1 and select the required measuring unit to specify for subsequent measurements that the number of pixels originally displayed should represent one centimeter for example If you want to measure in pixels leave the displayed value and select Pixel as the unit if it is not already set After calibrating you can immediately start measuring distances with a line The result is shown on the Information palette on the Comment tab 000 Information Image ExiF XMP EXIFToo Comment GPs __ Comment UTF8 encoded data only TIFF JPEG PNG GIF Calibrate 561 65 pixel 1 68 cm Line length 1 49 cm There you can copy the values to use them in a word processor or in an Excel table for example The values are also shown on the Coordinates palette which is useful when measuring and calibrating again x Position x T E In addition to the option for measuring lines you can also measure the area of rectan gles with Measure Rectangle and circles with Measure Circle Select the corresponding options from the pop up menu for this Measure Min Max and Mean in a Rectangle allows you to measure the brightness value of the darkest and lightest pixel The mean value is also displayed This option is useful if for example you want to determine on pic tures of bacteria cultures whether the whole area is affected how badly the darkest area is affected and what is the ave
30. Option key and copy Using the key combinations with the Control or Option key you can select a further 20 destination folders When you copy or move a file in the Browser to another folder and in the destination folder is a file with the same name you will be asked in a dialog whether the existing file should be replaced by the new one you copy or move The dialog also offers the options Stop Don t Replace and Delete new File If you change the name in the edit field you can also select Rename In the Preferences in the section Browser Edit you can select Duplicate Filename Stop is default button so the return key stops the process Don t ask and rename automatically adds Copy to the file name and when repeated addi tionally a number if the name of the file already exists in the destination folder In the preview area you can also enter the name of a file to find it quickly While you are typing do not stop as the system will immediately jump to the matching file If only two pictures are selected both are displayed at the same time on the right hand side so that you can compare them if they are similar The picture details such as the label and the format are displayed under the picture on the right hand side On the EXIF EXIFTool and IPTC tabs you can select and copy the displayed text allowing you for example to paste it into a word processing or spread sheet program Double click a preview image in the middle or rig
31. P Options C Split Save only selection O Save whole image Create LOWSRC M Set Format from Extension Save web ready without resource Make filename ready for the web Merge color profile into image for web usage and remove EXIF M Save all pages of multipage files _ New Folder Cancel Save If the Create LOWSRC option is selected a GIF picture with 16 colors is created in addi tion to the picture file This GIF picture can be used for Internet applications with the LOWSRC HTML command From Mac OS 8 5 Set Format from Extension allows you to set the format by entering the extension with the filename and not by selecting it from the pop up menu For exam ple if you write Rose tiff the file is automatically saved in TIFF format Save web ready without resource saves pictures without a resource This keeps the file size small and is particularly useful if the picture is going to be put on a Web site The resource contains the overview that is shown when you open files in the file selection dia log You should enable Merge color profile into image for web usage and remove EXIF when you save pictures with profiles for the Web as many Web browsers do not evaluate profile information Save all pages of multipage files should be enabled if you want to save all pages in multipage files Disable this option to save just the first page Saving and Closing The current picture is saved with Fi
32. Required Time 0 4 s Palettes are always placed in front of windows and also in front of the current window Open the palettes required for your work and create the ideal work environment for your needs The Position palette displays the X and Y positions of the mouse so that certain posi tions in the picture can be found 51 Work Environment While you drag open a selection the palette will be enlarged and also show the length of the diagonals the area and the aspect ratio of the selection The 1 represents a square and 0 66 is about 2 3 x Position W 1340 H 1340 pixel a 481 A Ratio You can select the zoom level at the bottom left of the window On the right you can switch to the next zoom level down or up using the minus or plus magnifying glass The zoom level is shown on the left and can be overwritten with a different value Single clicking the triangle opens a pop up menu where you can select a specific zoom level If your mouse has a scroll wheel you can hold down the option key and zoom with the wheel If you want to center the point under the mouse cursor during zooming select the Focus Snap zoom focus to mouse position option in the General Edit section of the Preferences ax WJILOa LA L Le LS The i button opens the information pallet and the circle with four sections indicates whether ColorSync is enabled Simply click this button to enable and disable ColorSync This option is also
33. Roll belonging to the iOS app Photos The apps are easy to use Unfortunately the accompanying websites are rather complicated to use 301 New in GraphicConverter 7 6 1 and 7 6 2 however Please note that quick browsing of pictures from a web server in GraphicConverter is only possible with a fast Internet connection If you take photos with your iPhone or another iOS device and have installed the latest version of the free Dropbox app your pictures will be copied into the Camera Uploads folder in your Dropbox as soon as you have a wireless connection to the Internet This allows you to synchronize your pictures on all devices without iCloud and iPhoto like with Apple s Photo Stream To display the contents of the Camera Uploads Dropbox folder select it like all others on the left hand side of the browser You will find the Dropbox folder in your user folder In the dialog for IPTC document information you can save the content of the dialog and open saved content by clicking the gears at the bottom left Upon saving the options IPTC NAA and XMP are now available at the bottom of the file selection dialog We recommend saving the IPTC information only in XMP format since this also includes the URL and Contact boxes and will probably be used more in future GraphicConverter saves the thumbnails displayed in the browser in the RAM They can then be displayed again without delays because they do not need to be recalculated This can take a f
34. Scharfen 800 10 Scharfen 800 20 Scharfen Gamma 80 Maximale Gr e 720 x 480 Skalieren 720 x 480 Tonwert 30 Tonwert 35 Tonwert 8 Tonwert 100 Gamma 0 3 Kont 30 dit Selected Batch Define Batch Destination V Convert to Subfolder Convert to the Same Folder Convert to Other Folder Format BMP Windows BMP GIF GIF JPEG 2000 JP2 V JPEG JFIF JPG JPEG MooV QuickTime Movie MOV PDF portable document format PDF PICT PICT PCT PNG PNG PSD Photoshop PSD TIFF TIF TIFF Show All E 101_0137 jpg 101_0144 jpg be created on the desktop whenever errors occur during the conversion Create complete log file logs every single step of the multiple conversion process 46 Convert amp Modify Preferences Convert File Extension Use new format extension replaces an old format extension which may be included in the filename of the source files for example tiff with the extension for the new format The source files are not changed Preferences 0 Dee ee a fie ets General Open Save Print Slide Show Browser l General General Formats Extension m Use new format extension Convert Text IPTC Date Keep original after conversion Index C Index convertion Minimal Digits Number l l Change name to Start index with Step Create Icon Preview _ Only if one doesn t exist Restore t
35. The red ball is simply used to set the weighting of the different optimi zation techniques It is therefore not a simple level adjustment or a color balance HTM cate Minas tees N A n r i 3 t eT A F A 1 3 1 EXPOSURE CONTROL AMBIENT LIGHT CONTROL 2 Color Constancy Correction With this conrtol you select the amount of the internal color correction Initially it is at 100 you can override it from 0 to 120 Sometimes photos look better when you change it slightly Please note that in the case of a photo with perfect colors this control has very little to no effect 3 Exposure Controller This overrides the amount of exposure correction of Xe847 It influences brightness and contrast but it is not a traditional brightness contrast control It behaves differently wigh every photo As an example if a photo already hat perfect exposure this control only affects brightness Just try it and then move on to the ambient 104 Pure Carbon Filter 4 Ambient Light Controller This controller simulates a situation as if the scene were illuminated with a different color of ambient light within some limits Look at it as a kind of generalized color temperature controller Use this to create a different lighting atmosphere or to correct a color fault 5 Color Tone Shift Click the gear wheel in the upper left corner to swap to the control for the Color Tone Shift In the same place appears a checkbox that
36. The so called red eye effect often occurs when you take snapshots with automatic camer as You see the red retina in the eye instead of a black pupil because the flash shined di rectly into the eye You can use Effect Auto Red Eye to automatically set all pupils to their normal black In some cases it is difficult to recognize the red tone so you should check the picture for inadvertently changed parts You can use Effect Red Eye to set the pupils to their normal black Often the pupil is very wide due to the dark environment and looks odd because the rest of the picture has been illuminated by the flash In this case it is a good idea to use the Effect Red Eye Pro option that will be explained after the normal Red Eye option In the UB version of GraphicConverter there is also a tool at the bottom of the toolbox that you can use to simply paint over red eyes However when you use this tool you may paint over any reflections on the eye This tool is particularly suited to painting over red white or other eye colors on animals as the other options in GraphicConverter only recog nize red eyes You can adjust the size of the tool with the slider on the bottom edge of the image window or by pressing Shift and using the scroll wheel Click the red or other col ored eye to make it black If you have installed the USB Overdrive system extension you cannot change the size of the tool with Shift and the scroll wheel as this function is blo
37. You cannot add or delete any points later on With Edit Frame Selection with Foreground Color you can draw a line arround the selection which is interesting especially for polygonal selections Draw the desired shape with the tool for polygonal selections and use the feature Edit Paste Paste into Selection allows you to paste the contents of the clipboard into the current selection stretched to fill the selection Paste into Selection propor tional allows you to keep the proportions The selection is not filled completely in this case if the aspect ratio of the clipboard content differs from the aspect ratio of the selec tion Invert Selection and Fill Selection with Foreground Color If you want to select everything except for one part of the picture first use one of the se lection tools to select the area and then select Edit Invert Selection The selection then remains visible but a further selection borderline can be seen on the outer picture edges Now everything between the outer and inner selection line will be selected You can make this clearer by highlighting the selection with Edit Fill selection with foreground Color Clearing and Recalling a Selection You can delete a selection by pressing Escape esc selecting Edit Unselect from the menu or by clicking next to the selection with a selection tool Use Edit Select last Se lection to recall a cleared selection 157 Removing Red Eyes Removing Red Eyes
38. a part of a picture in GraphicConverter it is best to use the selection tool at the top right of the toolbox If you cannot see the toolbox you can call it up by selecting Win dow Show Toolbox from the menu Use the selection tool to place a rectangle as accurately as possible around the section of the picture that should be left after trimming The pixels behind the line also belong to the selected area Use the handles on the selection lines to adjust the rectangle You can adjust the rectangle very accurately by using the center handles between the corners as they only move one edge You can work most precisely when the picture is zoomed to at least 100 Finally trim the selected area by selecting Edit Crop Selection Command Y The parts of the pic ture not enclosed in the selection rectangle will be cut away The picture will be displayed in a correspondingly minimized window You can delete a selection by pressing Escape or selecting Edit Unselect Command Shift A from the menu The Edit menu also contains the Smart Crop command This trims any single color margins leaving you with the actual picture If the scanned picture has a white margin you can use this option to easily cut off the scanned edges without having to set a selec tion rectangle Click the center of the picture section which is to be kept Note that GraphicConverter searches for the color set as the background color as the edge If you want to delete a
39. abbrevi ation stands for dots per inch Sometimes the abbreviation ppi points per inch is used This is exactly the same Resolution Resolution unified z2 ppi O Horizontal and Vertical Horizontal 2 Ie ppi Vertical 72 gt l ppi _ Resample image Cancel oK Pictures normally have the same horizontal and vertical resolution The option of set ting different values for horizontal amp vertical can be used for example to convert pictures with different resolutions to a standard X and Y Resolution 114 Picture size an example Basic rule The higher the resolution the better the picture quality Pictures used for printing magazines for example Macworld are normally at least 300 dpi For line draw ings however a resolution of 1200 or better 2400 dpi is recommended as the lines will otherwise not be sharp enough If our example picture was printed out double size the pixels are enlarged The resolu tion would go down to 150 dpi and quality would fall Convert picture should be enabled if you want the picture to also contain more pixels when the resolution is increased or fewer pixels when the resolution is decreased Layout programs only use the resolution value to display the picture at the correspond ing scale after import Since for example in InDesign you can adjust the scale with a key board shortcut so that the full width of the frame is used there is no point in changing the resolution
40. an alpha channel was created which is white in this part The circle and the rectangle are black in the alpha channel eee Transparenz Beispielbild mit Kreis und Rechteck tif RGB Alpha z 5 2 ecctoooo Options Adjust Save Undo Aedo Previous Nert Save amp Next Snare Rating 3 has pio p20 nso ars 200 ras 3330 pars aso re hse hers 2000 Bizs aso fad ps If a picture contains a path created with Photoshop you can convert it into an alpha channel with Picture Alpha Channel Create from Embedded Path Convert premultiplied to non premultiplied and Convert non premultiplied to premultiplied both swap the premultiplied mode of an image Images in premultiplied mode can have advantages in particular if you are working with videos because the images can be mapped more quickly Picture Alpha Channel Flatten overwrites the picture content with the content of the alpha channel to make it visible The normal picture information is then lost Save the picture beforehand if you have edited it and then save the new picture immediately afterwards with a new name so you do not accidentally overwrite the source picture The second example picture with the white pullover area was created with this function If for example a picture shows a bottle against a colored background and the bottle is black in the alpha channel you can set the background to white with Picture Alpha Channel Flatten The Picture Alpha Channel Add option ca
41. appears black this is normally caused by a faulty color profile Click the circle at the bottom of the picture frame to disable ColorSync Now the faulty color profile is no longer applied and the image should be displayed correctly In this case delete the faulty color profile file and if necessary correct the settings in the Edit Assign Profile dia log You will find the color profile file in the folder User Library Application Sup port GraphicConverter Profiles The tilde stands for the name of the user Press and hold the Alt key in the Finder s Go menu to access the Library folder If you cannot replace the deleted profile file with a backup open an image that contains the profile GraphicCo nverter automatically saves the profile in the Profiles folder Pictures for the Internet Whenever you are preparing pictures for the Internet you can leave ColorSync enabled if you enable the Merge color profile into image for web usage and remove EXIF option when saving with the file selection dialog Many internet browsers display images without profiles therefore you have to merge the profile corrections into the image If you use the Save for Web function this function is often preset in the dialog that opens 145 Color Management with Profiles and ColorSync How color profiles work Color profiles indicate the color space that a device can display A color space is like a list of colors Since this list contains many
42. available via Edit Assign Profile Enable and disable Use ColorSync color matching in the dialog that opens to display pictures with or without a color pro file If a picture contains several pages you can switch to the other pages with the page pop up menu or the arrow buttons in the lower right hand corner of the window Page lof3 w ele Directly to the right of the picture is the most important palette the Toolbox where tools colors and patterns can be selected 52 Pointer F Lasso L and Polygon Selection E Magic Pen W Pen and Brush K Text V Filled Rectangle U Rounded C Ellipse T Fill Z Blur Smudge Dodge Eyedropper N Slice Zoom S Fill Pattern Swap foreground and background color Alt X Aspect ratio for selection Work Environment Q Hand M Selection and O Elliptic Selection B Transparency 1 Erasor R Line D Rectangle X Rounded Y Ellipse G Stamp Sharpen Sponge Burn White Point H Calliper rule Red Eye Switch to black and white Alt D Foreground and background color Pen size Copy Mode All the other palettes can be shown and hidden with the Tab key The small triangle at the bottom right of some of the tools indicates that you can double click the tool to open a dialog with settings These dialogs are explained in the chapters referred to at the end of most of the following paragraphs By clicking and holding you ca
43. chosen If you choose 10 rows and 5 columns for only 6 images a huge image is produced of which most is white GraphicConverter cannot create virtual reality panoramas in QuickTime format Use programs like DoubleTake from www http echoone com or the more professional PTMac from www kekus com Split splits large pictures into several small pictures see p 23 Convert text starts the text conversion that only works with ASCII texts and not for example Word texts All text files selected in the source directory are converted using the converter selected under Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences in the Con vert Convert Text section for example all CRs are replaced by CR and LF when convert 29 Convert amp Modify ing from Macintosh to MS DOS Special characters such as foreign characters are also converted Preferences General File Text Conversion Formats Source Macintosh Convert Text IPTC i Destination MS DOS Hy IPTC Settings Separator of IPTC Keywords Create _ One IPTC text file for each file Restore to Defaults zE Last Values J Cancel _ a Specify the format of the source text under Source and the required destination format under Destination You can use Convert Line Endings to convert just the ends of the lines A dialog where you can select the target format opens Convert Line Endings To O Mac OS O UNIX O DOS Cancel Cok Export IPTC exports
44. color margin is then left over it will also be trimmed away if it corresponds with the trim color Rotate If for example a portrait format picture is displayed in landscape format the simplest way to correct it is with the Rotate Left or Rotate Right icons Pictures in JPG format are not re compressed when rotated in 90 degree steps so that there are no quality losses 125 Rotate Picture Rotate opens a submenu where you can selected a series of options for rotating Left 90 Counterclockwise 2L Right 90 Clockwise HR 180 X83 Other Value with Line X84 Other Value with Line Other Value with Live Rotation Other Value with Live Rotation Other Value X 7 Live Rotation Option If a picture is leaning slightly you can rotate it with the options at the bottom Other Value with Line changes the mouse cursor to a cross You can then drag a helper line along a line in the picture that is supposed to be straight Zoom into the section of the picture where you want to drag the line using the magni fying glass Drag the helper line from top to bottom for example starting at the corner of a house At the end of the helper line an arrow shows the direction in which the picture is turned The picture will be rotated as soon as you release the mouse The closest align ment is always selected when rotating The helper line does not stay in the picture Other Value with Live Rotation is immediately shown rotat
45. color profile into image for web usage and remove EXIF option This option is available in the file selection dialog that opens when you select Save As If you select iDVD with merged Color Profile Slide Show the images with calculated profiles are saved in the Documents GraphicConverter iDVD Export folder that is cre ated automatically in your document folders Delete these pictures as soon as you have completed the current iDVD project 219 The Browser As televisions often have a brighter picture than computer monitors we recommend darkening the images slightly with a batch before export where applicable We recom mend also increasing the contrast slightly at the same time so that the pictures do not look flat disclabel is a program that helps you print inlays for a wide range of CD and DVD boxes You can also print blank CDs and DVDs disclabel provides numerous samples so that you can achieve interesting results with just a few mouse clicks You can download a demo from www smileonmymac com IPTC opens a dialog where you can select which fields should be saved with which separators in a single file or in several files JAlbum saves images and text files with the IPTC data for use in the program JAlbum that you can use to create Web catalogs Prepare for Picture Frame device allows you to optimise the size and aspect ratio of images for digital photo frames Then a dialog opens where you can enter the resolution
46. comparison to the JPG format the file size is only one third with comparable quality BPG animations can be opened too Edit Use as Fill Pattern sets the current picture or a selection as a fill pattern The new fill pattern appeares in the dialog of the fill pattern field in the Tool palette Click the field to open the dialog With Effect Vignetting Correction you can correct the vignetting of a picture Take a picture of a white background with the same lens zoom and exposure or use a white translucent lens cap Select the correction picture in the dialog and click OK Atmosphere Freeze and Thermic are three new filters in the Effect menu You can refine the results with functions like Brightness with Curve and Contrast With Effect Hot Cold you can color pictures bluish or orange You can use the new features Picture Invert Luminance like Film Negative and Hue as effects Picture Shift Channels Right and Channels Left shift the content of the color 326 New in GraphicConverter 9 6 channels into the adjacent channel You can use this feature as an effect In Preferences General Display Windows you can select Information Follow main window This makes the information palette stick to the picture window In the dialog Picture Size Scale the PopUp Menus for the unit have ceased to exist Additionally to the pixel size the percentage value is displayed permanently Improved display of profile detail
47. details with extension with path with elapsed time Font Lucida Grande 14 pt Sort files By Name Order Ascending gt Restore to Defaults Last Values Cancel OK You can use Optimize Open Images at reduced Resolution to avoid long loading times during the slide show if the image files are large There is no noticeable loss in display quality Select Optimize Open Images at reduced Resolution to enhance colors of applica ble pictures Enable Show File name if you want to display the filename at the top left of the screen You can also show the details the extension the path or the elapsend time 248 Slide show Slide Show General More Slide Show 8 g ee SS ed SRS EA a General Open Save Print Slide Show Browser et Search General Folders _ Separately Transitions A Move Folders Export to Movie M Navigation toolbar Metadata Monitor V Fullscreen Misc _ Automatically hide and show toolbar A Darken all screens _ Show next image on second Primary Screen Main Screen 2560 x 1600 gt Keyboard 0 7 set label control 0 5 set rating _ 4 gt Restore to Defaults JE Last Values Cancel Ok j Select Folders Separately to display the content of subfolders seperately If you want to sort images you can display the Move Folders 1 15 at the bottom right of the screen Click one of the move folders to move the displayed picture to it You can select the move f
48. do not need to install any basic TWAIN software since the code is integrated in GraphicConverter You only need to install the TWAIN driver for your scanner The TWAIN folder is in the Preferences folder which is in the System folder Most installers of scan software install the scan program automatically for TWAIN too Before you scan for the first time you will need to select the required TWAIN software via File Scan Select TWAIN Scanner Data Source if several scanners or other TWAIN devices are connected There is no need to do this if only one TWAIN device is connected 6 0 6 Select Data Source Data Source CanoScan LiDE 700F Canon MX430 series Network Canon MX430 series Manufacturer CANON Product Family ScanGear Product Name CanoScan LiDE 700F Cancel iSelect 118 Using the Stamp for Touching Up Once the installation has been completed and you have selected the TWAIN source you can start the scanner software with File Scan Scan with TWAIN and scan a picture Please refer to the documentation that came with your scanner software for informa tion on operation The picture will be available in GraphicConverter after scanning and can be edited and saved If you want to start the next scan procedure immediately after scanning in an image via TWAIN you can specify this in the preferences in the General Image Capture TWAIN section with Ask whether to scan another page after each scan General
49. duplicates and just keep the originals It is possible that the version that is in the folder where you want 259 Geo Coordinates to keep the picture is deleted Therefore only use the automatic mode if all pictures are in a folder or you know exactly what you are doing Automatic Mode Do you really want to start the automatic mode gt This may delete important files if your folder selection y contains other items than images You can t undo this operation Please make a backup copy of your disk before using this function o Delete smaller files O Delete larger files O Delete older files Delete newer files M Move items to trash instead of delete Cancel _ Co You can choose whether the smaller the larger or the newer document should always be deleted If you have difficulties reading the small font you may want to enlarge this area of the screen To do this open the System Preferences via the Apple menu and click Universal Access Then click Seeing Select the On button under Zoom When zoom is turned on you use keyboard shortcuts to enlarge and reduce the screen image Command Option equal makes the screen image appear larger zooms in Command Option hyphen makes the screen image appear smaller zooms out You can use this for any part of the screen in all programs Special In this section options are described that are only used in special work situations In addi tion to the IPTC inf
50. example to smooth the edges in collages Double clicking the tool allows you to set the size Hold down the mouse button and drag across the picture to smudge crease lines in scanned photos or documents for example Another example for use would be smudging license plates that you do not want to show when publishing photographs of your car Smudging with the water drop is more subtle than coarsening with large pixels as is done when you select Filter Stilize Cl Pixelate see p 186 onwards The Sponge saturates or desaturates You can use it to convert only parts of a picture to black and white for example Dodge and Burn brighten or shadow parts of the picture These tools are often used in professional portrait photography to make faces or bodies look even more attractive The Eyedropper allows you to change the current foreground color by clicking a pic ture The color at the point you click is more or less picked up Hold down the Alt key to switch to the eyedropper when you are using another tool Double clicking the tool 55 Work Environment opens a slider at the side with which you can select the size of the eyedropper If you set a value greater than 1 the average of the color values is displayed Radius If you want to know how many pixels show a certain color alt click the desired color in the picture A dialog opens in which the number of pixels and the respective percentage are displayed The White Point
51. filter changes the colors of a picture on the basis of certain rules The HSV color model is used in which the colors are arranged in a circle If a picture 186 Color Permutations with at least 16 bit color depth see Picture Colors is open you can open the Color Picker by clicking the foreground or background color in the toolbox you may need to select Window Show Toolbox The color changes with the angle If you imagine a clock face on top of the color circle the red hues are from 0 to 3 o clock You can find the other primary colors by moving the fingers on the imaginary clock The Saturation of the color is defined by the distance from the center point The brightness Value can be set with the slider under the color circle The color permutations only change the color not the saturation and brightness 000 Colors Amka 7 the Q Chromatic Involution changes the colors in a picture in the same way as you transpose a piece of music from C major to F major on the basis of certain rules First of all here s a Malaysian beach as it was originally photographed Chromatic involution 187 Color Permutations And after chromatic involution The contrast intervals and the color harmony are thus maintained The contrast inter vals are related to Brightness differences of colors Angle differences of colors on color circle Saturation differences of colors The chromatic i
52. flash fitted on top of the camera is normally enough to avoid the red eye effect As the red eye effect occurs more often at greater tele ranges we recommend setting the flash indirect by pointing the front part of the flash upwards The Red Eye Pro option darkens the pupil and reduces its size at the same time Select the red pupil and choose Red Eye Pro from the Effect menu Nothing will happen at first GraphicConverter switches to a special mode similar to the elliptic selection tool Select the iris The iris is the area around the pupil that is blue brown or green Once you have made the elliptic selection the pupil is darkened and made smaller You can specify how dark and how small the pupil should be Reduce Level for Pro The Red Detection Level decides when a red tone is recognized as a pupil and black ened It may be worthwhile setting the threshold value high in pictures with a lot of red so that any parts of skin that you accidentally select are not darkened Select Effect Red Eye Settings and try different values out You can use Red Eye Color to define a color to be set for the pupil Remove Red Eye Settings Darken Level O 25 Reduce Level for Pro 20 Red Detection Level 30 Red Eye Color i cance al If black is too dark try a dark gray Click the color box and change the color in the color selector If black was the starting color and the color circle is selected as th
53. hold ing down the Alt key click an area in the picture with the same color or the same struc ture as the fault area Click the area to be stamped without holding down any other keys and move the mouse over the whole of the area to be touched up 119 Importing Pictures from Digital Cameras The mouse cursor will turn into a double circle Everything inside the inner circle will be stamped The edge of the stamp is softened The effect of the stamp gets weaker towards the second circle You can set the size and smoothness of the stamp by double clicking the stamp tool The following dialog opens Radius Smoothness Like in Photoshop Always use unstamped picture as master allows you to specify that not the picture already stamped in the same action but the picture underneath that has not been stamped should be used as the source The source for the stamp can also be another open picture For example you can even paste a face from a passport photo into a group picture Hold down the Alt key click the picture with the stamp and switch to the group picture Holding down the key move the mouse over the area where the face is to appear You may have to enlarge or reduce the source picture to adjust the size see p 113 Importing Pictures from Digital Cameras Connect a digital camera or a card reader with a card inserted so that it appears as a vol ume on the desktop If your camera is not supported by Mac OS X directly you
54. may also contain a JPEG version of the image that you can export with Extract JPG from Photo Raw PhotoRAW only Fix file length of recovered JPEGs is useful when you restore JPEG files with rescue programs like for example Techtool after file system crashes They often end up being 100 MB instead of 20 MB In some cases Techtool cannot establish the actual size of the file and therefore creates a file that is too big You can reduce it to the actual size with this option Remove Metadata opens a dialog that lets you choose the metadata you want to remove from the picture Remove Metadata Remove M EXIF CI XMP 1 IPTC and Photoshop Metadata mM icc M Comment mi Delete Everything after EOI Marker only JPGs C APP14 only JPGs C JFIF Header only JPGs C All Other APP Markers only JPGs This function will also strip off the complete resource fork Please make a backup copy of your files before using this function Cancel Cok Rebuild Metadata reads all metadata from an image file that does not correspond with the standards and can still be restored When you save the file the metadata is saved according to the standards Insert DESCRIPT ION file content into IPTC caption remains disabled in this menu until a Descript ion file is selected These files are generated by the Windows software ACDsee and contain the IPTC data Please do not ask us why ACDsee writes this data in a separate file instead
55. may not be disabled in the format options that can be opened in the file selection dialog when you use Save As In addition the contents of the comments window are saved in the text section of the file resource if creation of the resource fork has been enabled in the preferences Further comments can be contained in the IPTC Documentation Information that you can open via the File menu The Information palette displays all technical data for the picture You can quickly check the output size resolution color depth number of pictures contained for anima tion memory requirements in RAM format document size on disk degree of compres sion time for opening and comments such as information on compression for example LZW 000 Information Dimage exit XMP ExifTool Comment GPs 4368x2912 pixel 12 7 Megapixel 72 0x72 0 ppi 16 7 Mill Colors RGB 32 Bit Size Resolution Colors Frames Memory 48 6 MB File Format JPEG JFIF File Length 7 2 MB Compression 1 6 Required Time 1 4 s 61 Work Environment You will find the EXIF information for pictures taken with digital cameras on the EXIF tab The EXIF information contains the exposure time as well as the time and date when the picture was taken It also indicates whether a flash was used in addition to other details 000 Information image MET xme ExifTool Comment ces Basic EXIF data IFDO Make Canon Model Orientatio
56. menu again and select Stop to stop recording if you for example want to continue editing the picture before you further process the recorded points Or you can select Copy to copy the recorded mouse clicks to the clipboard In the clipboard the X coordinate the Y coordinate with top left zero point and the Y coordinate with bottom left zero point are given for each point in a line The coordinates 962 700 200 mean that the point is 962 points from the left margin 700 points from the top margin and 200 points from the bottom margin 266 Color Blindness If a picture contains geo data the corresponding data will be added to the recorded da ta The points in the clipboard can be inserted in a word processing program or an Excel spreadsheet for further processing Click Clear to delete the recorded mouse clicks if you have to correct them Color Blindness Around 10 of men suffer from color blindness often without realizing it Those affected are unable to read text in specific colors against certain colored backgrounds as is often the case on Internet pages To make sure that your Web pages and other documents can also be read by color blind people you can test the pages with GraphicConverter For ex ample save one of your pages as an image using a screenshot program and open the image in GraphicConverter The Mac OS Finder also has a snapshot option using Com mand Shift 3 The picture will be saved on the desktop Select Effe
57. million hues it is shown as a diagram with color gradients like here for the sRGB color space that is marked by the triangle 0 9 0 8 0 3 04 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 X Source Mysid SVG PAR original through Wikipedia All colors that are outside the triangle cannot be depicted by the color space The larger a color space is the better the image quality This is why professional photographers do not use the outdated small sRGB color space but select the Adobe RGB color space on their cameras when they are using JPG format If the camera s RAW format is used the color space can be selected later during picture editing When you open a RAW image with GraphicConverter the color space that you selected in the Preferences under Open 146 Color Management with Profiles and ColorSync Image Formats Photo Raw will be used You can choose between sRGB and Adobe RGB Open General Correct amp Change Tools Metadata image Formats BLP Image Size Image Quality C Rescale to EXIF width and height 0 Low fast m C Open JPEG contained in RAF CRW files _ Open JPEG image at half resolution BMP Brightness 1 00 lg Deltavision Red Scale 1 00 Blue Scale 1 006 DICOM 2 A EPSF White Balance _ Automatic FITS _ Depends on camera type and file metadata GIF Colors _ Interpolate RGBG as four colors HPGL _ Clip colors JPEG M Convert camera RGB to sRGB Lotus Pic Preview in Br
58. not installed system extensions like USB overdrive you can change the size of the tool with Shift and the scroll wheel To retain reflections on the pupil when removing red eyes you should use the Effect Red Eye option instead of this tool see p 158 onwards This option cannot however be used for different colored eyes on animals since it searches for red tones to be colored dark gray Fill Pattern allows you to select a fill pattern 58 Work Environment Switch to black and white sets black and white as the foreground and background colors Swap foreground and background color swaps the colors over Copy Mode allows you to select another copy mode Aspect ratio for selection allows you to select a specific aspect ratio like 10x15 to chose a ideal section for printing photos on photo paper for example Clicking the area allows you to select an aspect ratio from the pop up menu Define User defined opens the following dialog where you can enter the aspect ratios you use most 3 pixel sii Ratio l Ey x ne Ratio 2 O Ratio 3 x Ratio 4 x The aspect ratio of the image is particularly interesting as the selection automatically has portrait format for portrait format images Select Lossless JPEG cropping if possible if you want to trim JPEG images without losses Lossless cropping is only possible with pictures that have not been modified in any other way For more details see p 155 onwards Effect Average set
59. of a lable of selected pictures select Label in front of and after file name in Preferences Browser Thumbnails In Preferences Browser Thumbnails you can select Color Mode to display the color mode in the lower left hand corner of the thumbnails in the browser During slide shows you can zoom in and out with the scroll wheel of your mouse In the tool ruler of an open picture Save Undo and Redo are availabe now Renaming a picture will automatically rename a side car XMP file Extracting the EXIF preview of a JPG picture this preview will be saved with the file date of the source file The preview of the filter Xe847 now considers the color profile PNG pictures can be opened and saved with 16 bit per channel A selection in a picture can be moved vertically or horizontally when you hold the shift key not diagonally In Convert amp Modify pictures can be extracted from PDF files Select Extract Images from PDF from the Function pop up menu Edit Copy Copy Foreground color as HTML copies the foreground color as HTML value to the clipboard Analogly the background color can be copied Mac OS saves the settings of the print dialog If the settings are lost when printing again select Preferences Print General Store printer driver settings in preferences to save the settings in GraphicConverter s preferences This may not work with every printer driver When you copy or move a file in the Browser to another folder
60. of an alias in the Browser select Resolve Alias from the context menu The Browser will show the folder containing the original file e During slide show low resolution pictures are displayed with a high zoom depending on the display size if for example in the Preferences Slide show the option Always Fullscreen is selected To display especially diagonal lines not too rough it is recom mended to select the option Use B Spline interpolation for upscale Edges in small pictures will smoother this way e Inthe IPTC dialog in the Copyright tab you can select the Copyright Status and en ter the Rights Usage Terms These options have been introduced by Adobe Light 306 New in GraphicConverter 8 5 2 room File Info Caption Keywords Categories Credits Origin Copyright Contact Copyright URL Copyright Status Unknown Public Domain _ Copyrighted Rights Usage Terms This URL isn t part of the IPTC standard it is a Photoshop extension The Save and Open buttons will not save this field because the saved file is a standardized IPTC NAA record Save Open Cancel OK In the Preferences part General Misc you can disable Support for Spotlight Com ment It is recommended to disable this option as browsing will be faster this way Spotlight Comments are not used much any more You can open the PDF file Performance Optimisazion Help from the Help menu which provides information on how to incr
61. of the respective image file and are placed in automatically created month and year folders This option is also available immediately upon import and is useful if you used the Finder to import pictures from a digital camera Date flat creates folders that also contain the name of the month and the day date 2015_11_23 so there are less folder levels This option is particularly useful if you take pictures only once in a while Extension sorts the files into folders according to their extension From Mac OS 10 10 GraphicConverter can recognize QR codes contained in images This is helpful if for example you take a photo of children at a kindergarten and want to sort the pictures on your Mac into the corresponding folders Before each series take a photo of the child with a large printed QR code or take a photo of just the QR code for example on a table Then select all pictures in GraphicConverter and start the sorting process via the context menu with Actions Sort file s into subfolders According to QR Code If you sell photos through an online shop like www zenfolio com or www smugmug com you do not need to sort the pictures as this is done automatically by the providerssystem 229 The Browser Edit Find Compare and Replace Find QR Code allows you to display a QR code contained in a picture The text is displayed in a dialog and can be selected and copied there You can create a QR code with File New New QR Code S
62. on the left or to the displayed folder in another Browser window You can expand a selection with Shift cursor left and Shift cursor right If you look at a large number of images in a browser window and want to quickly make a larger jump upwards or downwards you can hold down the Option key and click the scroll box to jump straight to that position If you drag files or folders to a browser window from the finder or from another browser window you can move or copy the pictures to the displayed folder or its subfolders To copy the files hold down the Alt key The functions from the Action icon menu and from the context menu affect all selected pictures If you move a graphic from the browser to the desktop or another folder on the left hand side of the browser with the Command and Option keys an alias is created 204 The Browser If you open a picture as normal you can open a browser window showing the content of the folder where the open picture in stored by pressing Command Up Use the browser to sort larger numbers of pictures Select the next picture with the cur sor key and use Command 1 to Command 0 to move the pictures to the folders that you define in the Preferences under Folders Move Folders In the preferences you can also specify whether it is copied or moved or whether an alias is created Move files press option key to copy them allows you to move and copy without having to change the settings if you hold down the
63. picture using the metadata These files are written by infrared cameras e The new Scale to Size with Crop batch allows you to define the size of the target picture and select whether the source picture should fill the complete area which may cut off some edges or whether the source picture should only be scaled to fit into the area in which case the areas of the target picture that are not filled will be filled with the selected color You can use this function for example to fit rectangular pictures into a square so that they look like framed slides e The six cubemaps pictures can also be displayed when dds files are opened Inthe browser you can display all pictures or just the pictures rated with 2 3 or 4 stars via the Sort pop up menu If you only want to see the pictures with 5 stars you can select By Rating and Name as the sort method instead and the pictures with 5 stars will be sorted at the start of the list e Inthe context menu over the preview pictures in the browser you can assign an EXIF date that is interpolated from the existing EXIF dates of individual pictures in the series to the selected pictures with Actions Metadata EXIF IPTC Interpolate missing EXIF date This is useful if for example you have scanned slides and have entered the date or even the time of a birthday party in the EXIF data for individual pictures If in our example the first selected picture has January 1 2011 as the date and th
64. pictures at the top in this case Select Files by By Creation Date and Order Descending as the setting Even renamed files will then be displayed in the correct chronological order 323 New in GraphicConverter 9 5 Edit Paste Paste into Selection allows you to paste the contents of the clipboard into the current selection stretched to fill the selection Paste into Selection proportional allows you to keep the proportions The selection is not filled completely in this case if the aspect ratio of the clipboard content differs from the aspect ratio of the selection If you want to mark pictures from HDR series in the browser so you can find them more easily you can assign the green label to these pictures by selecting Actions Misc Mark possible HDR Source Images from the context menu GraphicConverter always recognizes pictures from an HDR series if the EXIF time between them is no more than a second and if the aperture is different There needs to be at least three images e Animated PNG files in APNG format can be imported From iOS 8 0 and Mac OS 10 10 APNG format is supported Like PNG format it allows up to 16 bit per channel and alpha channels e When you rename a picture in the browser it will be moved to the new position in the sort order according to the new name if the name has been set as the sort criterion This makes it difficult to select the next picture if you want to rename it too In the Preferences under Br
65. space mostly sRGB is given in the EXIF information The Merge color profile into image option should disabled as the pictures will otherwise 69 Comparing Pictures have double profiles These pictures will be displayed too light and pale in Internet browsers not supporting color profiles however Reduce to 72 ppi changes the resolution entry in the file head and should always be selected Scale longest side to allows you to enter a value for the pixel size of the file you save The value is for width when the image is landscape and for hight when the image is por trait Sharpen should always be enabled when you scale down The preview shows the effect of sharpen and can be moved with the mouse Make filename ready for the web changes German umlaut characters like a to ae and replaces spaces with underline characters Comparing Pictures You can visualize the loss of quality in a JPEG compression for example with Edit Find compare and replace Compare Pictures Open a source picture save it as a JPEG with a different name at medium quality for example close it and open the JPEG file cre ated Now select Edit Find compare and replace Compare Pictures Compare Pictures Intensity of difference Compare IMG_10678 JPG 3072x i With DSCN0552 JPG 2272x lt gt All open pictures are listed in the lower section of the dialog Select the pictures to be compared The setting is autom
66. the EXIF timestamp 222 EXIF information 62 F file format and compression rate 67 file selection dialog 16 331 Index Fill Selection with foreground Color 157 Filter display files 17 Find and Replace 179 Find duplicate files 257 Floyd Steinberg 174 Format 21 Full Screen 168 full screen 168 G General Shortcuts 274 GIF98a transparency 166 GPS coordinates 261 grayscale pictures 179 H horizontal 180 HTML Basic 83 HTML Meta 86 l IBM formats 5 Icon Preview 40 iDVD 219 Information 61 Input Levels 170 Installation 5 Intensity of difference 70 Invert 180 Invert Selection 157 Involution around the Red Green Axis 191 iPod Pictures on iPod 243 Isothermal Involution 191 K Keywords 35 86 L Label 215 lasso 155 Levels 170 license key and registration 15 Link Sliders 136 Lossless JPEG cropping 155 M Magic Pen 156 manual 15 332 measuring 57 minimizing file size 66 minimizing GIF pictures 71 Mirror 180 Multi language 5 N None aspect ratio selection 152 Normal Sharpen Edges 133 O Open Recent 21 Open Slice 77 opening pictures 16 Options 22 Ordered Dither 175 Organizer formats 5 Other Value rotating a picture 130 Other Value with Line 126 Overview 60 P Palette 40 Paper Format 91 perspective unskew 183 picture size 113 169 pictures in e mails 72 PNG transparency 166 Position 51 preparing pictures for the Internet 65 preview enlarged in the b
67. the Open button later on On the Batch tab you can also select a batch for the large images and the smaller pre view pictures that you defined using the Convert dialog or via the pop up menu on the 86 Creating catalog as picture browser toolbar This is useful for example if you want to add a watermark only to the large pictures Catalog General File HTMLBasic HTMLMeta HTML Text Batch Apply Batch No Batch HA Apply Batch for Thumbnails No Batch kd Open Save J Cancel _oK_ Click OK to create the Internet pages and pictures GraphicConverter now creates one or more HTML pages and two folders for the pre view pictures and the linked large pictures If several overview pages are created Graph icConverter inserts links at the bottom of the pages so you can switch to the next or pre vious page Copy the files and folders created on your Web server and set for example a link to the first catalog page of your homepage Creating catalog as picture To create a catalog as an image file click Catalog in the browser toolbar and select Picture from the pop up menu that opens As in an HTML catalog the selected images 87 Creating catalog as picture will be arranged in rows and columns However they will be in a large picture instead of on an HTML page Catalog Picture Width 640 gt pixel Depth 32768 Colors 16 Bit F Height 480
68. the active layer If you save the image the text objects in the saved file are always incorporated into the image as GraphicConverter does not support levels when saving You can however continue editing the text objects as long as you do not close the picture 195 Alpha Channels If you insert text over a picture that features prominent structures it is often difficult to read the text In this case you can open a speech bubble dialog by double clicking the text tool in the toolbox and selecting the Erase Background option Antialias E Erase Background A colored bar will then be inserted behind the text You can select the color via the foreground color The Anti alias option allows you to smoothen the edges of the font Alpha Channels Summary An alpha channel can be displayed deleted made for the current picture and created from a transparency path or selection under Picture Alpha Channel A selec tion cannot be made from an alpha channel Information on a picture that should not be visible can be saved in alpha channels An alpha channel is an additional channel to the red green and blue channels that contain the primary colors in RGB pictures and are mixed to create the colors in the picture Pic tures can also contain several alpha channels GraphicConverter shows just the first and informs you if further alpha channels are contained in the picture Alpha channels can only be used in pictures with a color depth of
69. the curve as necessary by clicking to create for example an s shaped curve Deviations from the diagonal starting line towards the right reduce the intensity while deviations to the left intensify the brightness or color The gray shading on the edge of the grid shows that the lower or left hand sections of the curve are responsible for the dark areas of the image and the upper or right hand sections of the curve for the light areas of the image Open allows you to use PhotoShop compatible ready made curves or to open curves that you yourself have saved You can also correct the colors in the Picture Color Balance dialog Color Management with Profiles and ColorSync The ColorSync program is responsible for the correct reproduction of colors on screen and on print outs ColorSync is part of the system in Mac OS X 142 Color Management with Profiles and ColorSync Color profiles change the colors so that they are displayed and printed correctly The data of the image files is not changed Most digital cameras use the sRGB color space This color space is entered in the EXIF data of the images Even if a profile file is not attached to the picture GraphicConverter recognizes the color space and displays the image auto matically with the sRGB profile The ColorSync profiles only of TIFF JPEG PNG and PSD format pictures are evaluated upon opening You should enable the Use ColorSync color matching option under Edit Assign Pro f
70. the rest this area will often ap pear bright white or light yellow while the darker area will appear too dark With subjects that are not moving you can solve this problem by using a series of exposures Take a pic ture of the subject using a tripod with three or more different exposure levels that each 265 Recording Points for Determining Measurements show one area of the whole picture correctly Open the images in GraphicConverter and select Effect DRIMaker to make fine adjustments in the dialog that opens DRIMaker Source images Threshold o gt Luminance O Response O S DRIMaker technology is licensed from Jasper Grahl Cancel If you are using a digital reflex camera we recommend folding away the mirror with the corresponding settings a while before taking the picture so that the mirror system cannot shake the image at all DRIMaker is aimed at compensating the technical weaknesses of cameras and is not intended to create artistic effects as is sometimes the case with HDR programs You will find further information and examples at the developer Jasper Grahl s Web site drimaker com Recording Points for Determining Measurements If you need the exact coordinates of the points in the graphics select Record mouse clicks Start Now GraphicConverter records the coordinates of each mouse click you make for example on the contours of a finding from an archeological dig Open the con text
71. this case order a special profile for your printer from a service provider like http www drucker kalibrieren com The ser vice provider will send you a file with color samples to print out Do not touch the surface of the print out or get any dust on it and send it in a large envelope to the service pro vider They will scan the print out and create a profile from it You will then receive the profile file by e mail with instructions on installing it Create your own printer profile for each paper type We advise only using original ink cartridges If you use inks from other manufacturers you will have to create separate pro files for them in addition Do not use paper with chemical bleaches as the colors will be perceived by the human eye differently to a scanner Select the profile from your print shop as the standard profile for CMYK see p 161 onwards This profile defines the color space to which the image is converted with Pic ture Mode CMYK Color This is the only way to minimize light and bright colors becoming pale when you switch the mode to CMYK Unfortunately it is not possible to reproduce for example a bright sky blue in the CMYK color space Vivid and vibrant blue tones and other vivid hues become considerably paler in offset printing The profile is attached to the pictures automatically upon saving The profile selected here is also used for CMYK images that do not have a profile If another profile belongs to the pictur
72. to around 4 million If you want to convert a large number of files you should make sure that your hard drive has enough space for the files being written In addition approximately 3 gigabytes space should be left for the operating system files to be on safe side If more space is needed than available the file system on your hard drive can become damaged meaning all files are unreadable Data rescue programs like DiskWarrior or Data Rescue can make the data readable again in some cases To avoid loss of data you should therefore always make a backup for example on an external hard drive and make sure that you have sufficient hard drive space We recommend FoldersSynchronizer as a good low cost solution for backups TimeMachine from Mac OS 10 5 and as a professional solution Retrospect from 27 Convert amp Modify www emcinsignia com previously Danz We recommend managing large image stocks on external hard drives If you define the target folder on a different drive to the source drive during conversion the speed increases as the write read heads do not constantly have to change position If you select a folder as the source GraphicConverter creates a file with the name of the source folder in the target directory and if necessary saves the converted files in subfold ers A new folder is not created in the target folder if one or more files are selected as the source In this case the converted files are saved straight to the tar
73. to automatically created subfolder to save the images in a subfolder which is created automatically or Define destination folder to select a specific folder with Choose Once you click OK a full screen dialog opens displaying the selected pictures one after the other There is a selection rectangle over the picture that you can move with the mouse Click inside the rectangle to move it to the required position The edges are dis played brighter i Wa 1 F i j L y Click Apply amp Next to go to the next picture You can also apply the trim by double clicking the selection The cropped picture is saved into a folder named Cropped Images that is generated automatically This folder is created in the folder where the 111 Cropping for Photo Prints images are located The source images are not modified OK amp Again carries out the crop ping and the new file is written The starting image remains in the dialog however allow ing you to crop further versions which will be saved with an index in the filename Click Ignore to go to the next picture without cropping the current one Cancel will end the crop function Choose OK for All to apply the current settings to all pictures selected You can see how many pictures have been cropped so far and how many you selected to the right of the OK for All button Toggle rotates the selection rectangle for portrait format pictures Chan
74. to be cropped after rotation as the corners will now stick out over the original frame GraphicConverter enlarges the picture automatically so that the white borders can be added You can freely select the color for the borders with the background color Use the selection lines to mark out the picture area to be trimmed and double click inside the rectangle or press Return Selecting File Trim Selection see Trimming page 124 also has the same results Trimming loses parts of the picture This cannot be avoided Select the area to be trimmed carefully so that you do not cut out any important parts of the picture 128 Rotate This is our finished rotated and trimmed picture Please note that horizontal lines only really need to be horizontal if they have been photographed head on Objects are usually depicted at an angle from the side In our example picture the front roofline of the houses and the edge of the quay are on a line that should not be rotated to horizontal Therefore you should use mainly vertical lines as orientation points Furthermore when using the Rotate option note that picture quality and sharpness is lost on angles that are not 90 or a multiple of 90 You should only rotate low resolution pictures by 90 or 180 if possible It is therefore a good idea to sharpen the picture again after rotating see p 131 If the angle is not a multiple of 90 an even better way would be to scan the picture again placi
75. to speed up your work If you are creating a book for example you can assign a label to all files you already used The color of the label is displayed in the browser next to the filename and on the right hand side of the Image tab You can also change the label here In the lower right hand corner of the browser window you can choose Sort By Label amp Name to group the 215 The Browser labeled pictures on the screen This allows you to quickly see which pictures you have already used in your book ano Browser al t row Atsnntanie i Sort ty Name satus SM Even if you can not display or assign labels under Mac OS X 10 1 and 10 2 you can dis play and assign labels in GraphicConverter under these systems as files can contain labels in Mac OS X 10 1 and 10 2 too In Mac OS X 10 3 Panther the labels can be displayed and assigned in the Finder again Rating allows you to assign 0 5 stars to images in JPEG or TIF format This information is written in the XMP section of the files It is easiest to assign the stars to rate pictures by selecting the images and setting the stars with Ctrl 0 5 or clicking the right hand side of the browser To reset the rating to zero on the right hand side of the browser click slightly to the left of the first star You can also use these keyboard shortcuts to assign stars dur ing a slide show If you disable XMP in the format options for JPG or TIFF pictures any rat
76. tool allows you to re apply the white point of an image if the image has a color cast Using the White Point tool click the lightest area of the image that should actually be white The colors will then be corrected If there is no area in the image that should actually be white the correction will not work in most cases In critical situations we therefore recommend taking the picture with an unobtrusive piece of white paper somewhere in the shot We have provided a short video to demon strate this tool on the Internet at http www lemkesoft com content 213 videos html The Slice tool defines several areas for a picture that will have different links on the Internet For more details see page 76 The caliper rule allows you to make different measurements in an image Click the tool to open a pop up menu First select Calibrate Length and Unit to specify whether you want to measure in pix els or in a measuring unit like centimeters or inches The mouse cursor will turn into a crosshair with which you can draw a line across the picture If you hold down the Shift key you can drag the line perfectly horizontal or vertical 56 Work Environment If your picture originates from a microscope and contains a scale drag a line across the scale at zoom level 100 As soon as you let go of the mouse button a dialog giving you the length of the line in pixels will open Define Unit Actual Length of Line 351 pixel Calibrated Length of
77. which you enter the settings for your conversion OE Auto Convert Edit Preset Description AutoConvert Input Folder Choose lt Delete processed files Output Folder Choose lt gt Destination Format JPEG JFIF JPG JPEG v Options WWW Ready Batches Name Options Enter a name that reflects what the conversion does Select an Imput Folder and an Output Folder along with the Destination Format Additionally you can define save and open a Batch Click the Save button in the lower right corner Your conversion is now available from the dialog below Activate the conversion with the checkbox and activate the automatic conversion with the checkbox in the first column ene Auto Convert Enable Auto Convert Active presets listed below will run in background Active Description v JPEG 2000 Pixel v View Log 50 Work Environment You can use several automatic conversions at the same time View Log shows the details of the run conversions Work Environment When a picture is open GraphicConverter provides information and options in palettes that can be opened under Window You can hide and display the palettes with the Tab am GALa Ct aA00 in Teme oor xup l exittoot lcommenel crs Size 2272x1704 pixel 3 9 Megapixel Resolution 72 0x72 0 ppi Colors 16 7 Mill Colors RGB 32 BiU Frames Memory 14 8 MB File Format JPEG JFIF File Length 1 9 M8 Compression 17
78. without correction If you want to know how many pixels show a certain color alt click the desired color in the picture A dialog opens in which the number of pixels and the respective percentage are displayed In the Preferences General Map you can define a radius for the pins that defines the map section Picture Colors Clip Colors to 5 Bit per Chanel cuts the color depth to 5 bit per chanel That makes sense if you edit pictures that will be displayed on old devices like for example cash machines Otherwise gradients would look very stepped Press Command Option Shift Tab to cycle backwards between windows Without Shift you cycle forward You can use Set EXIF Date from File Name if your files contain the date in the name This date will be set as EXIF Date Additionally you can select the option Set the file date identical to the EXIF date in the dialog that opens If you scanned pictures and typed the date in the file name you can adapt these files to modern digital photos in order to import them in database based programs like Apperture or Lightroom A submenu in the Window menu allows direct access to the tools of the tool palette in order to allow using the shortcuts even when the tools palette is not opened From the browser context menu Actions Export select Apple TV to export pictures for Apple TV to keep the current order GraphicConverter sets the file date and the EXIF date to the current date and adds one second
79. you can drag pictures from different folders to show them as a slide show or to rename them using the context menu The pictures are labeled with a number in the blue circle so you can see which pic tures you have already selected The images in the drop area can be sorted again with the mouse Selected images can be removed from the drop area using Command Backspace 211 The Browser All options which can be selected for the pictures in the drop area need to be selected from the context menu in the drop area The slide show is available in addition to rename e008 04 Ostersonntag 0 gt Estrella gt E Video 1 gt E video 3 y Ei Bilder 2 WD 2TBR1 gt 2009 y z2o10 gt B 01 Januar gt i 02 Februar gt 03 Marz v 04 April gt 1 03 Ostereier f rben gt 0 04 Ostersonntag gt D 05 Gemeindeausflug Da gt 06 Kinderbibelwoche gt B 10 Gochsheim gt i 11 Bei Mareen gt B 18 G pferts Trampolin gt i 18 Kirchspielgottesdienst f 19 Stevie gt 23 Kirche Glaubitz 24 An der Elbe gt 28 Feuer Kreinitz gt 05 Mai 2010 03 28 gt Abschieds DvD TS i Desktop gt i iMovie Events D Steuerakte 2009 gt D Steuerakte 2010 gt E Bilder gt E Alle Bilder Pictures Movies hagenhenke E Henkes 2010 2010 04 04_11 44 02_IMG_6819 jpg 2010 04 04_11 44 03_IMG_6820 jpg 2010 04 04_11 44 38_IMG_6824 jpg Show All availab
80. you need to click the Use printer s minimum button to allow border less printing Printing An opened picture can be printed with File Print The dialogs for printing are displayed by the Mac OS and look different depending on your version of the Mac OS The following dialog opens with a preview that takes the picture profile into considerati on miner 5 Presets Standard tH Copies 1 M Collated Pages AIl OFrom 1 to 1 Page Attributes te Paper Size A4 borderless E 21 00 by 29 70 cm Orientation T E PDF _ Cancel Print Use Printer to select the printer you require if several printers are connected or if virtual printers like for example Adobe PDF are installed You can save the current preferences via the Presets pop up menu and also select and manage saved preferences Copies specifies how many copies are printed Collated prints the last page as the first so that the order is correct if you are using a printer that outputs the pages with the printed side facing upwards Disable this option if your printer outputs the pages with the printed side facing down If the image file has multipage pages Pages allows you to specify whether all pages or a defined range should be printed The middle pop up menu provides a variety of settings that partly depend on the printer First select Page Attributes to set the paper size and the orientation Use Paper Size to select the
81. 10 10 GraphicConverter can recognize QR codes contained in images This is helpful if for example you take a photo of children at a kindergarten and want to sort the pictures on your Mac into the corresponding folders Before each series take a photo of the child with a large printed QR code or take a photo of just the QR code for example on a table Then select all pictures in GraphicConverter and start the sorting process via the context menu with Actions Sort file s into subfolders According to QR Code If you sell photos through an online shop like www zenfolio com or www smugmug com you do not need to sort the pictures as this is done automatically by the providerssyste 230 The Browser Edit Find Compare and Replace Find QR Code allows you to display a QR code contained in a picture The text is displayed in a dialog and can be selected and copied there You can create a QR code with File New New QR Code Select a suitable size with Scale Save the picture to paste it into a layout in a program like InDesign for example To paste the QR code in GraphicConverter into another image select everything with Com mand A copy the picture with Command C and paste it into another picture with Com mand V Scale the QR code proportionally by holding down the Command and Shift keys and dragging a corner The submenu Misc SEE Create Preview Remove Resource Fork Add Image as Folder Icon Change FileType and or
82. 32 bit and with PSD TIFF PNG TGA DDS BMP and PICT formats Some picture editing programs allow you to save selected areas in an alpha channel These areas are also called masks and are used for example to make a picture area lighter or appear transparent in a layout program Alpha channels are also used for other pur poses To check what information is contained in an alpha channel select Picture Alpha Channel Show in New Window Any mask contained is shown as a white area against a black background In the following example a mask was defined for the pullover in Pho 196 Alpha Channels toshop so that it could be excluded when the picture that was previously too dark was brightened In GraphicConverter you can define a selection with the lasso and then use Edit Invert Selection to select everything but the pullover shirt and make it brighter The content of the alpha channel can be deleted under Picture Remove Alpha Chan nel If a picture contains transparent areas due to a transparent color or a selection you can create an alpha channel by selecting Picture Create Alpha Mask Channel from Trans parency or Picture Create Alpha Mask Channel from Selection In the following pic ture the white background was selected with a click using the Magic Pen tool 197 Alpha Channels Select Picture Alpha Channel Create from Selection The selected part of the pic tures is now displayed transparent as
83. 8 pixel Palette System Color Table Add Margin 0 8 Color Pictures per Row 1 H Pictures per Column Thumbnail Width 400 pixel Display Name a M with Extension Height 400 pixel Font No Value E l with Path l Display IPTC Caption Size o M g Display Dimension Display File Size Color M Make Square Frame mi Sharpen m 4 Open Save Cancel ca Choose the size of the whole picture containing the thumbnails with Picture Width and Height If necessary several of these large pictures will be created For color pictures you should select 16 4 million for the Depth and System Color Table for the Palette so the quality is not reduced Set the background color with Color Add Margin is useful if you want to add a white margin or if your printer cannot print up to the edges Select the size of the individual images with Thumbnail The numbers of Pictures per Row and Pictures per Column are obtained from the values for the size of the picture and the thumbnails These values can therefore only be influenced indirectly by changing the size of the whole picture or the thumbnails Next select the Font for the details like the filename that are displayed under the images with Display name etc Avoid going above 10 pixels for the Size of the font as otherwise too much space is required for longer filenames Make sure that the color of the font is not the same as th
84. All button to open TIFF pictures with GraphicConverter in future by double clicking 20140812 MG_8662 jpg Zz 20140812 MG_866 12 3 MB Modified Today 18 29 gt General gt More Info gt Name amp Extension gt Comments Y Open with a GraphicConverter 9 app 9 7 1 Use this application to open all documents like this one Change All Y Preview gt Sharing amp Permissions Repeat this procedure for each file format that you want to open with GraphicConverter by double clicking Simply click an image file with the corresponding format in the Finder and repeat the process This replaces the Preview program that would otherwise be started for pictures without a creator 18 Starting the Program and Opening a Picture An open image is shown in a window In the context menu which you open by Ctrl clicking the image you will find different options that are explained in more detail in the respective chapters eee E IMG_18504 JPG RGB Z eeveede Options Adjust Save Undo Aledo Previous Next Save amp Next Share Rating Label o es 1260 hers i2500 3125 prso e5 1250 Paste Select All Open Document Folder in Browser Reveal in Finder 1875 Rename This File Send as E Mail Attachment Copy EXIF as Text to Clipboard Show EXIF Thumbnail in New Window Insert Date Time 2800 Insert Date Time Options Set Image as Folder Icon You can modify the filename with Rename this f
85. Ane por 2011 htmI 7 eoe po Lhtr Lt gt A ret 2 file volumes Dokumente GraphicConverter 20HB 20D Quelibilder Kat saa 2011 04 29_11 21 07_img_6090 jpg The filenames of landscape format and portrait format pictures always appear at the same height only when the Make Square option is enabled 2011 04 29_11 20 58_img_6089 jpg 2011 04 29_11 21 07_img_6090 jpg 82 Photo Albums on the Internet Catalog Switch to the HTML Basic section by clicking the tab and enter a folder name for Thumbnail Path You can also leave it as the default name thumbnails Catalog General File HTML Basic HTML Meta HTML Text Batch HTML M Border Use Macintosh line ends M Create images folder 0 O Use UNIX line ends TA Make filenames lowercase i O Align Thumbnails TOP M Correct extension Add Tabs to HTML a eee Align Thumbnails MIDDLE lt TD gt lt TD gt in one RoW O Align Thumbnails BOTTOM Charset utf 8 ly MUNK CI VLINK MALINK Navigation Blue Arrows B oC Title ll Click on image moves to the next m A p 4 Thumbnail Path thumbnails _ Create link from thumbnails to images Picture Path images Open images with navigation ll With CR O Open images without navigation O Open images in a new window target _blank Set new window bounds to image bounds Open Save __ Cancel eo A folder with this name is created in the destinati
86. Application Support GraphicConverter Profiles The tilde stands for the name of the user Separate the picture file with Picture Mode CMYK Name of selected profile The image is converted to the profile and the selected profile file is attached to the image file From GraphicConverter 8 7 the image is displayed with the konverted colors immedia tely Loud colors become paler as the cannot be printed by CMYK printing machines The mode is displayed in brackets in the title bar of the picture window You can now save the file and use it in a program like QuarkXPress or InDesign or forward it to a print shop CMYK mode is only supported by the JPG JPEG2000 TIFF and Photoshop PSD formats The TIFF format with the extension tif just one f without LZW compression is used as the standard Separating is also available as an action For professional work you need to darken your work room and illuminate it with a stan dardized ceiling lamp Your monitor and scanner need to be calibrated with a special tool or special method Repeat the monitor calibration on a regular basis and wait half an hour before editing pictures on tube monitors so that the monitor becomes warm and the colors are displayed correctly 3D Effect Many modern TVs beamer and further devices can display 3D pictures three dimension ally For a real 3D effect two pictures must be shot at the same time with special cameras Most of these cameras have got two lenses like the
87. Background Color Screen Mode Original Size Justify Centered Tiled display Use B Spline interpolation for upscaling No conversion of 3D content for display Subfolders Depth 3 2 Limited to 99 Movie Playback Command left right advances 1 s Restore to Defaults Last Values Cancel OK In order to control the slide show with an Apple remote control your Mac needs to be equipped with an infrared sensor The infrared sensor on the iPod iPhone Dock cannot be used for this unfortunately Clear Allow Apple Remote control during Slide Show if you want to avoid interference Under Ignore Extensions enter the file extensions of any files in the picture folder that should not be displayed Play sound file with same name as the image plays audio files that are in the same directory and have the same filename before the period Use Background Color to set the color for the areas that are not filled by the picture For example on an Apple 30 inch monitor vertical black bars are displayed on the left and right of photos with an aspect ratio of 2 3 Screen Mode allows you to choose how your pictures are displayed Original Size shows all pictures at 100 zoom Only images that are larger than the screen resolution are reduced to fill the screen Always Fullscreen also zooms small pictures to fill the screen Enlarge Reduce by Multiple of 2 shows small pictures enlarged by a multiple of 2 and pictures that are larger than the screen resolut
88. CS write metadata like the IPTC information in XML format This additional information can cause faults when further processed in other programs such as Photoshop 7 You can therefore delete it using this dialog If you have problems with metadata you should disable the XMP option in the Open XMP of the Preferences The files are saved to the folder selected in the right hand list The XMP area can also contain one or several additional images Open the basic image and control or right click the image to open the context menu where you select Show XMP Thumbnail in new Window to open the contained image s APP14 is a marker in which some applications write data even though this marker should be kept empty The JFIF Header contains information on the resolution and possibly a preview Delet ing this header makes the file about 10 bytes smaller This is worthwhile with large file sizes if you are preparing pictures for the Internet First check a few sample images to see if they can still be displayed on the Internet All other APP markers are not normally written as they are not needed Some pro grams also write their names or copyright information in these markers Merge Files opens a dialog as soon as you click Go where you can specify how many pictures should be used to create a new one by merging Merge Files a s Create a new image from ae source images Cancel oK 31 Convert amp Modify Alternatively
89. Cancel The uppercase and lowercase options allow you to specify whether the extension should be inserted as uppercase or lowercase letters Professional tip You can enable the Set Format from Extension option in the file selection and simply add the format extension when writing the filename For example tif Make sure there is a period in front of the format extension GraphicConverter then saves in the required format without the format having to be selected from the pop up menu 4 Save the picture under the required name The file is then converted to the selected format There are other options available in the Save as file selection dialog The Options button is particularly powerful as the corresponding parameters can be selected with this option for the selected format A completely different dialog appears depending on the format File Format TIFF TIF TIFF a Options Set Format from Extension Save web ready without resource Make filename ready for the web Merge color profile into image for web usage and remove EXIF Save all pages of multipage files New Folder Cancel 22 OK Save Converting a picture with Save as The Options button allows you to select any compression rate for JPEG pictures and other pictures JPEG JFIF Quality 90 i Before After low medium high Always use selected quality Set default quality to source file quality if possible Codec Baseline s
90. Check every Week lt Cache CPU usage Edit yay Min Max Image Verification Misc Postpone next verification for 1 00s Restore to Defaults Last Values Cancel OK If you are working with an older Mac you should decrease the CPU usage to be able to work on fluently Postpone next verification for lets you select a longer interval between checking two files in case your computer should become slow during check Scale Long Edge has been added as a batch With this batch you avoide the efford to program a sequence of If and Else batches in order to scale portrait and landscape pictures at the same rate Enter the desired value for the longer edge to scale portrait and landscapte pictures at the same rate In the Rename dialog in the Specials tab RegExLite has been added RegExLite is a standard for renaming files with regular expressions Open the Rename dialog via the Browser s context menu Actions Misc RegEx is also available in the dialog of File Slide Show with find to let you find files that have a certain pattern in their name If you receive a fax as a file it is normally displayed distorted as the horizontal 318 New in GraphicConverter 9 2 and 9 3 resolution differs from the vertical GraphicConverter corrects that automatically so your fax is displayed like it would have looked when printed by a fax machine In Preferences Open Correct amp Change you can disable this correction when a fax should be displayed
91. Command F in the browser you can display a search window where you can select Name Model in the first pop up menu Color profile verification added In the General Display Content section of the Preferences you can select a color blend for the area between the image and the window frame by selecting a start and end color which run into each other If you want a solid color instead of the blend select the same color in both color boxes You can rename folders via the context menu on the left hand side of the browser and also create new folders You can protect and unprotect files via the context menu in the middle area of the browser The Finder tag is used for this and not the new versioning technology from Lion In the Preferences under General Display Windows you can specify that the toolbox follows the main window On the left hand side of the browser you can switch to the neighboring folders with the up and down s The right and left s open and close the current folder in the file tree You can use the Tab key to switch to the middle area of the browser so that for example you can select filenames for editing with Return and Enter or open files The Move Folders now have their own tab in the preferences In the Convert dialog a multiscale is available above the pop up menu that you can use for example to convert a product picture into several sizes for web shops in one step The possibility of defining not just up to e
92. Converter to save the picture to the desktop and open it in GraphicConverter Select File New and then Image from URL from the submenu The following dialog opens Enter the URL and click OK The picture is automatically downloaded to the desktop and opened in GraphicConverter You can for example easily copy the path to a picture by Control clicking the picture in the Internet Explorer to open the context menu and selecting Copy Shortcut On Paper Digital pictures can be printed relatively cheaply on color printers GraphicConverter of fers a series of options to help you print pictures Paper Format File Page Setup opens the standard dialog for the printer Select the inserted paper format so that GraphicConverter receives the correct information about the area to be printed If your printer can print certain formats without margins you need to select a special paper format for borderless printing Settings Page Attributes HH Format for Canon iP4000 4 A5 Paper Sizay ay lav A4 JBS A4 borderless US Letter gt US Legal 10 Envelope DL Envelope 4x6in 5x7in CD R Tray B Credit Card 2 13 x 3 39 in Orientation Scale DIN A4 randlos Titel Kirchspielmagazin Manage Custom Sizes 91 Printing In our example we are using a Canon i550 For borderless printing select US Letter borderless or another format without margins In the Print Options dialog that is described below
93. EXIF Camera Model sorts the pictures according to camera model into sub folders named after the camera You can use Export EXIF Text if for example you want to transfer EXIF information to a FileMaker database A text file with the same name and the extension txt is created for each image file listing the field name and value separated by tabs JPEG lossless cropping allows you to cut a section out of pictures without a loss in quality as GraphicConverter does not need to compress the images again if the values for the top left corner of the selection rectangle as well as the width and height are a factor of 16 With some JPEGs it is enough if the values are a factor of 8 We recommend how ever selecting values that are a factor of 16 since lossless trimming will then always work You can also enter zero as a value You can use this option if for example you want to trim the edges ona series of pictures Convert vector PICT to vector PDF converts PICT images with vector content into vector PDFs without dithering them You can use Convert Photo RAW to 16 Bit TIFF or Convert Photo RAW to EXR to con vert RAW files from Canon cameras in CR2 format to 16 bit TIFF or Open EXR files used in movie industries to achieve high dynamic range HDR effects The converted files con tain the unchanged RAW data without gamma correction or white ballance as recorded by the sensor These features are available in the UB version of GraphicConverter o
94. ION EF ISBLSTRIE REE M CLASSE A MLEBET TES swarms ET ATREA It is a good idea to sharpen a little after unskewing White Correction Select Effect White Correction or the White Correction tool if you want to remove a col or cast from a picture It does not matter whether the color cast was caused by a camera error during automatic white correction or whether the light was colored when the pic ture was taken In our example picture the light was yellow because of a sunshade There must be a point in the picture that should actually be white Click this point The white 185 User defined Filters point will then be moved accordingly If the colors are not improved try with another point User defined Filters You can define your own filters using User Defined Filter in the Effect menu _User Defined Filter CoC of off IO IO ol 1 ol oA A off _ Show Details Full Screen Preview Cancel o This filter can unsharpen pictures or create other effects depending on the entries You can enter values between 255 and 255 in the boxes If all outer fields are set to 0 and the center ones contain a 1 the filter will have no effect If you set all boxes to 255 the filter will have maximum unsharpening It is very difficult to find the correct value between too soft and too sharp Define sev eral examples until you achieve the required unsharp effect Color Permutations The six color permutation
95. In this case you can set labels and ratings using the context menu Slide Show Transitions In the Transitions section you can choose between different transitions that are present ed using sample images when you click them All selected transitions are used alternate ly If for example you only want to use fade ins clear the check boxes for all other transi tions Preferences General ty Use Transition Transitions C Export to Movie we Metadata rate Misc 7 Mosaic Flip Cube Preview Bar Swipe Copy Machine Dissolve Star Swing Blur Curtain Down Select All Select None Speed _ j i Ht 1 C Restore to Defaults C Last Values 4 Cancel ox Slide Show Export to Movie If you want to create a movie in QuickTime format from your slide show select File Ex port Slide Show to Movie The file selection dialog will open where you can select the pictures for the slide show or a picture folder The file selection dialog will then open 251 Slide show again Now enter a name for the movie file and click OK In the settings you can specify the size of the film as well as the compression and background music General Transitions Width 640 Pixel Export to Movie Metadata Height 480 Pixel Misc Compression Noma 189 Sound File Restore to Defaults The transitions selected for the slide show are not used Instead a Core Animation tech
96. Instead the colors are already corrected Since the large versions of the images are intended for downloading you should only enable the Merge Profile into Image option if the large versions are intended for view ing on the Internet For downloadable images it is worthwhile keeping the profile infor mation and not merging the profile because image files can then be further processed by a development service best in this way Set the size of the preview pictures and the linked images in the left hand section with Width and Height All landscape format preview pictures are calculated with the set width for example 150 pixels The height value is not taken into account as it specifies the height of the portrait pictures All portrait format images are scaled to this height We therefore recommend to always select the same sized values The pictures will not be the same size when the values are different The Relative Width allows you to specify a percentage for the width that the linked pic ture should be scaled to by the browser 100 will scale it to the width of the browser window The file size remains the same Select Absolute Width to display the linked images in their actual size Large pictures may however be larger than the visible area of the browser window First find out how large the preview pictures should be with a few test files You should be able to see what is in the picture Simply drag the created HTML file to your Web bro
97. Moving Selection Mouse Click and Movement only moves the Frame Hold down the Command key to scale the contents of the selection You can edit the contents of the selection for example with the Brightness and Shar pen Edges options or cut copy delete or move the selection You will normally want to select a section of a picture and overwrite existing picture content when you move it to its destination as if you were fixing a sticker there The selection will appear semi transparent while you move it to help you find the position If you want to copy the selection as you move it click the contents and only then press and hold down the Option key Prior selection of an aspect ratio for the selected area is intended for editing of pictures from digital cameras in particular You can set a specific aspect ratio at the bottom of the toolbox using the None pop up menu Pictures taken with digital cameras often have the aspect ratio of 3 4 Prints from photo labs like the ones you can order on the Internet have the standard aspect ratio of 2 3 as with postcard format photos for example 10x15 cm Some labs therefore offer you the choice of having the picture trimmed at the top and bottom or leaving the whole picture with white margins on the left and right You should decide for each individual picture Once you have chosen a trimming method it is a good idea to specify where the trim should be made Select the corre sponding aspect
98. One Delete ThisOne ne a Name IMG _5261jpg Name IMG_5261Kopieren 2 jpg Where Volumes Bilder Where Volumes Bilder 2005 09 September 10 2005 09 September 10 Kinder Solvig Kinder Solvig Pixels 3072x2048 Pixels 3072x2048 File Size 2 49 MB File Size 2 49 MB Creation Date Sep 10 2005 4 12 PM Creation Date Sep 10 2005 4 12 PM Modification Date Sep 20 2005 9 28 AM Modification Date Sep 20 2005 9 28 AM Previous lof2 Next Create Aliases On Desktop M Move items to trash instead of delete Delete Duplicates Automatically Done All images for which duplicates are found are displayed in the list The Duplicates col umn shows how many duplicates have been found If you want to keep all versions of a picture click another file in the list If more than 2 versions are found you can display the other pictures with Go Forward The newly added version is displayed on the right The picture that was previously shown on the right is moved to the left and the previous left hand image is no longer displayed Imagine a film strip is being pushed from left to right through the dialog Go Back there fore moves the strip to the right When you are sure that you want to delete a picture click Delete this one under the picture If you disable Move into trash instead delete if possible the files will be immedi ately deleted and cannot be recovered Automatic mode for all items allows you to automatically delete all
99. Panasonic Lumix DMC 3D1 The two pictures are displayed alternating in quick succession or with different polarization A special pair of glasses with shutter or polarization technology makes your right eye see the picture for the right eye and the left eye only the other to let you see the picture three dimensionally GraphicConverter can open and save the new 3D formats JPS PNS and MPO JPS is a 3D version of JPEG format and PNS is a 3D version of PNG format MPO stands for Multi Pic ture Object MPO images have a similar structure to a GIF animation MPO files are how ever concatenated JPEGs with additional metadata JPS and PNS formats use Cross Eye display that displays two images next to each other on computer monitors If you want to see the 3D effect you can try to look at the images cross eyed so that your right eye looks at the left hand image and your left eye looks at the right hand image The submenu under Effect 3D allows you to convert the right left display of an MPO file with Convert two Images to one Image Side by Side This conversion is automatic if you open an MPO file and save it as a JPS file Use Mark Image as 3D left and right Image to set an internal mark just for GraphicCo nverter which enables the 3D functions This is useful for images that are not recognised as 3D on the basis of their format 163 3D Effect The small marks R and L that appear at the top of the image are not saved in the picture itself
100. Percent 4 Height 100 00 Percent gt j Size 3 0 MB Size Width 14 222 inch lt Height 10 667 inch yi X Resolution 72 00 Pixel inch lt Y Resolution 72 00 Pixel inch t Options M Proportional M Scale Picture Scale complete Movie Algorithm Best Interpolation _ Use gamma aware scaling if possible Cancel ox In the bottom section of the dialog you can also change the size of the picture using the Width and Height boxes When you enter a new value the second value is automatically recalculated You can change the picture resolution to 72 dpi for example using the X and Y Resolu tion see p 114 Enlarging adds pixels Reducing lowers the number of pixels The picture is recalculated as best as possible in both cases The picture quality is reduced especially if you make excessive adjustments We therefore recommend scanning pictures as close as possible to the required size If the Keep Proportions is option is disabled pictures can be distorted to create special effects when you change a single value Scale Picture recalculates the picture instead of just changing the value for the output size Reducing with this option lowers the number of pixels If you disable Scale Picture when reducing a note is simply made in the file that the picture should be outputted accordingly smaller 113 Picture size an example Scale complete Movie does not only scale a picture from a f
101. Quart ickTime Movies Low Medium 7 Text amp Convert to Format X Utilities Convert to Format Results Options Description X Other Wi Copy Finder Items Bi Most Used X Copy to Clipboard Recently Added Create Annotated Movie File WW Create Archive W Create Banner Image from Text Create icon and preview Create Image X Create Package Create Preview and Icon amp Create Thumbnail Images Crop 3S Crop Images Customize Package Selection Deactivate Fonts Convert into JPEG This action will convert graphics files into the JPEG format Log Duration Input Files Folders Graphics files Result Files Folders Processed JPEG files Version 2 0 Copyright Copyright 2014 Lemke Software GmbH All rights reserved A detaild documentation for Automator is available from the Help menu of Automator As long as you are not familiar with Automator we recommend to backup your files beforehand Terminal GraphicConverter supports command line commands you can for example use in a Pearl script GraphicConverter 9 app slideshow path Shows the content of the referred folder as a Slide Show 271 Troubleshooting GraphicConverter 9 app browser path Shows the content of the referred folder in a new Browser window Troubleshooting Solving general problems If you are Using Mac OS 10 8 x Mountain Lion or older There are frequently problems when the preferences document com lemkeso
102. Rotate JPEG lossless depending on EXIF GraphicConverter Remove resourcefork GraphicConverter Remove metadata GraphicConverter Open GraphicConverter Create icon and preview Installing Plug Ins Copy plug ins into the Library Application Support GraphicConverter Plug Ins folder and restart GraphicConverter if it was already running The plug ins need to be car bonized i e suitable for Mac OS X Carbon plug ins are currently only available for some scanners Plug ins which should only be available to one user are copied to the Users Library Application Support GraphicConverter Plug ins folder The tilde charac ter stands for the name of the respective user You can check your user name in the Sys tem Preferences in the Login section of the Login dialog tab It is in the Name box User plug ins are only available to the respective users Please see Scanning with GraphicConverter from page 118 for further information Update Installing TWAIN The TWAIN driver is integrated in GraphicConverter Simply install the TWAIN module for your scanner software see page 118 which you open in GraphicConverter via File Scan Select TWAIN Scanner Data Source This module needs to support 64 bit If there is not a TWAIN module for your scanner you can try to use the TWAIN SANE Inter face for MacOS X that can be downloaded at http www ellert se twain sane Update GraphicConverter is constantly being revised You wil
103. Save web ready without resource Make filename ready for the web Merge color profile into image for web usage and remove EXIF Save all pages of multipage files New Folder Cancel 3 Select the required target format in the Format pop up menu If you need an unusual format select Show All and open the pop up menu again Now all export formats will be shown If you have a small monitor you may need to scroll to reach the upper or lower entries as the list is very long To scroll position the cursor without clicking the black triangles at the very top or bottom in this pop up menu The further the arrow is positioned over the end of the list the faster it scrolls In the Preferences in the Save File Formats section you can choose the formats to 21 Converting a picture with Save as show on this pop up Save Hast wl Ge oa General Open Save Print Slide Show Convert Browser Folders General Resource Fork Formats Available in Save Dialog Search Name and Standard Extension Displayed Extension Apple File Icon ICNS icns Apple iOS Icon Set set Apple MacOS Icon Set png ASCII TXT txt Atari Portfolio PGC PGC pge BLD BLD bid BMP Windows BMP bmp BPG Better Portable Graphics bpg bpg BUM BUM bum Byte Array Header File H h Color Table PAL pal csource C c DDS DDS dds Diskus YUV yuv Select All Select Most Used Upper Case Lower Case Restore to Defaults Last Values
104. TC dialog which you can call up with Command l Alternatively you can copy all of the IPTC information with Edit Copy Copy IPTC and paste it into one or more pictures with Edit Paste Paste IPTC The Convert dialog however allows you to quickly enter different information in large amounts of pictures If the same text has to be entered over and over again organize the text file accordingly with several lines of the same content The text file should have the following structure Filename lt tab gt Caption lt tab gt Caption Writer lt tab gt Headline lt tab gt Special Instructions lt tab gt By Line lt tab gt By Line Title lt tab gt Credit lt tab gt Source lt tab gt Object Name lt tab gt Date Created lt tab gt City lt tab gt State lt tab gt Country lt tab gt Reference lt tab gt Category lt tab gt Sub Category lt tab gt Urgency lt tab gt Keywords lt tab gt Copyright lt return gt The Date Created box should have the following format yyyymmdd year month day The Sub Category and Keywords boxes can contain several words separated by space characters If another separator is needed you can enter it in the input box next to Sepa rator of IPTC Keywords in the Convert Convert Text IPTC dialog box There should be a number in the Urgency box All entries in the text file should be in a line separated by a tab Line breaks are not allowed All source pictures and the text file should be in the same directory Select the text file a
105. The source folder is recreated in the target directory together with its subfolders Preferences General Open Save Print Slide Show Co File Convert and Modify Formats Subfolders Depth 10 8 Limited to 10 Convert Text IPTC x Processing M Alert before conversion to the source folder l Don t copy folder structure l Copy files that cannot be converted Don t alert before overwrite l Delete original files after conversion V Show alert Batch Functions Remove after quit Quick Convert Subfolder Name Dokumente konvertieren Errors When Error Occurs Save to log file Create complete log file lt Restore to Defaults 4 Last Values _ Cancel Com Leave Alert before conversion to the source folder enabled because it is rarely worth while writing the converted files in the source folder Don t copy folder structure writes all files from subfolders in the destination folder without subfolders Enable Copy files that can t be converted if the source folder also contains HTML files for example that are to be copied into the target folder You should only select Don t alert before overwrite if you are sure that pictures or text will not be lost with this option Enable the Delete original files after conversion option if for example you have cop ies of image files in the source folder that you would normally delete manually after the conversion The Show alert subopt
106. There are three different curves for color negative films This is why GraphicConverter offers three Variants in the submenu Simply try them out to find out which one provides the best results If you want to reverse the order of the pictures in a movie select Picture Invert and then Order of Frames from the submenu Mirror Imagine that the picture on the screen is a slide that you can turn around If the top is then still at the top you will have mirrored it horizontally If the top is at the bottom after turning you will have mirrored it vertically It is exactly the same in GraphicConverter with the horizontal and vertical mirror options If you can t remember that it doesn t mat ter You can just try it out and if necessary undo the change The small icons in the Pic ture Mirror submenu helps however Ok Horizontal H Vertical ay The white rectangle is the slide before you turn it The line is the mirror axis that acts like a hinge and the gray rectangle is the slide after turning Normally you do not need to mirror pictures unless a slide or negative was accidentally scanned the wrong way round Sometimes it is good to mirror a picture horizontally to optimize it for design purposes You should remember however the realism of photos is affected possibly with negative results If you define a selection only the selection will be mirrored Effect Glass Blocks allows you to mirror an image in strips This can
107. User s Manual GraphicConverter 9 7 1 Programmed by Thorsten Lemke Manual by Hagen Henke Sales Lemke Software GmbH PF 6034 D 31215 Peine Tel 49 5171 72200 Fax 49 5171 72201 E mail support lemkesoft com Elbsand Publishers In the PDF version of this manual you can click the page numbers in the contents and index to jump to that particular page 2001 2015 Elbsand Publishers Hagen Henke All rights reserved Sales Lemke Software GmbH PF 6034 D 31215 Peine www lemkesoft com This book including all parts is protected by copyright It may not be reproduced in any form outside of copyright laws without permission from the author This applies in partic ular to photocopying translation copying onto microfilm and storage and processing on electronic systems All due care was taken during the compilation of this book However errors cannot be completely ruled out The author and distributors therefore accept no responsibility for any program or documentation errors or their consequences This manual was written on a Mac using Adobe FrameMaker 8 Almost all software hardware and other products or company names mentioned in this manual are registered trademarks and should be respected as such The following list is not necessarily complete Apple the Apple logo and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple registered in the United States and other countries Mac and the Mac OS logo are trademarks of Apple Lumix is
108. X NMEA files the UTC time Universal Time Coordinated of the satelites is used that was previously known as Greenwich Mean Time If for example you forgot to adjust your camera clock to the local time while on a trip select the time zone in which you normally take photographs and which was set in your camera If it was summer time at your destination and this was set in the camera you will need to compensate this by selecting the local time minus one hour i e for example UTC 6 instead of UTC 7 GraphicConverter reads the photograph time from the EXIF data of the image file and searches for the best matching entry from the GPX file to transfer the position data In the browser s lower right hand section you can select Geotagged and untagged Geotagged only or Untagged only under Show to recognize for example untagged pictures The first versions of the iPhone 3G software had an error in the GPS data for photos from the built in camera The longitude and latitude were switched If you have images 263 Set or export GPS data with this error use the Add or edit GPS values option to swap the values over You can delete GPS data in images with Delete GPS data in selected files Use Show Position in Google Earth to show the position where the picture was taken in Google Earth Create GPX File for Selection reads the geo data from the selected files and writes them in a GPX file Programs such as GoogleEarth can read this file and sh
109. _ 38 Convert amp Modify You can select the Date Format For example if you do not want to add the time delete the hh mm ss characters in the date format box Specials Transfer EXIF data to the filename allows you to transfer EXIF information content to the filename Enter the corresponding Hexcode preceded by an amp You can insert further parts of the filename as plain text For example enter Mountains amp A001 amp name amp exten sion to keep the original filename with the extension insert the name of the camera model according to the EXIF code A001 and place the word Mountains in front The EXIF hexcodes are always four digit for example A001 You will find a complete list of the EXIF hexcodes on page 60 onwards in the PDF file Exif2 2 pdf which you can download here http www exif org specifications html A zero needs to be added to the front of three digit GPS codes Rename allows you to choose whether the EXIF data should be trans ferred only in filenames only in folder names or in both Remove Text removes the text entered in the input box from the selected filenames In our example a space is removed after the underscore character ONIO Rename Name amp Extension Index Date Specials Label Current Name Change to s IMG_0114 jpg IMG_0114 jpg Rename Files and folders IMG_0115 jpg IMG_0115 jpq files IMG_0119 jpg IMG_0119 jpg O Folders IMG_ 0120 jpg IMG_0120 j
110. _ Set always to mod date al Set modification date to 6 8 10 1 42 10 PM _ Set always to creation date Add Offset to Each File 0 gt seconds Cancel _ 228 The Browser The Submenu Move Folders Move Folders gt Move to gt Aliasse Copy to gt Rotate Mirror gt Make Alias to gt Misc gt Move Folders Move to and Copy to allows you to move or copy files into folders that you select in the Folders Move Folders section of the Preferences Make Alias to cre ates an alias of the selected files in the move folder The Submenu Sort files into subfolders by Name Date Extension QR Code Open With Finder Metadata EXIF IPTC gt Date gt Copy C Move to Trash Sort file s into subfolders gt Name Duplicate 7 Date Year Month Day Make Alias Rotate Mirror gt Date Year Month Reveal in Finder ak a aa a ROR flat Edit Filename Misc gt Extension tia Ecker en Fast Preview Slide Show Sort files into subfolders Name creates a subfolder and sorts the files according to name in this folder If for example you select five pictures whose name starts with Wall and five others starting with Grill the first five will be copied to a folder named Wall and the others to a folder named Grill If a filename occurs only once the file will not be moved and not renamed If you select Date instead of Name the selected images will be moved to subfolders that are named after the date
111. a trademark of Panasonic Copyright for all pictures in manual and on cover Hagen Henke except for ECW and mr SID example pictures Third Parties Components e ExifTool used with permission of Phil Harvey e Photo CD mark licensed by Kodak e ECW Compression Decompression Earth Resource Mapping Pty Ltd LuraWave Technology 2000 LuraTech GmbH 2000 Images compressed by LuraWave e XMP toolkit Adobe Systems Incorporated and others All rights reserved The original version of this source code may be found at http adobe com e RCWebColorPicker 2006 Carl Lindberg e NeuQuant 1994 Anthony Dekker e DDS and ACE import with the help of Martin Wright e BioFormats library licensed from Glencoe Software e JPEG 6 1998 Thomas G Lane updated to 6c by Bruce Barthon e Remote Control Wrapper a library of classes by Martin Kahr e Sparkle framework by Andy Matuschak e Crashreporter framework by Uli Kusterer e webp format sdk Copyright 2010 Google Inc All rights reserved New editions of this book may contain some paragraphs translated by the author in rough English These paragraphs will be replaced with a professional translation as soon as possible Typesetting Hagen Henke Version 4 6 Meissen Germany 2015 Contents Introduction Welcome to GraphicConverter 2 0 0 0 ccc cece cece ence nee n ene teen e eee ee teen enees 5 SYSLEM REQUITEMONUS stele cited onaieat a suieee roche esa eae Kaai ETIE EREA EINEN 5 Ins
112. a Macintosh to Windows the resource fork appears as a separate file that starts with _ Delete Source Raw File If No JPEG Exists in Dest Folder In professional workflows RAW images are often imported from the camera and converted into JPG format Unus able JPG images are deleted immediately This option allows you to delete all RAW files automatically if there is no longer a JPG file with the same name except for the exten sion In the left hand list select the folder with the RAW images and the folder with the remaining JPG images in the right hand list Add XMP Record If Only IPTC NAA Record Exists also writes the IPTC data in the XMP section This option is useful if you have already indexed your pictures and also need the IPTC data in the XMP section because the person you are sending the pictures can only read the XMP section with his her software You can use Set XMP Label Depending on Finder File Label if the label will only be set as a Finder label and should be recognized in other operating systems This requires that the software used under other operating systems evaluates the XMP data Graphic Converter automatically sets the label in the XMP section too If you set the label for sev eral files at the same time this will take a while because each file has to be opened inter nally In order to work faster this option can be disabled in the Preferences under the 43 Convert amp Modify Browser Function section Then
113. a margin for the filename the page number and the date the image cannot be printed right up to the edge In the Preferences under Print General you can specify what data is printed If you disable all of them a white margin will be kept however If you do not want to print the image centered on the page you can select other posi tions like for example Bottom Right with Image Position This is particularly useful if you select a value under Image Size Custom Scale that makes the images considerably smaller than the paper format If the images have a large number of megapixels you may need to select a very small value of 5 to 10 File Print Preview allows a larger preview Click Print to proceed to the print dialog 93 Printing In the Preferences in the Print General section you can enter the Print Margins Ori entation and use Orientation Depending on image proportions to specify that por trait format images are rotated 90 degrees so that the paper can be printed in full format Print m rer ae FAN m a General Open Save Print Slide Show Convert Browser Folders Search Print Margins Orientation Left 0 50 inch Right 0 50 inch Top 0 50 inch Bottom 0 50 inch Orientation M Depending on image proportions Overlap Width 0 00 inch Print Header Print M File name _ without extension M Current date M Page number Font Lucida Grande Ul p Size 10 7 Multiple F
114. a new version of the file that is not protected and needs to be saved under a new name like a new file with Duplicate The save command will there fore become available for this file in the File menu File Export allows you to save a file under a new name like before with File Save As Since automatic saving can inadvertently take up a large amount of hard drive space and slow down further work when you are working with larger files you can disable it in the Preferences under Save General The usual commands for example Save Save As etc will then appear in the File menu If necessary use another hard drive and TimeMachine to keep versions of your files Changes in Mac OS 10 9 Mavericks The functions File Save and Save as are avail able again The function File Save a Version is no longer available File Save now saves a version File Revert To Last Opened Date or Browse All Versions go back to the original version or a newer one 20140601 _MG_3541 jpg RGB v Name 20140601 _MG_3541 jpg p Tags Where ij August 2014 LJ Locked The Duplicate function is available from the file menu In the name dialog is a check box for locking the file and you can apply a Tag or edit the name of the file You can move the file to another folder with the Where PopUp Menu which is handy especially for moving to or from the iCloud 12 Mac OS 10 9 Mavericks Fullscreen mode Click the green circle wi
115. ab Select how many pictures should appear in each row or each col umn of the Web page with Pictures per Row and Pictures per Col Catalog File HTML Basic HTML Meta HTML Text Batch HTML Page Pictures per Row 3 5 Color i Merge Profile into Thumbnail s A Merge Profile into Image Pictures per Column 4l Cellspacing 8 il Use JPEGs of RAWs Thumbnail Width 64 pixel Thumbnail Height 52 pixel Linked Image Width 800 Color 2 M Display Name I Sip M with Extension Height 600 D ae 3 _ with Path Absolute Width 100 Ak Display text below image replace Underscore with Space Relative Width M Display text above image Display IPTC Caption Display Dimension Display File Size Make Square Frame M Sharpen e Sa lt small gt lt small gt at ry ad Show name only on subpage fies aes ites ta cec _ Show other only on subpage Open Save Cancel x Select the background color of the Internet pages to be created with Color Click the color sample to change the color 80 Photo Albums on the Internet Catalog Cellspacing allows you to define a value for the spacing between images or text and the table cell lines You should enable Merge Profile into Thumbnail if you want to show images with profiles in a Web catalog since this includes the profile in the image The image will then no longer contain for example the information that it needs to be displayed with the sRGB profile
116. ably better we recommend using only Sandbox versions of your programs Apple s Mac App Store only supplies Sandbox versions of applications Programs without Sandbox technology will still run without limitations under the Mac OS however If you purchased GraphicConverter through the Mac App Store and would rather have a version without Sandbox technology please contact our support by e mail and include your pur chase receipt You will then receive a license number for the version without Sandbox technology that you can download from our Web site www lemkesoft com free of charge We recommend using the Sandbox version that you can also download from our Web site Gatekeeper is an Apple system that from OS 10 8 Mountain Lion ensures that only signed programs can be installed and started All programs that originate from a devel oper who is registered with Apple will get the signature without any checks by Apple GraphicConverter is signed for Gatekeeper Under Mac OS 10 8 Mountain Lion you can enable Gatekeeper in the System Preferences Security amp Privacy to increase protec tion against malware Gatekeeper and Sandbox have nothing to do with each other even though they both handle the security of your system 14 Support Support If you have questions on GraphicConverter or have problems see also page 272 it is best to contact us by e mail support lemkesoft com If in your country support is available in your language t
117. age 202 Slide show page 244 Automatic creation of Internet pages with picture indices for download page 78 Picture processing including dithering e g from page 137 and from page 171 Remove red eyes page 158 Simple text conversion page 29 Print pictures indices page 95 We wish you all the best in your work with GraphicConverter System Requirements GraphicConverter 9 7 or newer requires Mac OS X 10 8 or newer Click here to download older versions of GraphicConverter for almost any older Mac OS Installation Summary Copy GraphicConverter onto your hard drive and start the program Graphic Converter is a multi language program that starts in the language set in the Internation al section of the System Preferences The languages available are German English French Danish Sweden Italian Spanish Japanese Chinese simplified Chinese tradi tional Czech Dutch Catalan and Russian This manual is stored inside the GraphicConverter program file that is a so called pack age Packages can be opened by selecting Show Package Contents from the context menu in the Finder They then work in the same way as folders All documentation for GraphicConverter is under the path Contents Resources If you want to install a newer Installation version of the documentation simply overwrite the old file with the new one You may not change the names In Mac OS X plug ins are copied to the Library Appli
118. alues M Show Details Full Screen Preview Reset _ Cacel_ E The black point is at the left hand end of the diagram The white point is at the oppo site right hand end A purely black picture would have a maximum peak on the left hand side and would otherwise have a flat diagram You can use the Auto Levels White Both Black to optimize the level of a picture that for example is too flat Automatic level adjustments do not normally produce the required result If a histogram does not quite reach the left hand or right hand edge you can normally improve the contrast and the brightness of the picture considerably if you drag the left hand or right hand slider to the start of the curve Further improvements are often possible if you move the center con trol slightly to the right or left Adjusting the Tolerance value allows you to suppress undesired noise faults If the results in the preview are not satisfactory you can undo all settings in this dialog by clicking Reset You can select a section of the picture for the Before and After win dows using the rectangle in the Picture window Move the selection rectangle with the mouse and zoom to an appropriate zoom level If you use the dialog frequently you can select the respective last value with the spacebar 170 Colors Mode and Colorize Select Apply to all frames if all pictures in a GIF animation should be optimized at the same time If you are not an expert it is easier to co
119. am or as a HTML Catalog for weg publishing for example 202 The Browser To open a Browser window click File Browser You can also drag a folder to the Graph icConverter icon in the operating system In the Browser window that opens small pre views of the pictures in the folder are displayed a If there is no preview for the pictures yet GraphicConverter creates one automatically or you can manually via the menu of the Action icon Misc Create Preview You can customize the toolbar above the thumbnails to suit your needs Open the con text menu by right clicking or Control clicking the toolbar and select Customize Tool bar View Window gt Help m o deh oo ec v Icon and Text Icon Only Text Only Hide Toolbar Use Small Size Customize Toolbar 203 The Browser A dialog opens where you can drag further icons to the required position in the toolbar Drag the icons from the toolbar onto the dialog to remove them from the toolbar ect Filter View Window Help C Test leer A i r j amp S a Hel Ee Subfolder jpg x e ze Left Rotate Right E Mail SlideShow Print Catalog Destination amp Format Convert Action Drag your favorite items into the toolbar Lale 2 Bm i Back View Convert amp Modify Edit Rotate Left Rotate Right Slide Show Print E Mail Catalog Separator Space M Subfolder jpg z is Gee t 9 fm lay Flexib
120. amming regular expressions http www regenechsen de phpwcms index php regex_englisch RegEx is also available in the dialog of File Slide Show with find to let you find files that have a certain pattern in their name Label Enter the required file extensions for example jpg and tif to assign the selected label to the corresponding file ONYO Rename Name amp Extension Index Date Specials Label Current Name Change to IMG_0114 j IMG_0114 j mM Change Label m vPI pi ied IMG_ 0115 jpg IMG_ 0115 jpg Extension cy e yt yy IMG_ 0119 jpg IMG_ 0119 jpg or IMG_0120 jpg IMG_0120 jpg Extension al E LEL IMG_ 0121 jpg IMG_ 0121 jpg Extension Eleasosece IMG_ 0122 jpg IMG_ 0122 jpg IMG_ 0123 jpg IMG_ 0123 jpg Extension al P TT IMG_ 0124 jpg IMG_ 0124 jpg 7 IMG_ 0125 jpg IMG_ 0125 jpg Extension Becceece IMG_ 0126 jpg IMG_ 0126 jpg Extension Basceece IMG_ 0127 jpg IMG_ 0127 jpg a IMG_ 0128 jpg IMG_0128 jpg Case sensitive IMG_ 0129 jpg IMG_ 0129 jpg IMG_ 0130 jpg IMG_ 0130 jpg IMG_ 0131 jpg IMG_ 0131 jpg IMG_ 0132 jpg IMG_ 0132 jpg IMG_ 0133 jpg IMG_ 0133 jpg IMG_ 0134 jpg IMG_ 0134 jpg IMG_ 0135 jpg IMG_ 0135 jpg Choose Presets B _ Clear All Cancel Enable Case sensitive if only files whose extension corresponds with the spelling in the dialog should be modified Back to the options in the pop up menu for the Convert dialog The Create Icon Preview option creates an icon and an overview for all selec
121. ample beige and color in the background with the fill tool Open the layers palette via the Window menu and insert a new layer with the plus 308 New in GraphicConverter 8 6 sign Hintergrundebene EN Copy the content of the other picture by opening it selecting everything with Command A and copying with Command C You can also select part of the picture for example with the lasso Insert the copied content into the new picture with Command V and position it as required Continue with further layers and content until your collage is finished To move the content of the layers again click the required layer on the layer palette You can change the order of the layers with the mouse This is useful if there are overlaps Clicking the eye symbol on the right of the layer palette allows you to hide the content of the respective layer Clicking the gear at the bottom right of the layer palette takes you to most functions of the Layer menu New Layer creates a new layer New Layer from Selection creates a new layer containing the current selection This is useful if for example you have selected a vase to use it on another layer Duplicate Layer creates a new identical layer Delete Layer deletes the selected layer Hide Layer makes the layer invisible as does clicking the eye symbol Crop Layers to Canvas is useful if a layer has become larger than the other layers for example due to scaling Bring to Front moves the s
122. and all windows that were open at the last shut down will be re opened In Mac OS 10 7 you can disable this option under System Preferences General If you leave this option enabled you can exclude Graph icConverter by disabling the Upon Launch Restore last Windows option in the General Misc section of the GraphicConverter Preferences Auto Save With Auto Save changes to an open image are always saved automatically in the background Therefore the latest editing progress is always available even after a crash However the main advantage is that you no longer have to worry about saving because the files are saved automatically You can therefore switch off your computer at any time 10 Auto Save and Fullscreen Mode without warning messages for unsaved documents appearing The Auto Save option is disabled in GraphicConverter by default You can enable Auto Save in the Preferences Save General with Features Support auto save and versions The Auto Save functions have been changed in newer versions of Mac OS For more information please see the end of this chapter In the File menu Save has become the Save a Version command The difference between the commands is that Save overwrites the open file so that only the modified version is available Save a Version saves the current editing progress The previously saved versions are however archived automatically and can be opened again at any time To do this click the filename
123. and are only used for orientation Use the options for swapping right and left if an image is not displayed correctly on a 3D television In the Preferences under Slide Show Misc the Screen Mode Convert 3D to 1080p frame packing for display option can be used to display 3D pictures that contain pic ture parts placed next to each other for example in three dimensions on certain 3D beamers or televisions Slide Show A es KEN 8 g a Se a Ea a General Open Save Print Slide Show Convert Browser Folders Search General Transitions Alias Folder lt None gt Papor to AME Allow M Apple Remote control during Slide Show Metadata Ignore Extensions THM TXT HTM HTML EXE DLL P C PAS CC ASM COM SYS LST DOC XLS PST OST INI PPT INF SIT ZIP TAR MIM GZIP ARJ MDX MSH RTF WEBLOC TEXTCLIPPING Play sound file with same name as the image Background Color Screen Mode Original Size Tiled display Y No conversion of 3D content for display Convert 3D to 1080p frame packing for display Subfolders Depth y Convert 3D to interleaved for display _ Convert 3D to 1080p half side by side HSBS Restore to Defaults M Last Values Cancel ps OKes The two images contained are placed on top of each other Your Mac s graphics card should be forced to use a resolution of 1920 x 2205 with the program Switchres www madrau com The format has the width of full HD and double the height plus 45 pixels for an intermediate b
124. and in the destination folder is a file with the same name you will be asked in a dialog whether the existing file should be replaced by the new one you copy or move The dialog also offers the options Stop Don t Replace and Delete new File If you change the name in the edit 317 New in GraphicConverter 9 2 and 9 3 field you can also select Rename In the Preferences in the section Browser Edit you can select Duplicate Filename Stop is default button so the return key stops the process Don t ask and rename automatically adds Copy to the file name and when repeated additionally a number if the name of the file already exists in the destination folder New in GraphicConverter 9 2 and 9 3 In the Browser under the folder selection click the tab for Image Verification and drag a folder into the section to check all pictures in it for technical problems Click the circle at the end of the line to see the status of checking and the result Wrong file extension are not reported as long as the file is not broken Remove folders from the Image Verification via the context menu In the Preferences Browser Image Verification you can switch the verification on and off or select a time interval after which the check will be repeated Browser f gt TiFF AN LB of Fok wo Q General Open Save Print SlideShow Convert Browser Folders Search General Display M Enable image verification Preview Thumbnails
125. ar because the two pictures are on top of each other The 3D beamer recognizes the format and turns it into a 3D picture Convert 3D to interleaved for display allows you to convert the picture parts from a 3D image into an interleaved picture The monitor resolution is queried and applied as this is the only way to ensure that the two pictures are written alternately in the lines The format 1080p is therefore only available via Effect 3D Convert 3D to 1080p half side by side HSBS allows you to convert the picture parts from a 3D image into an interleaved picture HSBS stands for Half Side By Side Half refers to the resolution because the horizontal resolution is halved in this format Only half of the horizontal full HD resolution of 1920 pixels is available for each picture part Some beamers and televisions require this format 164 3D Effect If the Swap left and right Image upon Conversion option is selected in the Effect 3D menu it will also apply to slide shows All conversions during the slide show are only tem porary The files are not modified The functions in this pop up menu are also available for editing individual pictures via the Effect 3D menu Effect 3D Swap left and right Image allows you to swap the images in 3D pictures Use this function if 3D pictures are not displayed correctly Swap left and right Image upon Conversion allows you to activate swapping permanently for conversions Effect 3D C
126. are when moving the center slider for the magenta green balance towards green because a green color cast is produced even with small values 102 Color correction with Xe847 Color correction with Xe847 Strong blue or red color casts are most noticeable in images These color casts occur for example when the wrong picture mode or an incorrect manual white balance has been selected on the camera If the picture contains an area that should actually be white you can click the area with the white point tool to correct the white point You can achieve good results in most pic tures with this tool However this technique does often spoil the mood of the picture because the colors look unnatural This problem is usually solved by the Xe847 filter that can be found in the Filter menu If the result is still not ideal select the Xe847 filter from the same menu for further fine tuning options The following screenshot shows the original on the left and the pre view on the right in the Xe847 dialog 1 Fuzzy Logic Controller Click the ball in the middle of the upper circle and move it freely within the circle until you are happy with the colors This circle is called Fuzzy Logic Controller By moving the ball you generate variants of the Xe847 algorithm You cannot generally say which area of the circle provides a more blue or a more yellow red result since the filter works in a very 103 Color correction with Xe847 complex manner
127. arisation Special shutter or polarisation glasses ensure that the right eye only sees one image and the left eye only the other one The submenu under Effect 3D allows you to convert the right left display of an MPO file with Convert two Images to one Image Side by Side This conversion is automatic if you open an MPO file and save it as a JPS file Use Mark Image as 3D left and right Image to set an internal mark just for GraphicConverter which enables the 3D functions This is useful for images that are not recognised as 3D on the basis of their format The small marks R and L that appear at the top of the image are not saved in the picture itself and are only used for orientation 292 New in GraphicConverter 7 4 Use the options for swapping right and left if an image is not displayed correctly ona 3D television Import of liff and stv format added To also display the pictures from subfolders in the browser at the same time select Show in Flat View from the submenu This option is only available if you right click or Ctrl click a folder in the middle area of the browser Animation files in which the color channels R G and B are three separate images can be converted into a normal picture with Effect Channels Frames Convert Animation to RGB image Display of pixel size and resolution added as option to the browser thumbnail view Preferences Browser Tumbnails Added search option for camera model By pressing
128. as a catalog see p 78 Select Picture to create image files with the catalog pictures see p 28 Print prints a catalog of the selected pictures E Mail opens a dialog that lets you forward the selected images to an e mail program to mail them as an attachment If you want to send the image via a webmail provider like Hotmail you can select the Folder on Desktop option from the Send pop up menu to save the file in an automatically created folder that you can then use for your webmail account E Mail File s Recipient Subject Message Size Medium 640x480 B E Mail with Mail H Quality for scaled images 86 l Delete all Metadata from JPEGs Add Filename to Image Font Lucida Grande 4 sar g Mark images with a red cross Store files always on desktop Apply batch No Batch 4 It is best to leave the Recipient Subject and Message input boxes empty Fill in this information in the next step in your e mail program If you use the Mailsmith e mail pro gram it may be necessary to enter a recipient to avoid an error message Select Size Original Size full quality Large or Larger if the recipient wants to print the image The sizes Medium and Small are good enough for viewing on a monitor Smaller images are sent and received much faster than large ones The smaller versions of the images are kept as invisible temporary files on your hard drive until they are sent If the extensi
129. atically matched when only two pictures are opened The higher the value you select for Intensity of difference the clearer the differences are dis played Clicking OK creates a new picture where everything that is identical in both pic tures is displayed in black Differences are displayed with lighter colors You can also use this option as an effect filter It is best to assess the loss of quality by opening the normal view of the compressed pic ture and for example positioning it next to the opened source picture You should always create a master file of your picture in a format such as TIFF format that has not had data reduced when working with JPEG pictures Data reduction is carried out again every time a JPEG picture is saved and the loss of quality is increased repeatedly Therefore all changes such as the basic settings for brightness should only be made in the master file This master file remains in TIFF format in all editing stages and versions while you keep on saving new derivatives for your Web sites in JPEG format 70 Comparing Pictures If a picture is sent to you in JPEG format open it and then save it in TIFF format This kind of a file is the best possible master in this situation Minimizing GIF Pictures The file size can be decreased for GIF pictures by reducing the color table You can Opti mize Colors under Options in the Save as dialog The color table is then reduced to the minimum without a los
130. ation date with the date that is entered in the EXIF information for the file Some digital cameras generate an incorrect creation and modification date but set the correct photo date in the file Use Set Creation Date depending on EXIF if only the creation date should be set to leave the correct modification date unchanged This option also allows you for example using Command A to set the creation date and if necessary the modification date for several selected graphics to the only photo date that makes sense Set EXIF Date to File Creation Date sets the EXIF date to the date when the document was Created 221 The Browser Shift the EXIF timestamp opens a dialog where you can change time and date from the EXIF information This makes sense if you forgot to change the time in the camera or if the clock battery was low while you were traveling To raise the value for year month etc enter positive numbers To decrease the values enter negative numbers like 5 Shift the EXIF Timestamp Add to or subtract from the EXIF timestamp the following Years 3 8 Months 4 8 a Days 1iy Hours 17 8 Minutes 3 Seconds 0 8 M Set the file date to the EXIF date too Use Set EXIF Date if you want to set the date and time directly Set EXIF Timestamp Date YYYY MM DD z 07 17 Time hh mm ss 22 Soi 49 4 gt Increment seconds 0 m Set the file date to the EXIF date too _ Cancel E
131. ave a very small amount of RAM avail able since browsing with less cache will be slower If you have a large amount of RAM you can increase the cache size to browse more quickly GraphicConverter saves the cache file under the path Library Application Support GraphicConverter Cache The tilde character stands for the name of the respective user 234 The Browser Browser Display Allgemein Vorschau Vorschaubilder Bearbeiten _Sortieren Verschiedenes Dokumente Nach Name re Reihenfolge Aufsteigend Ordner Separat Zeige l Versteckte Dokumente und Ordner Standard wiederherstellen KD Select Show Hidden Files amp Folders to also display invisible files and folders For the Files by Sort method and the Order you can select whether By Name or another criterion should be used for sorting in new browser windows You can change the sort criterion at any time at the bottom left of the browser window Select Folders Separately if the folders should be displayed before all other files Browser Preview General Display Preview Count 2 B Preview Maximum preview count in preview area aes Additional Tabs EXIF i Misc Be M EXIFTool O Comment m GPS M IPTC M Summary Use Drag amp Drop to change tabs order Image M Show cached preview first Restore to Defaults Cine ED Preview Count allows you to select the maximum number of previews are that are dis pla
132. ayed growing from the top to the bottom Save For Web 568x378 72 5 KB Analog 28 8 20 s ISDN 64 0 9 s DSL 1000 0 s J Format JPEG Options Quality gt mrad _ Progressive M Embed IPTC XMP _ Merge Color Profile into image M Embed EXIF M Reduce to 72 ppi M Scale longest side to 1 024 pixel cal Sharpen 30 3 Settings Open Save Cancel OK The preview picture is always displayed at zoom level 100 and can be moved with the mouse The options for incorporating IPTC XMP and EXIF are under the preview Leave IPTC XMP selected if the IPTC information along with details like the keywords or other XMP information should be available to users after they have loaded the image onto their own drive The EXIF information contains the exposure time as well as the time and date when the picture was taken When you want to put pictures on the Internet just to display them you should select Merge color profile into image as they will otherwise be displayed too light and pale by most web browsers Safari 3 1 suports color profiles If your web pages will be viewed with Safari 3 1 or FireFox 3 5 exclsively you do not have to merge color profile into image Embed EXIF but has to be enabled If you want to put pictures on the Internet for others to download you should leave Embed EXIF enabled The pictures can then be exposed correctly by a photo developing service because the color
133. be suggested as a name for the folder New Folder Move selected files into new folder _ Cancel OK 242 Pictures on your iPod Rename opens a dialog where you can rename the folder clicked in the left hand sec tion of the browser Current Name Originale New Name oR Print Catalog prints all pictures from the clicked folders together with the subfolders as a catalog Print Folder prints all pictures from the clicked folder as a catalog Refresh updates the folders and shows new folders that have been created in the Finder since it was opened for example Normally changes from the Finder like new fold ers Or new names are automatically transferred very quickly Pictures on your iPod You cannot export pictures on an iPod with photo functions like the iPod Touch directly from GraphicConverter Select the iPod in iTunes and click the Photos tab iTunes Summary Music Movies TVShows Podcasts H movies Photos E TV Shows Podcasts Sync photos from F r iPod DP Radio All photos 57 photos STORE Alls events iTunes Store Selected folders 25 photos Maai M Henkes 14 3 2008 25 Meann E Henkes 2004 2007 21 v oo sain g E Steven Tom M rz 2008 11 lusic a Movies E TV Shows Y G Morcheeba fh Morcheeba The Antidote iPod Shuffle Liste 4 ms a M o Now Playing iTunes will first copy all of the other content onto your iPod iTunes will then copy your photos onto your iPod in th
134. be used as an effect or as a simple copy protection The follow dialog opens where you can specify whether the strips should be vertical or horizontal The Size of the strips is the key to reversing the effect at any time by using the option again If you are using this option as a simple copy protection for pictures that you want to pass on for demonstration purposes 180 Mirror you will need to protect the size of the strips like a password The recipient can work out the strip size him or herself by simply measuring them however Glass Blocks Where _ Vertical Horizontal Size 64 pixels This is the result with an example picture eee E DSCN5986 jpg RGB 181 Shadow Shadow Effect Shadow allows you to add a shadow around the right and bottom of an image eee E Sonnenuntergang Wiese jpg RGB 100 w a ad First a dialog will open where you can choose how large the shadow should be After inserting the shadow you may have to drag open the window slightly to see it In our example the area around the image that is normally gray is yellow You can choose any color from the context menu for this area You can select the color behind the shadow using the background color This is white in our example If your picture contains an alpha channel the shadow will also be inserted there so that it is displayed transpar ently by programs like Safari Select Picture Alpha Channel Add if your
135. black separating image using the Series detection This requires that the filenames within the blocks have different characters at the beginning of the filenames If the blocks are like this Source Result IMG00001 jpg IMG00001 jpg IMGO00002 jpg IMGO00002 jpg IMG00003 jpg IMG00003 jpg IMGZZ jpg and and DMA00001 jpg DMAO00001 jpg DMA00002 jpg DMA00002 jpg DMA00003 jpg DMA00003 jpg DMAZZ jpg The new images are given the first three characters of the source files as their name and ZZ is added so the new images are sorted alphabetically according to the source images The new images are all black Three characters need to be defined in the prefer ences under slide show Effects for detection to work You can change the creator with Change File Creator The Creator is used under Mac OS 9 to assign files to a program with which they are opened when you double click them GKON is the creator for GraphicConverter Change Creator New Creator Attention Please use this function very carefully Cancel Cok 41 Convert amp Modify You can use Move to Destination if not an Image File to remove all files that are not images or damaged images from a source folder Add TIFF Preview to EPSF allows you to attach a preview in TIFF format to EPFS docu ments Some programs can only display a preview of an EPSF file in this way Change TIFF Directory Offset can repair some fau
136. c tive location in Google Earth and select Set GPS from current Google Earth position from the Geo menu in the GraphicConverter menu bar You will recognize this menu from the standard red geo icon The GPS coordinates are transferred to the EXIF infor mation and shown in the information palette This sets the coordinates from the center of the image in Google Earth If you want to set the values precisely you should first zoom into the Google Earth image and then set a placemark with Add Placemark The placemark will then be dis 261 Geo Coordinates played around the middle of the left hand column Double click the placemark and wait until the image in Google Earth stops moving Now transfer the GPS data to GraphicCon verter with Set GPS from current Google Earth position Images with GPS data are displayed at the top right of the browser with the standard icon IMG_8601 JPG Click the icon to automatically display the marked location in Google Maps Alternatively you can use Show Position in Google Earth from the Geo menu B The flight speed can be selected in the Preferences under Browser Misc Add or edit GPS values opens the following dialog where you can enter and edit the GPS values GPS Latitude 51 3621 North Longitude 13 5894 East s Altitude 0 00 meters _ Store special Google values Distance 0 00 meters Tilt 0 00 degrees Azimuth 0 00 degrees Cancel 0K j 262 Set
137. cale proportional to Width and Height with black Borders Scale proportional to Width and Height with white Borders Do not scale Convert to sRGB needs to be enabled if you are creating pictures for the Internet You can specify whether only JPGs will be created with Use JPG for all sizes or whether to Use GIF for first size and JPG for all others Click the Buttons JPG GIF or PNG to set format option like quality Back to the popup menu Extract Images from PDF saves the images from a PDF as single files 34 Convert amp Modify Modify The following features of Convert modify the selected files without creating new ones to be saved in the destination folder You can therefore ignore the right hand part of the window The selected destination format is not valid The destination folder should not be the same as the source folder The content of the destination folder will not be chan ged The Insert IPTC option adds different or the same IPTC information from a text file in all the selected pictures This is exported from a database or can be created with an editor such as BBEdit Light You can only insert an IPTC in JPG and TIFF images Do not use the ASCII export for word processing You can also create this text file by exporting the IPTC information from one or more pictures see p 30 When you are working with smaller quantities of pictures it is easier to select the pic tures in the browser and modify the IPTC info via the IP
138. can use the program Image Capture that is a part of Mac OS X or you can connect a card reader If GraphicConverter recognizes a camera or a card a dialog will appear offering to display and import the content lt A camera was connected Do you want to gt browse images SS You will find the connected camera in the browser You can enable disable this dialog in the preferences 120 Importing Pictures from Digital Cameras Click Browse to display the content of the card in the browser import mode You can import the selected images or all images by clicking the corresponding button under the previews EOS_DIGITAL gt i GraphicConverter Handbuch images gt i iMovie Events Bi iMovie Projects gt ij Pferdebuch gt i Projekte gt Videos gt j vom MacbookPro gt von Renates MacBook Air B Von Video 4 gt T C Microsoft Windows XP IMG_1556 CR2 IMG_1557 CR2 gt VideoTraining gt _ EOS_DIGITAL gt hagenhenke Q gt iPhoto mage DoF EXiFTool Map P A Aperture General image data v Gi Devices Name IMG_1558 CR2 E EOS_DIGITAL Date and Time 21 11 2012 15 08 17 ah eaten a Size WE lid Resolution Colors Color Profile Frames File Format IMG_1558 CR2 IMG_1559 CR2 File Length l Compression __Options Import Selected import all _ Spotlight Comment Rating be SO a a a a m Item 79 selected of 80 item
139. cation Support GraphicCon verter Plug ins folder User plug ins are copied to the Users Library Application Support GraphicConverter Plug ins folder The tilde character stands for the name of the respective user User plug ins are only available to the respective users One very easy way to install plug ins is to drag them onto the GraphicConverter program icon After a query they will be automatically copied into the correct folder Mac OS X already supports a large number of USB scanners Connect your scanner via USB not FireWire and select File Scan Scan with Image Capture If you want to use the functions of the software supplied with the scanner please follow the instructions in the scanner documentation For further information see p 118 onwards Step By Step Installation You may have downloaded GraphicConverter from the Internet or received it on a CD or you bought a license from the Mac App Store Please read the paragraph that applies to you below Possibility 1 You downloaded GraphicConverter from the Internet Double click the file which has been downloaded if a window with a volume image does not open automatically A volume image is a volume which can be used like a normal volume even though it only exists in the RAM The following volume image appears on the desktop GraphicConverter Double click the volume image to open it ene GraphicConverter E tt YS Dropbox GraphicConverter
140. changed D Mirror temporarily horizontally picture file will not be changed The service http www dphoto com is now supported In the TIFF format options you can select Premultiplied or Non Premultiplied for the Alphachanel Some versions of Adobe Lightroom can display Premultiplied correctly only New in GraphicConverter 8 7 Core Image filters are available as Actions In the Preferences Open Image Formats PDF you can disable Antialiassing for PDF and EPS files You can insert content from the clipboard into the courners of a picture with functions like Paste top left from the submenu of Edit Paste Metadata is written in pictures in WEBp format too The OpenMeta Standard is supported The IPTC Data is written additionally into a field in the extended file attributes of the Mac OS Programms such as Pathfinder can read the data very fast When the respective files are copied to another computer theses doubled data will not get passed The picture files nevertheless contain the IPTC data as they are always written into the normal IPTC field You can add Keywords to a picture in the Browser by dragging Text Snippets onto it When you save a picture that contains only two colours as a PNG the file will be saved as a b w picture with 1 Bit When pasting into a picture the pasted part cannot jut out any more Multiscale Images in Convert amp Modify can save as PNG too Import of RAW supports Bayer GBRG order
141. cked by USB Overdrive 158 Removing Red Eyes Using the regular Red Eye option Click the elliptic selection tool which is second from top in the left hand column Just select the red pupil with the slightly red pixels at the edge and then select Red Eye GraphicConverter blackens the pupils with soft edges and keeps the reflection You can set the Darken Level selecting Effect Red Eye Settings For brighter red tones you should choose a far higher value Repeat this for all other red eyes Removal of red eyes is only available for pictures with a color depth of 32 bit You change the color depth to 32 bit if your pictures have a lower color depth using Picture Colors If you want the pupils to remain light gray use the option again If the person is depicted from the side it may be easier to define the selec tion with the lasso You will find the lasso at the top left of the toolbox The pupils of the people in the photograph are wide open because the room is dark Once you have removed the red eye the results may still not be very satisfactory We therefore recommend avoiding this problem when you take the picture It is easiest to use a flash that is as far away from the camera as possible The flash will then illuminate a 159 Removing Red Eyes different part of the retina than picked up by the camera Heavy flash guns ensure the best results but because of their weight are not even used by press photographers today A
142. color profiles are located in the User Library Application Support Graphic Converter Profiles folder The tilde stands for the name of the user After installing Gra phicConverter only the AdobeRGB1998 icc CMYK icc and sRGB icc profiles are available at first When you open an image with a color profile that GraphicConverter does not know yet it will be saved automatically in this folder You can use this option specifically to save a profile from an image If possible select all existing profile files beforehand in the Finder to recognize the new profile file immediately If a profile is only available in another program you can add it to a test image there save it and open it in GraphicCon 144 Color Management with Profiles and ColorSync verter Then delete the test image as it will probably be displayed with the wrong colors because of the profile The profile defined for RGB is selected for RGB images without profile and EXIF informa tion Accordingly the profile defined for CMYK is selected for CMYK images without pro file 3 Do nothing if the image has no profile Only select this option if you are sure that color profiles should not be assigned to any im ages without profiles When this option is enabled there is no query and all images are displayed without profiles Images from a digital camera with Adobe RGB for example are displayed in the wrong colors with this setting Image appears black If an image
143. ct Color Blindness and then the color blindness type Protan from the sub menu The picture will then be displayed as seen by a color blind person If you can still read the text people with protan color blindness will be able to read the text Select Edit Undo and set the picture to the Deutan and then to Tritan color blindness using the same submenu The text should be still be readable again The following picture shows a Web site as normal and then as protan and deutan color blind people would see it In this case the white font is clearly visible against the red background Aktuell n Ringstedt und Nevenwaide Aktuell Eingeladen in Ringstedt und Nevenwalde You can avoid problems from the start by not using yellow fonts on green backgrounds or green on yellow 267 AppleScript AppleScript Using AppleScript you can automate tasks on your Macintosh by writing small programs called AppleScripts GraphicConverter supports AppleScript You can access many of the GraphicConverter options with an AppleScript On our Web site you can download AppleScripts for GraphicConverter http www lemkesoft de en products graphicconverter scripts We recommend to select Disable all notifications in the Preferences in the section General Misc so that any message dialogs do not interrupt script processes Under Mac OS X you copy your scripts into the folder Library Application Support GraphicConverter Scripts or if scripts shoul
144. cting the Rotate JPGs upon EXIF option Click the camera or card on the left hand side Buttons for importing are displayed at the bottom right of the browser window with the Options button Notifications are supported from Mac OS 10 8 If you want to apply the GPS data from one picture to other pictures you can copy it to the clipboard with Edit Copy Copy GPS for Paste and then add it to the other pictures with Edit Paste Paste GPS New in GraphicConverter 8 3 2 The Action menu has been added to the menu bar and can also still be opened via the 303 New in GraphicConverter 8 3 2 corresponding icon in the toolbar Click the gear to open the menu The functions it contains can also be found via the search box in the Help menu If at least one term is entered in the object description Caption and in the keywords an IPTC icon will appear above the thumbnails of the respective pictures in the browser In the Preferences you can specify in the Browser Edit section that a confirmation query should appear before pictures are deleted with Backspace or Delete PCD format of Kodak photo CDs is supported in 32 and 64 bit Effect Channels Frames Convert Movie to Animation allows you to convert movies into an animation and then save them in GIF format Password protection can be set when you save PDF files Select Save As and then PDF as the format in the pop up menu Click the Options button and select ZIP or JPEG as th
145. d Core Image add an alpha chanel now Undo for color profiles New in GraphicConverter 7 3 1 added option to select dimension of picture information added option to ignore previews in resource fork added option to disable auto save and versioning on Lion The folder GraphicConverter containing profiles and saved batches etc was moved back to the Library folder in the user s folder You can open this folder with Show Suport folder with Finder from GraphicConverter s Help menu If this is not possible you do not have the permissions needed In this case go to the Finder and open the folder with Go Go to folder Enter the path Library Application Support GraphicConverter added option reduce to printer resolution display of location data in gps window added action to transfer panasonic location data to IPTC XMP added option to darken unselected parts of an image added added action submenu item to the browser context menu reintroduced Fullscreen display command under Lion added shape option Fill with background color and frame with foreground color added option to write rating into extended file attributes Windows ICON export improved photoraw import updated 291 New in GraphicConverter 7 4 multipage preferences added moved support folder back to the Library subfolder and added to the help menu a command to access the folder because it is hidden on Lion support folder depth in convert amp modify enlarged d
146. d When you click this button a dialog opens where you can select settings such as size color depth color font etc for the catalog Several picture files can be put together to make a large picture file with Concat Select the files to be put together in the selection area on the left and click Concat A dialog opens where you can specify how many pictures should be put together next to each other in the first line of the new picture and how many lines the new picture 28 Convert amp Modify should have Line Order specifies that the top line is filled first GraphicConverter will then continue on the left of the next line down If you disable this option the columns will first be filled from top to bottom starting at the left Concat Horizontal amp Vertical first image defines part size Images per Row 10 Images per Column 55 m Line Order Only Horizontal Only Vertical nel O Only Horizontal joins the pictures together horizontally i e next to each other Only Vertical joins the pictures together vertically i e one below the other For example with six source pictures you can set two pictures in each line resulting in three columns The first picture is the master picture and determines the size of the cells It is best to put pictures of the same size together If there are spaces left over they will be set to white The values for images per row and column must fit to the number of images
147. d only be available to one user into the folder User Library Application Support GraphicConverter Scripts You can open the folder with the scripts in the Finder with Open User Scripts Folder from the script menu Open AppleScripts using the menu that displays a piece of paper as an S This menu contains all the AppleScripts that were in the Scripts folder when the program was launched Help Open User Scripts Folder d RGE ll 1500 Convert to JPGs Show Slideshow 3300 Pixel If you want to see which options can be used with an AppleScript open the program AppleScript Editor that you will find in the directory Applications Utilities Select File 268 AppleScript Open Dictionary After a brief wait a list of all programs is displayed Select GraphicConverter to display all options that can be called up via an AppleScript e608 S GraphicConverter oOo fate fata fei 2 _ ee Back Forward Text Size View Print Search E Required Suite E Standard Suite b Miscellaneous Standards gt E GraphicConverter Suite G a Standard Suite Common terms for most applications close v Close an object close reference the object to close saving yes no ask specifies whether to save currently open documents count v Return the number of elements of a particular class within an object count reference the object whose elements are to be counted each type class the class of the elements to be counted
148. define the number of digits that will be used If you enter 6 for digits 3529 will be changed to 003529 This function is adequate for example to add pictures from an ultrasonic device to a data base In Convert amp Modify the name of the last opened or saved Batch is displayed for easier guidance During Slide Show the key opens the dialog for editing IPTC data You can open GPX files directly from the browser with a double click You do not have to open these files from the Geo menu any more The erasor can be enlarged up to 50 pixels New in GraphicConverter 8 8 1 In the Preferences part Open Formats PhotoRAW you can select whether images are opened by Apple Corelmage by dcraw or with Corelmage and only with dcraw if open with Corelmage fails Depending on the camera type Corelmage uses automatic lens corrections whereat the images in most cases get cropped If you want to avoide that corp by the automatic lens corrections select Only dcraw The dialog Effect Gamma Correction was updated as the color profiles have replaced the Gamma in formats like the PNG format The Gamma Correction hardly makes sense but can be used as a tool to darken pictures and at the same time increase saturation The changed gamma value is not saved to the file but calculated into the image In the PNG format a gamma value could be saved by which the images were displayed with the same brightness under Windows and Mac OS This technology has been r
149. dex 37 Convert amp Modify Reset Index on Date Time Folder Change allows an index to be started over again when the date or time in the image files is changed Remove existing Index deletes the index from the specified position in the filename Before Name places the index in front of the name if it previously came after the name or in the extension After Name places the index after the name As Extension moves the index to the extension behind the period Remove additional digits deletes all places in the index above the number specified under digits starting from the left Use this option to shorten extremely long indices like for example 00001234 Global Index creates a continuous index for all of your pictures Insert separator allows you to insert one or more separators in front of or after the index You can select the separator yourself Special characters cannot be used if you have selected the UNIX and thereby Web compatible option under Charset In this case they will automatically be replaced by an underscore character The index numbering of files can also be carried out at the same time as a conversion Note the instructions from page 47 Date Add Date is often useful for photos taken with digital cameras Enter a date or use the Document Creation Date or the EXIF Date in the filename Select whether the date should be placed before or after the name or whether it should be added as an extensi on Add Space ad
150. dialog you can choose whether the whole picture or just a previously defined section should be printed In the Preferences under General Edit you can specify that the cursor keys move the selection without an additional key If duplicate filenames will result from renaming the corresponding filenames will appear red in the list beforehand If for example you delete the numbers from filenames like DSCN1234 jpg and DSCN1235 jpg DSCN jpg will be left in both names which will lead to a name conflict Under View Grid Options you can select a maximum of 1024 pixels as the spacing for gridlines This maximum has been increased for large pictures The browser can display pictures that you have uploaded at www flickr com www locr com or www plus google com Sign into the respective service via Window Accounts and confirm the access when the website opens if necessary After signing in you can select the respective service at the bottom left of the browser Pictures from the Flickr photo stream need to be copied in sets first These sets are displayed as folders in GraphicConverter If you are using Google an instant upload folder and a day folder will be displayed You can use both services as an alternative to Apple s Photo Stream which runs through iCloud and iPhoto Open the camera app on your iPhone or other iOS device directly from the flickr app or the Google app From these apps you can also select pictures in the Camera
151. dit Copy submenu On the EXIFTool tab the EXIF data is displayed in the same way as it is exported by Phil Harvey s EXIFTool Boxes that do not belong to the official EXIF standard and are only used by a particular camera manufacturer are also shown This could include an entry giv ing the number of pictures taken with the camera You will find further information on EXIFTool here http www sno phy queensu ca phil exiftool Further metadata can be displayed on the XMP tab Photoshop CS writes this data It is however only of interest for users who need metadata in XML format The XMP data can only be saved in JPG JP2 JPEG 2000 PNG and TIFF image formats When you use the JP2 and PNG formats the most important EXIF information is written in the XMP section if the file contains EXIF information 62 Work Environment When opening images GraphicConverter evaluates the XMP data if the IPTC informa tion is not readable as the XMP data also contains the IPTC information among other things When saving pictures the XMP data is also used to write the correct IPTC informa tion if it cannot be read upon opening You can disable this option in the Preferences under Open XMP The comments contained in the picture are displayed in the Comment tab For exam ple the program and the version number of the program that was used to save the pic ture are also included here You can modify the comments by clicking the text box on the pa
152. ds a space character between the date and the name Alternatively you can enter an underscore as the last character in the Date Format box ONO Rename Name amp Extension Index Date Specials Label Current Name Change to IMG_0114 jpg 2004 06 16 12 46 28 IMG_0114 jpg M Add date to filename IMG_0115 jpg 2004 06 16 12 46 30_IMG_0115 jpg Source Document creation date IMG_0119 jpg 2004 06 16 15 05 22_IMG_0119 jpg EXIF date IMG_0120 jpg 2004 06 16 19 21 44_IMG_0120 jpg Ouse IMG_0121 jpg 2004 06 16 19 21 58 IMG_0121 jpg IMG_0122 jpg 2004 06 16 19 22 34 IMG_0122 jpg Position Before filename IMG_0123 jpg 2004 06 16 19 24 08 _IMG_0123 jpg O After filename IMG_0124 jpg 2004 06 16 19 24 30_IMG_0124 jpg OAs extension IMG_0125 jpg 2004 06 16 19 25 08_IMG_0125 jpg Saparo JAJA toak IMG_0126 jpg 2004 06 16 19 26 10_IMG_0126 jpg Date Format IMG_0127 jpg 2004 06 16 19 26 16_IMG_0127 jpg MM mm ss_ IMG_0128 jpg 2004 06 16 19 27 30_IMG_0128 jpg Year YYYY Hour hh IMG_0129 jpg 2004 06 16 19 28 28 IMG_0129 jpg Month MM Minute mm IMG_0130 jpg 2004 06 16 19 28 34_IMG_0130 jpg Day DD Second ss IMG_0131 jpg 2004 06 16 19 28 52_IMG_0131 jpg IMG_0132 jpg 2004 06 16 19 30 36_IMG_0132 jpg IMG_0133 jpg 2004 06 16 19 30 42_IMG_0133 jpg IMG_0134 jpg 2004 06 16 19 30 58 IMG_0134 jpg IMG_0135 jpg 2004 06 16 19 31 16_IMG_0135 jpg IMG_0171 jpg 2004 06 16 22 14 28_IMG_0171 jpg Choose Presets B Clear All Cancel Rename
153. ds at any time you should reduce them to the size that the camera in your phone creates The size of the pictures should be listed in the phone manual Otherwise you can take a picture with your phone import it into your computer and then determine the size in pixels by selecting Picture Size There are two ways to transfer an image file from your phone to your computer You can transfer the picture via Bluetooth or if your phone has a memory card remove it and 73 Pictures for your mobile phone access it with your computer via a card reader The structure of the Memory Stick Duo for the Sony Ericsson S700i is as follows _ Untitled Anderungsdatum 28 Mai 2005 20 54 25 Gestern 21 09 fe 259_5958 jpg Gestern 21 09 IMG_5858 jpg Gestern 21 09 G IMG_6426 jpg Gestern 21 09 G IMG_6427 jpg Gestern 22 05 G IMG_6527 jpg Gestern 21 09 IMG_6663 jpg Heute 08 43 E IMG_6750 jpg Gestern 21 09 ti hagenhenke IMG_7123 jpg Gestern 21 10 BE IMG_7194 jpg Gestern 21 09 A Programme imG_7536 jpg Gestern 21 09 S Dokumente E IMG_7537 jpg Gestern 21 56 A G IMG_7554 jpg Gestern 21 09 iy Filme G IMG_7877 jpg Gestern 21 50 ey IMG_8702 jpg Gestern 21 09 6 Musik BE IMG_8934 jpg Gestern 21 09 a bilder img_8966 jpg Gestern 21 09 i IMG_9694 jpg Gestern 21 09 E Websites 45 MEMSTICK IND 23 Septem 2004 06 51 A 5 v O mp3 1 Juni 2005 22 50 J TENA ss A 03 You Had Me mp3 1 Juni 2005 22 50 E Projekte gt E MSSEMC Gest
154. duce the zoom level the image window will also become smaller With reposition moves the image window to the top left corner of the screen Show rulers displays rulers on the left hand side and at the top of the image windows The unit can be changed for example from pixels to cm in the top right corner of the image window When Opening a New Window Retain Last Selected colors keeps the foreground and background color which would otherwise be set to black and white Selected tool keeps the last selected tool Settings keeps all settings for example even the pen width and the colors Internet The following section looks at formats file sizes and filenames for pictures that are to be published on the Internet Sending pictures can often be problematic We will therefore cover this in a separate chapter entitled Tips for Sending with Different E mail Programs 64 Preparing Pictures for the Internet Preparing Pictures for the Internet When preparing pictures for the Internet you need to select the appropriate picture for mat minimize the file size and optimize the filename Selecting the Appropriate Picture Format Only pictures in PNG GIF and JPEG formats are used on the World Wide Web All four for mats are heavily compressed so that the Internet pages are displayed quickly to the view er Pictures in JPEG format can either have 16 7 million colors or 256 grayscales JPEG for mat is therefore particularly suitable for p
155. dy without resource Make filename ready for the web Merge color profile into image for web usage and remove EXIF M Save all pages of multipage files _ New Folder Cancel Save The resource contains for example the preview picture that is displayed by the Mac OS but does not have a function on the Internet Files without a resource are approximately 40 kB smaller than the same file with a resource When you are working with small pic tures about 40 kB for example saving with a resource would double the size of the file If you check the file size in the Finder it may often show the old value from before editing because the Finder even tends to be very slow on the fastest computers One trick to update a Finder window is switching back and forth between the list and the icon display Do not forget to disable this option during the next save procedure if you are working on pictures for other purposes Make filename ready for the web changes the current filename upon saving so that it can be used on Internet servers without problems Spaces are changed to the underscore character special characters are replaced and all letters are written in lowercase For example Next Field jog becomes next_field jpg You cannot see the changes in the file selection dialog because the text in the entry box cannot be changed The saved file will have the modified name however Minimizing JPEG Pictures You can set a qual
156. e Zoom Out H Some of the zoom levels have decimal places because the picture quality is particularly good on the screen with these values Most other values have to be rounded up This is why there can be unsharpness and step effects especially along diagonal lines This prob lem only affects the screen display and does not have an effect on the picture You get the best picture display with zoom level 100 You can zoom very quickly by pressing Command key and plus or Command key and minus If you want keep your right hand on the mouse you can zoom into the pic ture by holding down the Command key and spacebar and then clicking it You can then zoom out by clicking it while holding down the Option key and spacebar The View at Original Size option in the Zoom menu enlarges or reduces the picture so that it appears on the screen the same size as when printed out except for slight differ ences However your monitor needs to be set to the respective standard resolution On a 15 inch monitor that would be 640x480 on a 17 inch 800x600 and on a 20 inch 1024x768 pixels To enlarge a picture to fill the screen select Picture Zoom View at Maximum Size The Picture Full Screen option is similar except that it hides everything but the picture The picture appears at the current zoom level on a black background You can quit this mode by clicking or pressing a key 168 Zoom The View as Proportional option opens a dialog wher
157. e for example Christmas 2012 You can assign more pictures later on in the browser You should only embed the profile if you want to use the image with a program that does not take the profile information from the EXIF information or if you are not sure about this point Apply Rename Action allows you to rename the images upon import All of the sets that you saved in the rename dialog are available You can open the rename dialog by Control clicking a preview in the browser or from the Convert dialog see p 35 Process Files with an AppleScript after the Download allows you to process imported pictures automatically with an AppleScript Click Select AppleScript to select a script An example of a situation where this could be useful would be if following a photo shoot you wanted to show your pictures to a customer online and wanted to quickly add a copyright note using a script Make sure you keep unmodified versions of the pictures for example on the memory card 123 Trimming If you want to import pictures into an existing destination folder by means of drag amp drop you need to select the corresponding folder on the card instead of the device on the left hand side It is possible to display the destination folder in another browser win dow and drag the images to be imported into the preview area of that browser This is not possible in the sandbox version of GraphicConverter from the Mac App Store Trimming To trimm
158. e for example v 2 2004 yv 0lJanuar gt 2 03 Mayers von Johanna gt 03 07 Mayers If for example you require folder names without month names and a preceding zero for the month number when further processing in a php environment disable the Lead ing Zeroes and Add month names options Many users find that Leading Spaces looks nicer than the leading zeroes Sort Images into Subfolders Depending on Extension is helpful for example if your camera writes a RAW and a JPG file on every shot GraphicConverter creates a Folder for every format in the destination folder This allows you to also import images from movies separately In the file selection dialog select your picture folder where the year month and day folder is to be created or already exists The pictures will be imported into the day folder according to the creation date If you have renamed a day folder it will no longer be rec ognized during the next import and a new day folder will also be created 122 Importing Pictures from Digital Cameras If you want to copy pictures from several days into a folder we recommend using 03 07 Mayers for example as the name Select the pictures enable the Select Folder and Download Images into Selected Folder option and click Download A file selection dia log opens where you should create the destination folder called 03 07 Mayers New Folder If the pictures contain orientation information in the EXIF infor
159. e last one has December 31 2011 and if there are 363 pictures inbetween one day of the calendar year is entered in each picture in series If individual pictures inbetween contain a date the pictures between the two pictures with a date will be interpolated GraphicConverter calculates the time period in seconds and divides this value by the pictures inbetween The result is calculated into days hours minutes and seconds so that a time in the night may be set for pictures that were taken during the day As you see this is just a helper tool On import of a WMF picture you can select the resolution e During slide show page up and page down key will go to the previous or next picture or video If the slide show is in random mode these keys go to the previous or next picture in normal sort order e Inthe Multiscale Images dialog you can save and open the settings You can find the dialog in the pop up menu of Convert amp Modify With this dialog you can create many variants of a picture in different sizes as for example necessary for web shops 298 New in GraphicConverter 7 6 1 and 7 6 2 Hold the option key to move the right or the upper borderline of a selection with the s left and right or up and down Use the command key to move the left or the lower borderline Hold the shift key to move in steps of five pixels If you want to insert a selection of a certain size with the mouse select the Predefined tab in the dialog of the se
160. e the colors will be displayed incorrectly We there fore recommend the setting Ask if the image has no profile If in doubt ask which pro file should be used with the image and select it in the Assign Color Profile dialog If you are not happy with the colors after a conversion you can repeat the conversion with another Conversion Priority Perceptual is often used Relative Colorimetric also provides very good results In the end a different method works best with each picture therefore you should make comparisons with critical pictures Selection Modifications are often only applied to part of a picture In these cases you need to de fine a selection You can cancel a selection with the Escape key You can select using the lasso one or more selection rectangles selection ellipse or the Magic Pen Use the escape key to deselect Edit Select last Selection will bring back the last selection in the exact place If you click into the selection the content will be moved Click exactly on the borderline of a selection to move the selection frame without the contents The mouse cursor changes to a cross with four arrows If you move the mouse a little further inside of the selection it will change to a double arrow so you can move only one side of the selection 150 Selection You can also click anywhere in the selection while holding down the Command Option and Shift keys to move the frame without content Hold down the Option ke
161. e Compression filter to use the security options Enter the password that will be queried upon opening and select whether printing editing and copying should be allowed with a second password PDF Compression filter JPEG JPEG quality Y 70 Security Protect content Require password to open Password to open ee Password to print edit copy Allow printing M Allow editing Allow copying Cancel o Shadow If your picture contains an alpha channel the shadow will also be inserted there so that it is displayed transparently by programs like Safari Select Picture Alpha Channel Add if your picture does not have an alpha channel yet In the options for export as an HTML catalog you can chose whether the text should be displayed above or below the pictures on the catalog page and on the page with the individual picture LAB profiles are ignored when TIFF images are opened because corrupt profiles normally lead to the pictures being displayed completely black You can disable this under Preferences Open Image Formats TIFF so that the LAB profiles are used again for TIFF pictures 304 New in GraphicConverter 8 5 New in GraphicConverter 8 5 The high resolution Retina displays on MacBooks and other devices are supported 16 bits per channel are supported for grayscale RAW pictures The Effect Channels Frames Only Red Green Blue in same Window function is also available as a batch You ca
162. e Red Green Axis Involution around the red green axis swaps the yellow and violet colors 191 Color Permutations Color Rotation allows you to define your own angle for involution Create an MPO file from two picture files If you have two individual pictures that you want to join to make a 3D picture you can create a file in which the left picture is on the left and the right picture is on the right by using the Concat function in the Convert amp Modify dialog or Effect Concat all Imag es Horizontal Save the picture in a subfolder to keep things tidy You can create the subfolder via the context menu After clicking Go a dialog appears where you should se lect Only Horizontal Ga Concated Objects Mp lt gt te Ga concated On In the second step select Convert and select the format Multi Picture Object 3D mpo which will only be displayed if you select Show All and open the pop up menu again In addition select the Use Batch check box and add the Mark as 3D batch by clicking the plus sign and by double clicking the batch under the 3D section of the dia log that opens or by dragging it into the right hand area Mark as 3D is then available as a batch in the Convert amp Modify dialog The marking is only required internally in Graphic Converter in order to distinguish 3D pictures from nor mal pictures OOA Add Batch Functions Sort By A Z 7 Mark as 3D Ignore Even Pages P
163. e background color Make Square and Frame allow you to add frames to the thumbnails like slides You always leave Sharpen enabled since images lose their sharpness slightly upon reduction 88 Cloud Services You can enter the filename on the File tab Use Index to set the Digits for numbering if you are creating several catalog images In Offset enter the last value created if you are adding a catalog in a further work step Catalog General File Name Katalog jpg Index Digits 3 e Creator 777 Set From Program File Offset oft ji Open Save Cancel _oK Creator allows you to specify which program is used to open the files when they are double clicked in the Finder If a different program was selected in the Finder via the information dialog for the respective file extension it will take priority Cloud Services In the File menu you can open the folders of Google Drive Cloud Drive amazon OneDrive Microsoft was Sky Drive Dropbox und Copy com You need to install the free client software of the regarding service GraphicConverter scanns the user folder for the regarding folder on launch The folders must not be installed or moved to another loca tion Uploading and Downloading Documents The Action pop up menu in the browser toolbar contains the Export Upload File s option that allows you to copy files onto a Web server using the ftp protocol First select the files in
164. e color model at the top left you simply need to push the slider upward to get a dark gray Reset allows you to reset the values and the color to the default settings The result of the Red Eye Pro effect may have faults that you can remove with the stamp Stamp over the line from the outside to the center Set the source point over and over again by Alt clicking the area around the line you want to stamp The result will normally 160 Undo not look so nice at high zoom levels Once you switch back to a normal zoom level though the eye should look good Undo If you are not happy with a change to a picture you can reverse it with Edit Undo The option you used last appears next to Undo for example Undo Paint You can also use this menu item to check which option you used last Edit Redo allows you to reverse the undo action If you want to undo more than 40 steps you have no choice but to reload the last saved version of the picture by selecting File Revert to Saved The current version will then be closed without saving To avoid mistakes GraphicConverter will ask you if you really want to discard the current version RGB and CMYK Pictures cannot only exist in different file formats for example TIFF or GIF but also in dif ferent modes Scanners in the lower price segment normally return pictures in RGB mode made up of the colors Red Green and Blue This mode is ideal for printing out on laser or inkjet printe
165. e in GraphicConverter by double clicking one of the preview pictures For further information see the chapter Browser on page 202 The program Default Folder from www stclairsoft com is a useful enhancement for the file selection dialog as it shows an enlarged preview under the file selection dialog in all programs Use the All available filter to display all files and folders If you select a format from the Filter pop up menu only pictures with this format are displayed The technical document information for the selected picture is displayed below the preview picture The documentation information is shown and hidden together with the preview picture If a picture does not contain a preview you can create one with Create Preview The options in the upper part of the file selection dialog are used for quicker navigation and are part of the Mac OS You will find instructions in the documentation for your com puter or your Mac OS package If you want to open a certain format for example all TIFF pictures in GraphicConverter even if the pictures were created with another program when you double click the files in the finder you can configure this using the information dialog in the finder Click a TIFF picture and press Command to open the information dialog Click the triangle next to Open with Select the current version of GraphicConverter from the pop up menu Click 17 Starting the Program and Opening a Picture the Change
166. e not delete the copied file before pasting Move to Trash moves the selected files to the Mac OS trash GraphicConverter does not have its own trash like iPhoto for example 214 The Browser Duplicate creates a duplicate of the selected file with Copy added to the name Make Aliases creates an alias of the image file in the same folder from where you can then move the alias to another location for example Reveal in Finder shows the selected files in the Finder Edit filename selects the filename of the selected file so that you can change it You can also click the filename to edit it New Folder creates a new folder Fast Preview shows the selected image in a scalable window which is provided by Mac OS X Fast Preview View Item s in slide show launches a slide show of the selected graphics against a black background To exit the slide show click the X button in the controls or press the Escape key For more detailed information see the chapter on slide shows on page 244 Open folder in Convert opens the Convert dialog in which the content of the active folder is displayed in the left hand list Click Label to assign a label to graphics These are operating system labels used to iden tify for example project files by color The label is also written to the XMP metadata so that it can be displayed by Adobe Bridge under other operating systems You can disable this option in the preferences under Browser Edit
167. e of effects first Use Picture Duplicate to create a copy of the picture in a new window so you can try out a few ef fects In this way you will not modify the original and you can always compare the results with the first version Color correction with Color Balance You can use Picture Color Balance to remove a color cast in a picture If for example the picture has a blue color cast drag the lower slider for the Midtones slightly to the left towards yellow Color Balance Shadows Midtones Highlights Ga eee Gee Ge M m Preserve Luminosity 4 M Show Preview Reset Cancel ox If the color cast is reduced drag the slider towards yellow until the picture becomes too yellow Then move it back to find the optimum value In the next step see what happens when you adjust the lower sliders for the Shadows and Highlights If you get positive results in your picture you will usually need to reduce the value of the midtone sliders With some pictures you need to work with another slider for example the upper slider for the balance between cyan and red If the color cast is particularly visible in areas that should actually be white you should start with the corresponding slider in the highlights With some pictures you will not immediately be able to see whether for example they have a green or a blue color cast Therefore be prepared to make corrections when trying settings Take c
168. e order shown in the list until the iPod is full You can drag the folders in the list to change their order Include full resolution photos Copy full resolution versions of your photos into the Photos folder on your iPod which you can access after enabling disk use 1 65 GB 243 Slide show In the Synchronize photos from pop up menu you can select a folder for synchroniz ing with Choose Folder Select your picture folder or a folder with selected pictures Aliases cannot be used All photos copies all photos from the selected folder on the iPod Subfolders appear as albums on the iPod The pop up menu All is only available if you synchronise from iPhoto or Aperture Selected folders allows you to select which subfolders are to be synchronised If you add or rename folders in the Finder or in GraphicConverter you can update the list by clicking Apply at the bottom right of the iTunes window or by switching to another tab and back To sync new pictures on your iPod we recommend adding the picture folder selected in iTunes as a favorite at the bottom left in the GraphicConverter browser Display the required folder in the browser and open the context menu by Ctrl clicking the Favorites area Select Add current folder to favorites Hold down the option key and drag the new photos for your iPod to this folder to create a copy Now start the synchronization in iTunes Click Apply and Sync to copy the selected pictu
169. e text readable that is hard to read Effect Gradient intensity brings out the contours of a picture as colored lines Areas rather turn to white In some cases the effect is suited to make text readable that is hard to read New in GraphicConverter 9 4 With File Auto Convert you can open a dialog in which you first click on the plus sign in the lower left corner and then select a folder that will be watched All files that are copied into that folder will be converted automatically into the selected format and into the folder defined below The files can be deleted automatically after the converstion Additionally a batch can be defined You can define several conversions and activate them with the checkbox to the left as you need them In the Preferences part Browser Display you can select the options Show Number of Subfolder and Number of Files to display the count of subfolders and files contained in a folder behind the name JPX files can contain data streams which contain many JP2 files You can save these JP2 files as single files To do so select Split JPX Data Stream into Single JP2s in Convert amp Modify in the pop up menu Function With Copy Filename to Headline you can copy the file name into the field Headline of the IPTC data The function is available from the context menu and from Action menu in the submenu Metadata EXIF IPTC When exporting a slide show to a movie File Export Slide Show to Movie up
170. e you can enter the required zoom level Change Proportional Size Size 100 Cancel OK You can use View as Non Proportional to display a picture distorted by just chang ing one of the two values for example You can use this function to try out distortion effects The distortion is only saved when you select Picture Size and then Burn In and then save the picture The Zoom Selection option is only available if a selection has been defined and zooms the picture so that the displayed picture section is about as big as the current selection The top left hand part is displayed not the selection area If necessary scroll with the slid ers or move the picture section with the mouse while you hold down the spacebar There are two icons in the window frame to the right of the zoom level depicting a magnification glass with a plus respectively a minus 100 v J QA a Clicking the small mountains switches to the next zoom level down and accordingly clicking the large mountains switches to the next zoom level up You can use the magnifying glass to zoom in two ways Click the magnifying glass in the toolbox you may need to select Window Show Toolbox If you click the picture with the magnifying glass it will be zoomed to the next level up If there is not enough space for the picture on the screen the section of the picture that you clicked will be displayed as centered as possible If for example you wa
171. ease the speed of browsing To export only files containing a word like Tree for example or the file extension jpg you can use the new batch Do Export If Name Contains The command get set file iptc via AppleScript now supports the field contact New in GraphicConverter 8 5 2 In the context menu of the thumbnails under Actions Metadata EXIF IPTC you can use Copy EXIF Tags to IPTC Caption to copy single EXIF content into the IPTC caption In the Preferences part Browser Misc you can select Double click Open Folder in new Browser to display the content of a folder in a new browser window In the Preferences part General Edit select Cursor right left without command for next previous image in folder to be able to go to the next or previous picture in a picture window without command key Directly under this option you find Delete for Delete and next image in folder En able this function if you want to use the delete key without a warning dialog to put 307 New in GraphicConverter 8 5 3 pictures into the trash In the Preferences part General Display Windows select Resize Window after scale zoom to be get the window fit the picture after scale or zoom In the Preferences part General Misc select Recent Documents Clear upon quit ting to delete all entries from the list of recently opened documents upon quitting GraphicConverter When you create a catalog as a picture you can now use Batche
172. ect a zoom level underneath it on the left If the image is not displayed completely you can move the section with the mouse Select the image to be edited from the film strip at the bottom You can scroll the film strip sideways with the scroll wheel on the mouse or an equivalent method Under the image you can rate the image with stars and add labels that will also be displayed in the Finder To the left of the labels you can define filters that for example show only those pictures rated by three or more stars or that have a certain label Once you have finished editing your images select the images and click the Export button at the bottom right A dialog opens to let you select the destination folder the format and a scaling The settings are then applied and the images are saved to the selected folder 101 Color correction with Color Balance If you want to use functions that are not yet available in the Cocooner first end editing in the Concooner and then open the picture with the Apply and Open Copy button Then use the other functions in GraphicConverter and finally save your picture as normal Editing pictures normally Editing is normally worthwhile whether you scan a picture or under Mac OS X import one from a digital camera using File Acquire Download images from connected ca mera In this section we will show you how to scale scan sharpen and your pictures and much more You will often want to try out a sequenc
173. ed images Select the profile file with the file selector Only set this profile file if it belongs to the images as the colors will other wise be displayed incorrectly The Edit File Info IPTC option can be opened directly for example to enter copy right information Only the content of the boxes where the check box has been selected is modified You can therefore use this option to enter yourself as the copyright owner for several pictures at the same time without changing any different keywords for the indi vidual pictures If you select a folder the changes will also be made to all pictures it con tains The URL box is not part of the official IPTC standard and is not supported by all pro grams Therefore it is better to enter your URL in the Copyright box You enter the copy right symbol with Alt G File Info Caption Keywords Categories Credits Origin Copyrigh Copyright Copyright Hagen Henke www elbsand de URL The URL isn t part of the IPTC standard it is a Photoshop extension So the Save and Open buttons wil not save this field This is because the saved file is a normal standardized IPTC NAA record Remove XMP _ Remove EXIF r Save Open _ Cancel ek 232 The Browser The Edit Comment option allows you to enter or modify a comment for JPEG JFIF graphics or for graphics you want to save If the option for creating resource forks is enabled under Preferences Sa
174. ed in a rough preview A grid made up of helper lines will be displayed for easier orientation Select Live Rotation Options from the same submenu to remove the grid or to change the Distance and Color of the lines Live Rotation Options Show Grid Distance 20 pixels Color E Cancel ok Click and drag a vertical line moving the mouse to the left and right until the edge of the house is straight and then let go of the mouse 126 Rotate The houses in the following example are leaning to the left Select Other Value with Line and choose a long vertical house wall Make sure it is as close to the center as possible because lines near the edges of the picture tend to be dis torted by simple lenses and zoom lenses This effect is increased when you take pictures from above or below the subject 8090 _ E Willemstad mit Datum2 tiff RGB The mouse cursor turns into a crosshair with which you click one end of the house edge and then drag to the other end while holding down the mouse button Let go of the mouse button to rotate the picture All angles on the helper line that deviate less than plus or minus 45 from vertical will be aligned vertically All angles that deviate less than plus or minus 45 from horizontal are 127 Rotate aligned horizontally You can therefore also choose a line in the picture that should actu ally be horizontal 50 0 W LaLa W The edges of the picture may need
175. ed to a name that is entered with Change name to The numbering within the filename remains unchanged unless you have enabled one of the other options For example if you enter Berlin in the box after Use name file names such as 001_Funkturm jpg and 002_Funkturm jpg are renamed 001_Berlin jpg and 002_Berlin jpg The source pictures may also have a different name or may have just a number as the name In our example 001 jpg would become 001_Berlin jpg The Start index with option attaches a consecutive index to all the files For example 001 The value for the first picture can be freely selected Specify how large the step to the next index value should be with Step A step size of 10 and a start index of 0 will give you the series 001 010 020 etc Under Create Icon Preview you can specify that an icon and a preview are created Only if one doesn t exist This option saves a lot of time when you convert a number of files Preferences Convert Formats All pictures from a photo CD are converted or copied to a folder that is automatically cre ated and is named after the serial number of the CD with Convert PhotoCD images to folder with CD serial Preferences ier 0 Co eee SP d eai General Open Save Print Slide Show Convert Browser General File Photo CD Images Convert Photo CD images to individual folders All files from a photo CD are converted or copied to automatically created folder and is named after the s
176. eely selectable and not related to transparency GIF Save with C Internal 87a Internal 89a _ Image 1 0 Row order Normal _ Interlaced Cancel ok There is also a dialog with parameters for PNG format behind Options but these are not important for transparency Zoom You can use the Zoom function to display pictures enlarged or reduced on the screen The output size of the picture is not changed by this The window size is adapted to the picture upon zooming if possible This function can be enabled in the Preferences Gen eral Display Windows with Main Window Resize Window after scale zoom You can select the zoom level at the bottom left of the picture frame 100 La Jaj There are various possibilities here You can select the number and overwrite it with the required zoom level You don t have to enter the percentage sign Press Return to com 167 Zoom plete your entry Single clicking the black triangle next to the zoom level opens a pop up menu where you can select zoom levels View at Original Size View at Maximum Size 30 View at Window Size THF View as 5 View as 6 25 View as 8 33 View as 12 5 View as 16 67 View as 25 View as 33 33 View as 50 View as 66 67 View as 85 v View as 100 View as 150 View as 200 View as 300 View as 400 View as 500 View as 1000 View as 2000 View as 5000 View as Proportional View as Non Proportional Zoom In
177. el Yongnuo YN 622 trans ferres the TTL information too Equalizer Equalizer allows you to select the brightness separately for dark mid and light tones Equalizer Darks OO 0 2954545 01227273 Midtones S 0 0 1045455 Highlights eCG e a 0 3136364 M Show Preview Reset Cancel a 108 Cropping for Photo Prints For example reduce the Highlights if you want to darken shiny patches of skin or increase the value for the Darks to make structures in dark areas more visible The only way to work out the best settings is by trial and error Cropping for Photo Prints If you want to order prints from your digital photos you may face the problem that small er digital cameras produce pictures with an aspect ratio of 4 3 Photo paper in 4x6 inch format for example has an aspect ratio of 3 2 If you reduce the digital photo so it fits the photo paper at the top and bottom you will get white edges on the left and right as shown in the picture below Some photo services offer the option of prints with such white edges and in some cases you can order the prints with the upper and lower edge already cut off If you enlarge the digital photo so the photo paper is filled completely part of the image will be cut off at the top and bottom The following picture shows how a photo service would trim the image 109 Cropping for Photo Prints If you decide on this method you may want to position the selec
178. elect a suitable size with Scale Save the picture to paste it into a layout in a program like InDesign for example To paste the QR code in GraphicConverter into another image select everything with Com mand A copy the picture with Command C and paste it into another picture with Com mand V Scale the QR code proportionally by holding down the Command and Shift keys and dragging a corner The Submenu Rotate Mirror Rotate Mirror gt Rotate 90 Clockwise CER Rotate 90 Counterclockwise R Misc gt Rotate 180 X83 Mirror Horizontal Mirror Vertical Rotate Thumbnail 90 Clockwise Rotate Thumbnail 90 Counterclockwise Rotate Mirror opens a submenu with the options for lossless rotating and mirroring Rotate 90 clockwise Rotate 90 counterclockwise and Rotate 180 rotate the image in the respective directions You can rotate counterclockwise by pressing Command R on the keyboard Command Shift R rotates 90 clockwise You can also rotate just the preview with Rotate thumbnail 90 clockwise counterc lockwise This useful for RAW files as they can be opened with GraphicConverter but not saved To freely rotate the image by entering an angle click Other Value in the Picture Rotate submenu after opening the graphic as you usually do Mirror Horizontal mirrors the image on a horizontal axis without any quality loss Mir ror Vertical mirrors the image on a vertical axis without any quality loss From Mac OS
179. elected layer to the top of the sort order Bring Forward moves the selected layer one level up Send Backward moves the selected layer one level down Send to Back moves the selected layer to the bottom Merge Layers makes one layer out of the selected layer and the layer below it Merge Visible makes one layer out of all visible layers Merge All Layers makes one layer out of all layers The Picture menu features the new Brightness with Curve function This function allows you to brighten the highlights less when you brighten a picture so that the picture does not become dull The curve can be defined on the left and in the case of 309 New in GraphicConverter 8 6 our example needs to remain close to the straight diagonal in the lower area and move upwards away from the diagonal line in the upper area You can get a standard curve by clicking Reset Brightness with Curve Brightness Darken Neutral Lighten Source Curve for 50 Result Note Mouse click with option key on a point moves the complete curve in vertical direction Open Save Reset Preview Cancel o e In the Preferences under Browser Thumbnails you can use Filmstrip preview to specify that videos are shown with a filmstrip at the top and bottom in order to distinguish them better from photos e During a slide show you can display and hide the list of files with the Tab key e Inthe browser you can switch to pre
180. em you can click and copy it in the dialog that opens before setting it for another file with Command V Apple Preferred Apple ligs graphic format ART First Publisher program format Supports 1 bit per pixel 276 Supported Formats Format Import Export Comment ARW ASCII Allows you to import and export graphics that contain only ASCII characters b3d 3D format Bio Bio Formats of medical devices and microscopes Glencoe SDK BioRad BioRad file format supports 256 grayscale BLD Mega Paint format BLP Format of games like World of Warcraft If you need to mirror vertically after opening you can select Mirror vertically in Preferences Open Image Formats BLP BMP Standard Windows format supports1 4 8 15 and 24 bit per pixel BPG The format Better Portable Graphics BPG can be imported It offers the modes lossy and loss less and is based on the HEVC format In compa rison to the JPG format the file size is only one third with comparable quality BPG animations can be opened too BSB Format for maps BSP BUF Supports 32 bit BUM Variation of the BMP or PICT format Byte Array Image is converted to C source code e g for Header File H CALS games console developers CCITT 4 compressed black and white graphics CAM Casio QV 10 100 format a variation of the JPEG format CEL CEL format CGM Internationally standardized f
181. emely unsharp copy of the image being cre ated that is used as a mask to compare the original and a version with greatly increased contrast with each other Normal values for Amount are 130 300 and 0 5 1 0 pixels for the Radius You will find further information at http www cambridgeincolour com tutorials local contrast enhancement htm 134 Brightness Contrast Saturation Brightness Contrast Saturation The brightness needs to be adjusted for almost every picture Use the Brightness with Curve function from the Picture menu for this Brightness with Curve Brightness Darken Neutral Lighten Source Curve for 50 Result Note Mouse click with option key on a point moves the complete curve in vertical direction Open Save Reset Preview __ Cancel oK This function allows you to brighten the highlights less when you brighten a picture so that the picture does not become dull The curve can be defined on the left and in the case of our example needs to remain close to the straight diagonal in the lower area and move upwards away from the diagonal line in the upper area You can get a standard curve by clicking Reset 135 Brightness Contrast Saturation Picture Brightness Contrast allows you to set the brightness contrast and hue individually for each channel However we recommend using the Brightness with Curve function more for brightness adjustments see previous para
182. ended if you open very different images If you know that the image is from a digital camera it was accidentally saved without EXIF information and the profile was not incorporated select the sRGB profile as the Source in the pop up menu If you know for sure that the Adobe RGB color space was used for pictures taken with the digital camera select Adobe RGB You will find further information on Adobe RGB further below If you know that the image was scanned in for example and a profile was not added by the scanner software click the Assign no Profile button If your scanner is calibrated select the individual scanner profile If you are working with pictures from the Internet or screenshots and other unprofiled images click the Assign no Profile button You can also assign the profile with Picture Mode CMYK The profile selected for CMYK in Edit Assign Profile will be used If the colors change visibly by the new profile you will see the changes immediately 2 Assign the default profile if the image has no profile If you always have the same work situations you can set the Assign the default profile if the image has no profile option from the pop up menu If an image contains Uncalibrat ed as the EXIF information or another entry that does not correspond with the standard like Adobe RGB for example the profile defined for EXIF uncalibrated will be used Select Choose from the pop up menu to select a different profile The
183. ened pictures to a destination folder The pictures may be opened from different folders In the lower right hand section of the Browser you can select whether to display Files and folders means everything or Files only Photoshop PlugIns are supported that contain more than one Plugin In the Browser in Convert amp Modify and in Slide Show you can sort by EXIF date If you have a GPX log file that is not continous and you have pictures taken in the time where no GPS geo data was recorded you may not wish to add GPS data to these pictures as it would not be exact but roughly calculated In this case select Apply GPX NMEA Data to Selected Images without Interpoation from the Geo menu red symbol If you copied the URL of a picture on a web page via the context menu for example you can open this pictures with File New Image from URL using Clipboard GraphicConverter loads the picture from the internet and displays it in a new window In catalog printing you can define the distance between picture and metadata When saving in Photoshop format EXIF data will now be saved too In the Function pop up menu of Convert amp Modify Copy Flat has been added It allows to automatically rename and copy pictures to a destination folder The name of 314 Neu in GraphicConverter 8 8 the next level higher folder will be added to the pictures file name Additionally the text you enter in the dialog that opens will be added Digits lets you
184. eplaced by the color profiles so the gamma options have been deleted from the PNG options dialog In Preferences part Slide Show General select the option Reload if source folder content changed if files copied to the folder should be considered as soon as possible GraphicConverter gets change notifications with a short delay from the Mac OS and then loads the list again If also not yet reported changes should be considered select Reload even if list is unchanged If you change the IPTC Data of a DNG or NEF File you can save these changes as XMP into the file if there is enough space New in GraphicConverter 9 0 The new features of Mavericks App Nap and Tags are supported see p 13 You can edit images non destructively with the Cocooner see p 100 315 New in GraphicConverter 9 0 2 New in GraphicConverter 9 0 2 In the Cocooner you can now use filters to display only pictures with a certain number of stars or a certain label In the Browser you can sort files by date into subfolders The files get moved The subfolders are created automatically What is new is the possibility to sort the files into subfolders that have the date as name with the pattern YYYYMMDD You can find the function in the context menu of the browser when you right click into the section of the previews Actions Sort file s into subfolders Date YYYYMMDD flat at which flat means no further higher or subordinated folders are created The functio
185. epth Later versions of GraphicConverter shall support 16 bit also for PNG and Photoshop format PSD The higher the color depth the more colors can be differed Especially structures look more realistic and jaggies in color gradients can be avoided virtuelly completely The sec ond advantage is that image manipulations like especially brightness contrast and satu ration work much better You can correct too bright or too dark pictures without seeing bright parts becoming too bright or dark parts becoming too dark When brightening a picture noise can increase considerably It pays to keep the 16 bit per channel when a picture still has to be optimized If it is only intended for print or monitor display you can reduce file size considerably by changing to 32 bit mode under Picture Colors This is because graphics cards monitors and print ers except for high end professional devices only support 8 bit per channel Normal off set printers also support a maximum of 8 bit per channel 173 Colors Mode and Colorize 1 bit as an effect Color or grayscale pictures can be converted into pictures with a color depth of one bit This technique is worthwhile when you want to create an effect Always view 1 bit pictures with a zoom level of 100 if you want to judge the quality as all other zoom levels hide the results too greatly This applies in particular for zoom levels under 100 Effect Black amp White Threshold allows you to conve
186. er of Pins to 100 makes sense if more than 100 pictures are selected in the Browser as otherwise the presentation shown on the map would be confusing Radius defines the visible map section Default Location for Images without GPS Data defines a position used by the func tion Add or Edit GPS Values as the starting value 264 DRIMaker instead of HDR Tips You can use your iPhone 3G or newer as a GPS tracker with the Trails App from the iTunes App Store The recorded GPX file can be sent to your home computer from Trails by e mail and imported into GraphicConverter If your pictures already contain GPS data you can export it with Create KML files for selection so you can edit them in other programs The KML files are saved in the picture folder Double clicking a KML file in the Finder opens the position in Google Earth for example Further use is processing in scientific GIS programs that can for example indi cate where a power line crosses a river You will find more information at www wikipe dia com or en giswiki org Links to topic of GPS and Geo Tagging These Web sites can convert GPS files http gpsvisualizer com gpsbabel and gpsies com GPS tracks for example for cyclists and hikers or distant countries can be obtained for a fee in some case at addresses like www tracegps com magnalox net www gps tour info and tracks4africa com DRIMaker instead of HDR If one part of a photograph is considerably lighter than
187. er of the window frame sizer The size of the large preview in the right section depends on the image itself and the width of the section After you change the width of the section the image automatically adjusts to the new size The filename size and date are displayed below each image Click a picture to select it and then click the name to edit it You can use all characters from the Unicode standard Unicode is a standard that allows a large number of characters in a font End the entry with Return or by clicking another picture Click a graphic to open a large preview in the right section The size of the preview depends on the width of the right column Detailed graphic information is displayed below the preview Switch to the other images using the s Click the right to jump from the last image of one row to the first image of the next You can cancel a selection with Escape If there is no preview for a picture in the graphic file it will be automatically created If this does not occur you can create a preview in the context menu E D f Open With Finder Open With b Reveal in Finder Edit Filename Move to Trash Duplicate Make Alias Export Metadata EXIF IPTC Date v vv Vv Move Folders Vv Rotate Mirror Misc gt Create Preview Remove Resource Fork Add Image as Folder Icon Change FileType and or Creator Rename Insert Profile Edit File Info IPTC Edit Comment XSI
188. er the preview pic tures The Thumbnails Generation can be Fast with poorer quality or High Quality 233 The Browser If you are working with very large files you may need to set a higher value for the Skip Files Larger than 30 MB option so that thumbnails are automatically created If you disable Ignore Previews in Resource Fork the thumbnails from the resource fork will be used which can lead to poorer quality thumbnails Enable On Error Create message log if you want error messages and other notifica tions from GraphicConverter to be displayed in the Mac OS console Log files are not cre ated on the desktop like in older versions of GraphicConverter Enable Original File Date Keep after modifying of metadata if the document date should also be updated when metadata is modified This can be useful if you want to rec ognise from the file date whether a file has been modified at a certain time If you have created several iPhoto libraries you can select a different library with iPhoto Library Use an alternative Browser Cache Browser gm TIFF ae CAN Sige tbe ja s General Open Save Print Slide Show Convert Browser Poor Search General Display Memory usage for thumbnail generation Preview Smaller oe Larger Thumbnails i i i Edit M Save cached thumbnails on disk Misc Maximum size on disk 200 MB Clear cache Restore to Defaults Last Values Cancel OK You should only reduce the Cache Size if you h
189. er via the context menu To do this click the folder not the pictures Graphics that are larger than the main screen are displayed proportionally smaller in size You can zoom into and out of a picture with Alt scroll wheel or from Mac OS 10 6 by moving two fingers up and down on the trackpad or on the Apple Magic Mouse The position under the mouse cursor is centered as far as possible The Mac OS energy saving option and screensaver are disabled during the slide show In the file selection dialog or in the browser clicking and holding the slide show icon allows you to specify whether the pictures should be displayed in the normal order orina random order If during a slide show in random order you see a picture that is part of a series of similar pictures which you want to show together you can switch to the normal sort method 245 Slide show with the Page Up Down or arrow up down keys and show the subsequent or preced ing pictures The name of the graphic is shown in the top left of the screen during the slide show Hier war falsch bersetzt To display the filename make the appropriate setting under Preferences Es geht aber ums switch off The display of filenames can be disabled in the Preferences under Slide Show General In the Preferences under Slide Show Meta data you can choose which metadata should be displayed under the picture during the slide show The filename also belongs to the metadata If you prefer
190. erial number of the CD folder Convert Text IPTC PhotoShop Files Separate layers for PhotoShop files se layer name for filename Add background layer Photo Raw Files l Add white correction for 16 bit Photo Raw files PDF Files Combine PDF deletes originals after PDF creation Restore to Defaults y Last Values Cancel GOK Separate layers of Photoshop files allows you to open Photoshop pictures that con tain several levels with separate pictures Add background layer inserts the background layer of the Photoshop picture in each picture created Use layer name for file sets the document name to the name of the corresponding layer 48 Automatic Conversion Use the PDF Files Combine PDF deletes originals after PDF creation option with care as the combined file could be corrupt Only use this option if you have saved the original files in another location Automatic Conversion If you want to convert all pictures copied to a folder automatically you can use the Auto matic Conversion This is handy in the everyday work of editing when photographs and authors deliver pictures in different formats and color modes Select File Automatic Conversion to open the following dialog eee Auto Convert Active presets listed below will run in background Active Description Xv View Log 49 Automatic Conversion Click the plus sign in the lower left hand section to create a conversion A dialog opens in
191. eries of normal let ters and numbers should be used for all other characters Different standards have estab lished themselves here and are not compatible with each other Luckily you do not usually have to worry about this with modern e mail software as the programs rectify the problem Drag and drop your picture files into the e mail window or use the option for adding attachments If your e mail program does not automatically decode the pictures you receive Graph icConverter can still open it as long as it is encoded using one of the following standards Mac Binary Mime UUencode yEND or Binhex HQX If a Mime file contains several images GraphicConverter will save these files in a temporary folder and show them in a new browser window Move or copy the files to a normal folder if you want to save the images permanently Pictures for your mobile phone Use iTunes to copy pictures to your iPhone One simple possibility is to select a folder in iTunes whose content is synchronized automatically You can define this folder in GraphicConverter as a favorite using the context menu at the left hand lower side of the browser window Copy new pictures into this folder by dragging the files into the folder while holding the Alt key If you create subfolders in this folder the subfolders will appear as albums on your iPhone Other mobile phones If you want to copy images onto your mobile phone so you can look at them and show them to frien
192. ern 21 44 v F Mssony 23 Mai 2005 22 12 1 von 25 ausgewahit 20 7 MB verf gbar To transfer a picture from a mobile phone with Bluetooth select it in the phone and send it using the option for sending via Bluetooth Activate the Bluebooth option on your Bluetooth compatible Mac In a Sony Ericsson S7001 you select More Send Via Blue tooth After a security query the message that a picture is being received will then appear in the Finder The picture will be saved in your document folder 09800 Incoming File Transfer amp 700i File Name Transferring IMG_5858 jpg Status 17 7 KB of 150 8 KB Time Remaining 20 seconds at 6 KB s E Cancel 74 Pictures for your mobile phone The aspect ratio of images being transferred to the phone should correspond with the display aspect ratio as much as possible You may have to trim the image Enter the size of the phone picture in the dialog for the aspect ratio On the 700I it is 1280 x 960 Ration 1 x 1960 Ration 2 2 x ao Ration 3 x 126 Ration 4 400 x 390 Open a picture from your hard drive which you took with a digital reflex camera for example Select a section with the selection tool and crop it by double clicking inside the rectangle or by pressing Return Now reduce the picture to 1280 x 960 with Picture Size by entering one of the values The other value will be calculated automatically if Keep Proportions is enabled If
193. es The left and right picture can now be swapped in 3D pictures with a batch Other pro grams sometimes confuse the pictures File New Image opens a dialog in which you select the size of the picture New in this dialog is the possibility to select standard formats like letter from the popup menu Preset With File Merge Folder into One Image you can overlay the pictures of a folder New are the methods Min And Or and XOR When you enter a certain file size for JPG pictures so the quality is reduced to reach the file size this quality was set for normal saving of an opened picture New is that the quality from the batch is not used for normally opened pictures In Convert amp Modify you can scale PDF files losslesly for example from DIN A4 to DIN A5 with Function Scale PDF In Multiscale new options for scaling and buttons for format options have been added In the IPTC dialog you can select the tabs with command 1 7 In the Browser you can display pictures with or without geo data only so you can see quickly which pictures contain geo data Select the appropriate option in the popup menu Show 330 Index A Add Alpha Mask Channel 198 Add Remove Margins 116 Add XMP file 42 Add XMP record 43 Adobe Bridge 215 allowing search engines to find your site 86 alpha channels 196 Amiga formats 5 Anti alias 196 202 AppleScript 268 attachments e mails 72 Auto Levels 170 automatic color correction 137
194. es on a Web site the color profiles serve the correct display of colors and conversion to mostly smaller color spaces with minimum losses like for example the CMYK color space of offset printers Color profiles also correct the weaknesses of some devices how ever 148 Color Management with Profiles and ColorSync If for example a scanner displays the red tones too faintly this can be measured by scanning a color proof with a color chart and corrected with a color profile An IT8 target is used as the chart The special software is already included in the Silverfast Ai Studio 8 scanning program http www silverfast com highlights autoit8 en html In our example a scanner profile will increase or change the red hues and all other hues that have been altered accordingly The result is a corrected picture You need to attach the scanner profile to the scanned picture by selecting it via the Source pop up menu while the picture is open Some scanning programs attach the profile automatically The profile will not need to be assigned manually in this case There are also differences in the way various monitors display colors Color hues that are not displayed correctly can also be corrected with a profile A simple monitor profile can be created under Mac OS X in the Monitors section of the System Preferences Monitor profiles only become usable if you connect a color analyzer to your monitor and create the profile using the special soft
195. es with single color areas it can be worthwhile replacing one color with another You can define a Search Color and a Replace Color by selecting Edit Find compare and replace Find and Replace Colors Position the dialog next to the picture and click the part of the picture containing the search or replace color using the eyedropper cursor Find and Replace Tolerance ol Search Color I Replace Color Si Cancel PM Replace A bold frame indicates the color you are selecting Click the color box to switch between the Search color and Replace color The colors can also be selected by clicking the example field and using the Color Picker For palette pictures use the color table that is displayed at the bottom of the dialog Tolerance is used to specify how far the found color may deviate from the selected search color The greater the value the more hues are recognized In normal photos you can also create effects using this option that are similar to solari sation As a Search Color select a skin color from somebody s face and use a pastel color as the Replace Color 179 Invert If you want to swap two specific colors for each other select Picture Colors and then Swap Colors from the submenu Invert You can use Picture Invert Normal to invert the colors or grays in a picture to negative or from negative to positive Use this function to convert scanned negatives into normal pictures or as an effect
196. et the text item delimiters of AppleScript to display dialog GraphicConverter has encountered an error amp return amp errMsg amp return amp Error number amp errNbr buttons OK default button 1 with icon stop end doError Events Antworten ZET F Beschreibung You can download these scripts from our Website http www lemkesoft de en products graphicconverter scripts 270 Automator Automator Automator is a program which is preinstalled in Mac OS 10 4 or newer You can automate your work flow with Automator The programming is easier than with AppleScript Au tomator batches of GraphicConverter are available as long as GraphicConverter is in stalled in the Programs folder e00 Untitled Workflow Edited E Hide Library Media Step ETT variables Q name Contrast Hue Saturation 9 w lj Library amp Choose from List 8 Calendar amp Color Blindness SEEN W Contacts Color Blindness Comes Developer I Combine PDF Pages Hue I amp i Files amp Folders J Combine Text Files Snee Fonts T Compress Ima PDF Documents internet Connect to Servers Results Options Description E Mail amp B Contrast Hue Saturation Movies Contrast Hue Saturation Convert into JPEG Music X Convert CSV to SQL PDFs Convert into JPEG 7 i Photos Z Convert into JPEG Quality Presentations Convert into JPEG E system X Convert
197. ete The contents of a selection are deleted by being overwritten with the current background color Return Initiates the Trim selection option if a selection is defined Help or Info Displays the picture information Fl Undo F2 Crop F3 Copy F4 Paste 275 Supported Formats Supported Formats Format Import Export Comment A22 The format 422 is created by Magic Lantern can be opened It is a RAW format Magic Lantern replaces the firmware of some Canon DSLR cameras to add some functions We assume no liability for using Magic Lantern http www magiclantern fm D 320x200 pixel for 1 bit 8BIM Old Photoshop 2 0 format Supports 1 8 and 24 bit per pixel AAI abr Acorn Sprite Contains sprites from Acorn computers AFP Variation of the TIFF format for 1 bit graphics windows cursor ANI ALIAS Alias Pix Format Supports 256 grayscale or 24 bit AMBER ARR Used by microscopes Supports 256 grayscale AMC Analyze Format from medical technology that is made up of two files hdr contains the header and img contains the image data ANI NeoChrome program animations animated ANPA Format with IPTC information APNG Animated PNG file Mac OS 10 10 and iOS 8 0 support APNG Like the PNG format it allows up to 16 bit per channel and alpha channels Apple File Icon These files only contain the file icon By pressing Command l in the operating syst
198. eview you can zoom in or out with the zoom gesture or the scroll wheel and move the section You can go to the next or previous picture with the arrow keys left and right End the full screen preview with the space key or Escape With Use Transition you can disable the effects Disable Browser Display Show Only Files instead of Files and Folders to see the files only 322 New in GraphicConverter 9 5 You can scale pictures with a new batch to HD or UHD size In the batch Insert Text you can now use Shadow and Stroke as effects for text For pictures without GPS data you can enter values in Preferences General Map These values will be used by the function GPS Add or Edit GPS Values New in GraphicConverter 9 5 You can create a QR code with File New New QR Code Select a suitable size with Scale Save the picture to paste it into a layout in a program like InDesign for example To paste the QR code in GraphicConverter into another image select everything with Command A copy the picture with Command C and paste it into another picture with Command V Scale the QR code proportionally by holding down the Command and Shift keys and dragging a corner From Mac OS 10 10 GraphicConverter can recognize QR codes contained in images This is helpful if for example you take a photo of children at a kindergarten and want to sort the pictures on your Mac into the corresponding folders Before each series take a photo of the c
199. ew seconds for each picture when the picture files are 30 or 80MB for example In the Preferences under Browser General you can specify how much RAM should be used for caching with Memory usage for thumbnail generation This cache is deleted each time GraphicConverter is closed Save cached thumbnails on disk allows you to save the cached thumbnails in a database so that they are available when you open GraphicConverter again The database is stored in the user folder under the path Application Support GraphicConverter Cache If you modify the size of the thumbnails with the slider the thumbnails will need to be generated and cached again You can select the maximum size of the database Once this value has been reached the oldest thumbnails will be deleted and will need to be regenerated when the pictures are displayed again 302 New in GraphicConverter 8 3 2 New in GraphicConverter 8 3 The web service www locr com is supported You can open an account free of charge at locr and log on with your password in GraphicConverter via Window Accounts Then you can display pictures uploaded to locr in the GraphicConverter browser From Mac OS 10 7 4 the Shared menu is displayed at the top right of the document window and at the top of the browser allowing you to directly upload pictures to online services like Flickr Google Lockr or other web servers If several monitors are connected to your computer you can choose under General
200. ey will be automatically changed to a standard resolution of 72 dpi Action opens a menu with may other fuctions described below 209 The Browser At the bottom of the window frame there are a number of options available on a tool bar On the far left of the toolbar you can select the size of the small previews You can use Show to select a file format so that only files of that type are displayed a wer aa Show All available gt Sort Click Sort to select criteria such as Name creation date modification date and size for the middle section If you select By Label amp Name the pictures will be sorted accord ing to your label Sorting is carried out according to name among the pictures with the same label Also By Extension amp Name sorts the files according to extension and accord ing to name among the files with the same extension Select By Rating and Name if you have evaluated your images with 1 5 stars and want to sort them accordingly By Rating and Creation Date Modification Date sorts pictures with the same rating according to the creation date or modification date In the lower section of the pop up menu you can define a filter Select Rating 2 or bet ter to hide all pictures rated with just one star or no stars at all If you only want to see the pictures with 5 stars select By Rating and Name as the sort method instead and the pic tures with 5 stars will be sorted at the start of the list To switch the
201. f a picture contains EXIF data the camera icon will be displayed in the browser over the thumbnail for PSD and webp files too If a Tiff file was written from an Adobe program it is possible the alpha channel was written into the image resource block instead into the standard place These files can now be opened correctly In Preferences General Edit you can select Allow Space in addition to Semicolon to seperate lists when editing IPTC keywords This eases the editing In the picture files every keyword has it s own field so the seperators are only for editing In Convert amp Modify filters are now used for subfolders too GraphicConverter can determine the approximate value of the JPG quality chosen when the picture was saved This value is displayed in the information palette In the format options of the JPG format you can select Set default quality to source file 327 New in GraphicConverter 9 7 quality if possible This option prevents images increasing in file size after saving Open the format options with a click on the button Options in the file selector when Saving as The formats FITS IPLab DM3 and SMV can be opened with 16 bit grayscales New in GraphicConverter 9 7 In the Preferences tab Finder Integration you can select elements that show in the Finder s context menu These include Folder Batches and a number of given functions like Display in Browser EXIF Editor In the contextmenu over the thumbnai
202. f the selected layer and the layer below it Merge Visible makes one layer out of all visible layers Merge All Layers makes one layer out of all layers In the Layers menu the following features are available New Layer creates a new layer New Layer from Selection creates a new layer containing the current selection This is useful if for example you have selected a vase to use it on another layer Duplicate Layer creates a new identical layer Delete Layer deletes the selected layer Hide Layer makes the layer invisible as does clicking the eye symbol Crop Layers to Canvas is useful if a layer has become larger than the other layers for ex ample due to scaling Bring to Front moves the selected layer to the top of the sort order Bring Forward moves the selected layer one level up Send Backward moves the selected layer one level down Send to Back moves the selected layer to the bottom Merge Layers makes one layer out of the selected layer and the layer below it Merge Visible makes one layer out of all visible layers Merge All Layers makes one layer out of all layers Text in Pictures Click a picture with the text tool from the toolbox Window Toolbox and a rectangular text object that you can write in will appear If the font is too small you can select the font size font and different styles like in a word processor Select the required text part and for example modify the font size in the text palette that
203. ferences under Slide Show Misc the Screen Mode Convert 3D to 1080p frame packing for display option can be used to display 3D pictures that contain picture parts placed next to each other for example in three dimensions on certain 3D beamers The two images contained are placed on top of each other Your Mac s 300 New in GraphicConverter 7 6 1 and 7 6 2 graphics card should be forced to use a resolution of 1920 x 2205 with the program Switchres www madrau com The format has the width of full HD and double the height plus 45 pixels for an intermediate bar because the two pictures are on top of each other The 3D beamer recognizes the format and turns it into a 3D picture Effect 3D Convert to 1080p Frame Packing allows you to convert 3D images into the Packing format Effect 3D Swap left and right Image allows you to swap the images in 3D pictures Use this function if 3D pictures are not displayed correctly Effect 3D Convert to 1080p Interleaved allows you to convert 3D pictures into Interleaved or Interleaved 1080p as some beamers and monitors require this With Concat in the Convert and Modify dialog you can define how images are arranged Concat Horizontal amp Vertical first image defines part size Images per Row 10 Images per Column 5i M Line Order Only Horizontal C Only Vertical Cancel GOK In the slide show you can zoom in and out with the plus and minus keys In the Print
204. files can be created if you drag an image from a program onto the desktop You can import comma separated keyword lists from a file via the keyword palette Click the gear at the bottom of the palette and select Open Some older StartupScreen variants can be imported Entry fields were added to many dialogs to enter and display the value of the regarding slider File Slide Show with Find allows a slide show of all pictures matching search 305 New in GraphicConverter 8 5 1 criteria defined in the dialog opening 60 0 Slide Show with Find Where Hagen Henkes MacPro z Name Contains File Format All Available g labels E ADEE BS aL Show Slides _ Randomly In sequence Start with File 1 Sort Files By Name rs Order Ascending Cancel OK New in GraphicConverter 8 5 1 e The hcp format can be imported It is a screen shot format of windows computers In Preferences Convert General you can select Don t copy if destination exists so only those files will be converted that do not exist in the destination folder This makes sense if after a conversion you copy additional files to the source folder and do not want to find them in the list In this case select all files and start the conversion again with this option on GraphicConverter will now compare the file listes and convert only thoste files that have not been converted before Ifyou want to show the origianl
205. ft graphicconverter9 plist is corrupt You can check this by dragging the preferences document to the desktop so that GraphicConverter can no longer access the document To move the preferences do cument open the Help menu and select Show GraphicConverter Preferences with Finder The Preferences folder is then opened in the Finder Now exit GraphicConverter and drag the preferences document to the desktop Restart GraphicConverter Check whether the problems persist If the problem has been solved you can delete the preferences document on the desktop You will need to select your preferences in GraphicConverter again If the problem is still there exit GraphicConverter and overwrite the automatically rec reated preferences document with the old one from the desktop and contact our support via e mail support lemkesoft com Alternatively you can delete the preferences document with the programm Graphic Converter First Aid which you can download from our website If you are Using Mac OS 10 9 x Mavericks or newer Mac OS 10 9 or newer caches the preferences data so you should not delete the prefer ences file You would have to delete the cache via the Terminal too Instead please use the additional program GraphicConverter First Aid app you can download from our web site free It will delete the preferences file and the cache Image displayed black If an image is displayed black this is normally due to a broken color
206. ge All button to apply the setting to all files of the selected type Open With Finder Open With gt Reveal in Finder Edit Filename Move to Trash Duplicate Make Alias Export I gt Metadata EXIF IPTC k Date G Move Folders b Rotate Mirror b Misc d Open With shows a program like for example Photoshop in the submenu which you selected in the Browser Misc section of the preferences This option allows you to open images from the browser directly with the selected program Reveal in Finder shows the selected files in the Finder Edit filename selects the filename of the selected file so that you can change it You can also click the filename to edit it Move to Trash allows you to recover files until you empty the Trash Duplicate creates a duplicate of the selected file with Copy added to the name Make Alias creates an alias in the same folder with Alias added to the name 218 The Browser The Submenu Export Open With Finder Open With gt Reveal in Finder Edit Filename Move to Trash Duplicate Make Alias Crop for Photo Service DCF Compatible File System Metadata EXIF IPTC E Mail File s as Attachment Date iDVD Slideshow iDVD with Merged Color Profile Slideshow Toast Disclabel IPTC JAlbum Prepare for Picture Frame Device Upload File s v Move Folders Rotate Mirror viv iv ivy Misc Crop for Photo Service opens a dialog where
207. ge Ratio allows you to select the aspect ratio again If you also want to crop the picture on the left and right edges click one of the corners of the selection rectangle The aspect ratio will not change You can switch the selection rectangle from landscape to portrait format for example by clicking the top right hand corner and dragging it to the left without moving downwards The size of the rectangle is shown in pixels next to the corner A high quality 4x6 inch sized print requires at least 1200 pixels For normal quality you will need 800 pixels If you have a portrait picture take these values for the height When the selection rectangle has been reduced in size you can move it in any direction over the picture You can send the pictures saved in the Cropped Images folder to your Photo Service via the Internet or on a CD If the photolab offers you the option of white edges or trim ming it will not matter what you decide in most cases as their machines will recognize the aspect ratio of your pictures The images will be positioned correctly so they fill the photo paper If in doubt you can call the photo service hotline 112 Picture Size Picture Size The picture size can be displayed and changed using Picture Size Scale You can set the picture size very accurately in pixels in the top section of the Scale dialog You can also make the setting using a percentage value Scale Dimensions Width 100 00
208. ger PNG Files 79 Photo Albums on the Internet Catalog Set the quality of preview pictures with Set JPEG Quality The higher the quality the larger the file Specify the settings for PNG format pictures with Set PNG Quality Image file format allows you to set the format of the linked large images You can leave JPG GIF PNG or TIF depending on source enabled if for example the source images are in TIF format and you want to put the large pictures online in TIF format Select Always JPG if the source images are in a different format to JPG format and if the large images should be cre ated in JPG format You can also incorporate QuickTime movies in a catalog These movies can be played on the Web site The format of movies is not changed Select which creator should be entered for the HTML file with Creator If you select Macromedia Dreamweaver as the creator for example the created files will be opened directly in Dreamweaver for editing when you double click them You can select a pro gram file for example Dreamweaver by clicking Set from program file GraphicCon verter exports the creator and sets it for the HTML files to be created Several Internet pages are created if all the pictures do not fit on one page The file names are then always numbered except for the first denmark html denmark2 html etc The first file contains no number so you can create a standard index file index html Click the General t
209. get directory Select the format you require for the conversion under Destination Format Start the multiple conversion by clicking Go WWW Ready saves the files without a resource This is useful if they are to be published on the Web If you select a file format in the Show pop up menu only pictures with this format are displayed All files are only displayed when you select All Available Different settings for example compression can be made for each target format using Options In the Function pop up menu you can choose further functions Convert CRW to 48 Bit PSD file converts CRW images into 48 Bit Photoshop files CRW is the RAW format of some Canon Cameras Copy copies the source data into the destination directory without changes You can for example use this option to create back ups before performing a multiple conversion Catalog HTML for WWW usage is explained in detail in the chapter Photo Albums on the Internet from page 78 You can put pictures on the Internet as a download album with a few mouse clicks using the Catalog option Alternatively you can create and print catalogs with File Catalog Print see page 95 Overview pictures are created with Catalog selected destination format i e sev eral catalog pictures are obtained that have small previews and the names of the selected pictures in the selection list on the left The format selected at the bottom right of the dia log is use
210. gew hlt gt called upon drag and drop on open folderItem tell application GraphicConverter 9 activate slideshow folderitem end tell end open Events Antworten ZET Beschreibung gt 269 AppleScript Another example is converting of a picture file to the JPG format e00 Convert to JPGs scpt property destFidr called on normal run on run set inFiles to choose file with prompt Choose a source file as ist open inFiles end run called on drag and drop on open inFiles try set destFidr to choose folder with prompt Choose a destination folder as text set the text item delimiters of AppleScript to tell application Finder repeat with afile in inFiles if kind of aFile is not Folder then set theFile to aFile as string set theName to the name of file aFile set theName to text item 1 of theName amp jpg tell me to convertit theFile theName end if end repeat end tell tell application GraphicConverter 9 to quit set the text item delimiters of AppleScript to on error errMsg number errNbr doError errMsg errNbr end try end open convert the file to a JPG on convertIt theFile theName try tell application GraphicConverter 9 activate open alias theFile save window 1 in destFidr amp theName as JPEG close window 1 end tell on error errMsg number errNbr doError errMsg errNbr end try end convertit on doError errMsg errNbr s
211. gital photo with 12 megapixels and a width of 4170 pixels contains a value of 72 dpi this image would be printed with a width of approx 23 cm 4170 72 57 9 inches approx 23 cm Set the DPI value to for example 300 dpi with Picture Resolution or with a corresponding batch to reduce the printing size to approx 5 5 cm 98 Print Folder Arrange Pictures with Fixed Number allows you to set the number of pictures per line Horizontal and column Vertical The size of the pictures is adjusted to this number accordingly Arrange Pictures with Fixed Size prints all landscape format pictures in the same size Portrait format pictures are scaled to the height of the landscape format pictures Several pages are printed accordingly if all the pictures do not fit on one page During the calculation of the pages to be printed GraphicConverter shows which page is being created In some cases large amounts of data need to be stored temporarily on the hard disk for the print out These temporary files are automatically deleted after printing If your hard drive does not have enough space in the Preferences under General Memory you can select another path for the Temporary Folder that should if possible be located on another harddrive Click the pop up menu and select the path with Choose Preferences mn es Clipboard Display Content Undo Options Display Windows M Allow undo Edit M Use for Selection External
212. graph Brightness Contrast Hue Picture Before After Zoom Brightness Red Contrast Red Hue Red ee ol e Je m olls Brightness Green Contrast Green Hue Green pe o ee o je oll Brightness Blue i Contrast Blue Hue Blue olle a yn 9 e peen olls Y f oa wit ot Saturation RT Ol M Link Sliders M Show Details m Full Screen Preview Reset Last Values Cancel_ ok Unless you want to correct individual colors select the Link Sliders option This links each set of three sliders for brightness contrast and hue When you move one of them the other two will move as well In this way you can adjust the contrast of all three primary colors at the same time A reduced version of the dialog is available under Picture Simple Brightness Contrast for use with small monitors You can also fine tune the sliders in other dialogs using the left and right s once you position the mouse cursor somewhere over the slider You can move the sliders in steps of 5 with the up and down s Simple Brightness Contrast Brightness Contrast Saturation d eee o Rj qq olls e ols _ Show Details M Full Screen Preview Reset Cancel ax Show Details The left hand picture window shows the whole picture with the selection rectangle The center picture window shows the section selected with the rectangle enlarged The zoom level can be infinitely adjusted with the slider underneath The right hand p
213. he bottom of the toolbox using the None pop up menu For more details see page 150 Elliptic Selection allows you to make an elliptic selection for example around the pupil of an eye if want to use the Effect Red Eye option Holding down the shift key at the same time creates a circular selection For more details see page 150 The Magic Pen creates a selection that encloses all neighboring picture sections with the same color as the pixel you clicked The tolerance normally has to be set to a value around 60 as seemingly even color areas in photos also have different color values Dou ble click the magic pen to change the tolerance For more details see page 156 If you click a picture with the Transparency tool the color of the pixel you click will be set to transparent Neighboring pixels with the same color will also be set to transparent For more details see page 166 The Pen and the Brush allow you to draw a line or an arrow or a stroke of brush with a thickness set in the palette you can open with a double click on the tool The current fore ground color is used for the color The Eraser deletes parts of the picture The current background color is always set Click the Text tool to insert text in a picture Click the image A text box is added and you can start entering the text see p 200 You can draw lines with Line Select the color with the foreground color and the line thickness further down in the toolbox using Pen S
214. he file selection dialog a dialog appears where you can select the receiving device The data will be transferred after you click Send Select Bluetooth Device Select a device to send file 2009 10 14 _20 10 17_IMG_3340 jpq to If your device is not found make sure it is discoverable Bluetooth Devices Name Type Hagen Henkes iPhone Found 0 device s M Remember this device Cancel Send i When a Bluetooth icon does not appear in the menu bar you can set this under System Preferences Bluetooth On the Sony Ericsson S700i you will find the pictures in the File Manager section and can display them from there Slices On the Internet pictures can contain several links Rectangular picture sections that are assigned a link can be defined with the slice tool from the toolbox Window Toolbox Draw a rectangle over the corresponding picture sections with the slice tool The rectan 76 Slices gle can be moved with the mouse and the size adjusted with the handles To enter a link Control click the required slice to open the context menu and select Edit Slice URL Cem aka Cie 6 F As soon as you select the slice tool the slice palette opens allowing you to enter the URL and optionally a Name X Slice DEUE is Delete All Delete The address can be short for example http www heidelberg com or long It is easiest to enter long addresses using the clipboard Delete dele
215. he original This rule does not apply to unfocussed pictures If the photo graph is blurred sharpen it as much as possible You will rarely need to sharpen pictures by 200 or higher The Before After display helps you find the best sharpening value 132 Unsharp Mask and Sharpen Edges The After window shows the effect of the current setting In the Picture window you can change the picture section displayed in the Before After windows Sharpen Edges Picture Before Sharpen ye 57s I 1 Method Normal Diagonal Hint Usual is a value of 15 for diagonal and 90 for normal M Show Details M Full Screen Preview Cancel ra The Diagonal option provides an alternative sharpening method that sometimes has better results than the Normal option Higher values for diagonal sharpening can often cause a distancing effect This can be used as a stylization filter 133 Enhance Local Contrast Enhance Local Contrast Effect Enhance Local Contrast allows you to increase the contrast of suitable pictures without the contrast becoming too harsh A dialog where you can enter the values for the radius and the value opens Enhance Local Contrast Picture Before After Radius hare Rit a ee an aera 0 50 pixels Amount ns a Ifa i i i i i 317 29 5 M Show Details M Full Screen Preview Cancel ox The basic technique here involves an extr
216. he originals into a subfolder before editing and then overwriting the files in the parent folder It is worthwhile keeping the originals as even if you are experienced you may occasionally increase the contrast and saturation etc too much In such cases it is best if you open the original and save it in the parent folder after editing it again The function Delete amp Next permanently deletes the file without moving it to the trash does not move the picture to the trash but instead permanently deletes it 140 Color Correction Color Correction Picture Curves allows you to correct the colors and contrast of an image Curves Channel All Open Save Reset M Preview Note Mouse click with option key on a point moves the complete curve in vertical direction conei oy The following example picture has a blue cast eoa Jona Blaustich jpg RGB Z 141 Color Management with Profiles and ColorSync In the pop up menu select the curve for blue click the center and drag the center to the right slightly down towards the lower right corner Select the curve for green and also reduce the green level slightly The result looks warmer and more realistic W Jona Blaustich jpg RGB Save Reset Preview Mouse click with option key on a point moves the complete curve in vertical direction Cones GOK If you select All you can set the contrast of the image Add further points to
217. he save option in the context menu Windows users can access this option by right clicking Downloaded pictures can be printed using the GraphicConverter print option and many other programs Make sure the image filenames do not contain any special characters such as commas or foreign characters Only letters numbers space characters periods and underscores are allowed in the names of the source files All source pictures are copied to a new folder and renamed so that they can be read on UNIX Internet servers when you create Internet pages Space characters are replaced by underscores Uppercase characters are changed to lowercase characters Special characters lead to error messages This is why they should be replaced beforehand 78 Photo Albums on the Internet Catalog In the first step you need to select the pictures for your Internet photo album If you have already collected the pictures in a folder skip the next paragraph If you want to use pictures from different folders in your album you first need to copy them into a new folder We recommend using the GraphicConverter browser Create a new folder via the context menu on the left hand side of the browser Now hold down the Alt key and drag the pictures you require from any other folders to the new folder to copy them there Display the content of your picture folder in the browser and click a picture Select all pictures with Command A If you only want to use a few of the p
218. heck the layout and other details 97 Print Catalog In the middle pop up menu select Catalog Layout to access the following options Print Printer A Brother HL 2130 series lt Presets Default Settings Copies Pages All From 1 to 1 Catalog Layout rs _ Rotate for optimal paper usage Print each folder on a new page Toggle left and right margin book print m Reduce image resolution 150 ppi M Create Multiframe Previews for Movies _ Arrange Pictures Depending on their Resolution Arrange Pictures with Fixed Number _ Arrange Pictures with Fixed Size Horizontal 2 le Vertical 4 lt PDF 7 Hide Details Cancel Print Rotate for Optimal Paper Usage for example rotates portrait format pictures by 90 degrees so that they can be inserted better into a catalog containing mainly landscape pictures Select Print each folder on a new page if GraphicConverter should print a new page for each new subfolder Toggle left and right margin book print makes sense if you defined different mar gins left and right Reduce image resolution to i e 150 ppi reduces the amount of data Create Multiframe Previews for Movies creates a preview with four frames of the movie in a square Arrange Pictures Depending on Resolution prints the images in the size correspond ing with their resolution and places them in a suitable position on the page If for exam ple the header of a landscape format di
219. her pixels with the same color will be set to transparent and displayed with a chessboard pattern The picture areas do not have to be connected to be set to transparent By double clicking the icon in the toolbox you can make transparency settings If you do not like the chessboard pattern you can disable the Alpha Channel Display with mask option in the Preferences under Gen eral Display Content The normal picture will then be displayed instead of the chess board pattern Transparency Selected Color il Background Color Make Color Transparent Cancel ok Single click Set Back Color to set the current background color to transparent Edit Make Selection Transparent allows you to also make a normal selection trans parent For example drag open a rectangular selection and select Edit Make Selection Transparent to make the area transparent Transparency for the Internet If you generate an oval button in a normal rectangular picture against a white background you can set the white background to transparent so the background of your Web page can be seen Pictures in which one color is set to transparent can only be saved in GIF89a GIF Image I O or PNG format To save in GIF89a or GIF Image I O format select Save as and select GIF from the format list Now click Options and select GIF89a or GIF 1 O 166 Zoom Image I O is done by the Mac OS I O stands for in out The other options in this dialog are fr
220. hild with a large printed QR code or take a photo of just the QR code for example on a table Then select all pictures in GraphicConverter and start the sorting process via the context menu with Actions Sort file s into subfolders According to QR Code If you sell photos through an online shop like www zenfolio com or www smugmug com you do not need to sort the pictures as this is done automatically by the providerssystem Edit Find Compare and Replace Find QR Code allows you to display a QR code contained in a picture The text is displayed in a dialog and can be selected and copied there MTF format Motorola Theme File can be imported Embedded GIF pictures and MP3 files can be exported via the context menu Picture Auto Enhancement allows you to enhance pictures automatically The settings for checking for GraphicConverter updates are now available in the General Update section of the Preferences MathPad files can be opened If you double click an archive file in tar or gzip format it will be unpacked after a query In the File menu the Close All Saved Document Windows command will appear instead of Close when you hold down the Alt key This is useful if you have opened a large number of pictures and want to keep the ones that have not yet been saved open In the Preferences you can select a separate sort order for displaying Apple photo streams under Browser Display as it is useful to always display the latest
221. his format was introduced by CompuServe Inc GRP Uses 1 or 4 bit per pixel HAM Interchange File Format IFF HCP Windows screenshot format HD Photo wdp Microsoft format or hdp HP GL 2 This vector graphic format is usually used by plotters HGT HMR Variation of the TIFF format HTC Format of HTC Smartphones rgb565 Image gt Finder IBM PIC Supports 16 bit per pixel IC Imagic Atari Imagic program format Supports the Atari three color modes Icd5 RAW format of some iPod games ICO ICN Format of Windows file icons Windows XP icons are supported IFF LBM Default file format of Amigas Supports all color depths Places an image in a folder where a Custom File Icon was created very useful when creating CD ROMs ImageLab Format with 256 grayscale PrintTechnic IMG XIMG GEM Draw file format Supports 1 to 8 bit per pixel The specifications of the 24 bit per pixel variation were never officially published IMQ Satellite image format IPLab ithmb iPod Photo format ISS j6i Variation of the JPEG format 280 Supported Formats Format Import Export Comment JBI Variation of the TIFF format JEDMICS C4 Used by NASA JIF New format based on the TIFF format JNG JPEG JFIF Supports 24 bit per pixel or 256 grayscale Compression results in a loss of image quality Supports EXIF document information for example from digital cameras Med
222. his is useful if you want to at least see which pictures you have lost when image files become damaged Before you delete the data on the memory card you should try to rescue it using a free recovery program like Exif Untrasher that you can download at http www bluem net downloads We were able to save approximately 90 of the lost pictures in our tests Transfer IPTC records can be used when for example you have low resolution pictures with IPTC information and want to transfer this information to the high resolution ver sions of the pictures The files need to be in different folders and have the same name Select the pictures that contain the IPTC information on the left and the folder with the pictures to which the IPTC information should be transferred from the right hand list Convert Win to Mac IPTC converts all special characters in the IPTC section for exam ple a so that they are displayed correctly your Mac This option will allow your Mac to read the IPTC information in images from the world of Windows Convert Mac to Win IPTC converts all special characters in the IPTC area for example 4 so that they are displayed correctly under Windows This option allows Windows users to read the IPTC information in the images Convert Mac IPTC to UTF8 IPTC converts all special characters in the IPTC area for example a so that they are displayed correctly by programs that support Unicode 32 Convert amp Modify Sort by
223. hotos GIF format can only display 2 to 256 col ors and is specialized in achieving higher compression rates for pictures such as picto grams symbols and all pictures with sharp edges for example comics When preparing pictures for the Internet you should leave ColorSync enabled Please remember though to enable the Merge color profile into image for web usage and remove EXIF option when saving with the file selection dialog Most internet browsers display images without profiles therefore you have to merge the profile corrections into the image Display Picture from Top to Bottom There are different types of JPEG format as there are with GIF and PNG formats that you can select in the Save as dialog with Options All three formats provide the option for pictures to be opened progressively from top to bottom in the browser with the final resolution Alternatively the display can be selected from unsharp to sharp with the complete picture being shown straightaway Set the Row Order to normal for picture build up from top to bottom independent of the format versions 87a and 89a for GIF format The Progressive option must be dis abled for JPEG format The No Row Order option needs to be selected for PNG pictures 65 Preparing Pictures for the Internet Display Content from Low to High Resolution Surfers normally prefer pictures to appear complete as soon as sufficient data has been transferred and appear initially at a low res
224. hrough a distribution partner a corresponding entry will appear in the Help menu so you can send an e mail You can solve most problems by deleting the preference file see p 272 Please limit your attachments to 100 kB as we receive a very large number of e mails If you want to attach a larger sample file please ask us first Please remember that problems can often be indicated with a small section of a picture We are always glad to hear about any problems and new formats We would like to thank all users who have helped in the further development of GraphicConverter by sending us information and bug reports We prefer e mails as a support medium because of the time factor Thorsten Lemke and Lemke Software GmbH accept no liability for damages and conse quential damages hardware loss of data etc resulting from the use of the GraphicCon verter program This Manual The best way to work with the PDF version of this manual is if you display the file with the Apple Preview software under Mac OS X A search box is then provided in the drawer on the right hand edge of the window allowing you to quickly search for terms that are not listed in the index Click one of the hits to access the corresponding page The search term appears on the page with a colored background You will find Preview in the pro gram folder In the PDF version of this manual you can click the page numbers in the index and the contents as well as any cross
225. ht hand section to open this picture in GraphicConverter If several pictures are selected all of them are opened Folders that are in the selected folder are displayed as folders Only after you double click the subfolder are the contents displayed in the Browser window To display the con tents of a different folder in the current Browser window single click the corresponding folder in the left section You can go to previously opened folder and back with command left and right Aliases are indicated by a bent arrow in the bottom left hand corner so they do not acci dentally overwrite the original file with the alias when copied You can copy selected files in the browser with Command C and paste them into another folder with Command v Files copied in the Finder cannot be pasted For security reasons it is not possible to copy files with Command X and delete them at the same time 205 The Browser The Favorites area is underneath the file tree There you can drag frequently used fold ers to access them quickly Tool buttons are provided at the top for the most important options You will also find these and other options in the context menu that opens when you Ctrl click a picture You can hide the toolbar by clicking the oval button at the top right of the window frame The Up icon opens the parent folder Edit IPTC opens the dialog for document informa tion that you can open with Command l The IPTC information allows you to
226. ical JPEGs with 12 16 bit per channel can only be opened JPEG2000 JPEG 2000 creates smaller files than JPG but has jp2 and j2c not established itself j2c is a variant of JPEG2000 format JPEG XR jxr Microsoft format that has nothing in common with the JPEG format JPF Like gif but with zlib compression jpx JPEG variant KDC Kodak digital camera format You can only open these types of files on modern Macs with Power PC processors or later You can also open these files with the X and UB version from GraphicConverter 6 Keynote PICT Variant of the PICT format created by Keynote KISS CEL Koala C64 Format Kodak DCS KONTRON Kontron microscope format Contains graphics with 256 grayscale landsat LDF LuraDokument Format In the UB version of GraphicConverter LDF documents cannot be imported and exported as no SDKs are available If necessary use the X version of GraphicConverter under Rosetta Liberty IM LIFF LOGO Nokia telephone logos Lotus PIC Lotus vector format 281 Supported Formats MBM Psion 5 Format Import Export Comment LuraDocument Document management format LWF LuraWave LuraWave Wavelet compression technology When saving the graphics size is limited to 800x600 pixels You can only save larger graphics after you have paid the licensing fee In the UB version of GraphicConverter LWF images canno
227. icture window shows the picture section with the set brightness contrast and color values Click OK to display the whole picture with the new values 136 Vignetting Correction Practice often shows that you can only determine the best values by trial and error It is helpful here if you can repeat this step for another picture once you have changed the brightness contrast or color Click Set Last Values to set all sliders in the dialog to the same position as in the last process If you want to keep an eye on the original image while changing the brightness you can open a copy of the image in a new window with Picture Duplicate before opening the brightness dialog If you arrange the windows next to each other you can compare them more easily You can use Saturation to intensify or tone down the colors If you want to make a picture postcard you can make the sky as blue as you want with this option Increasing the saturation is normally worthwhile with scanners which produce pictures with little color If your scanner software has an automatic color correction option you should enable it As a rule your eye is the best judge Full Screen Preview allows you to display a preview of the whole picture if you have a fast computer Vignetting Correction With Effect Vignetting Correction you can correct the vignetting of a picture Take a picture of a white background with the same lens zoom and exposure or use a white translucent len
228. ictures in your album select the ones you want while holding down the Shift key Alternatively you can also make the selection in the left hand area of the Convert amp Modify mode In this case you should create and open the target folder for the Internet data on the right hand side You start automatic creation of the Internet data for this alternative by selecting Catalog HTML for WWW Usage from the context menu and clicking Go You will find information on the other settings in the following sections Back to simple selection in the browser Once you have selected the pictures click the Catalog Icon in the browser Select HTML in this menu No matter which way you go the following dialog opens Catalog General File HTML Basic HTML Meta HTML Text Batch File Name verabschiedung_2011 html i Creator kind C Set from Program File Image File Format O JPG GIF or TIF depending on source Always JPEG Thumbnail File Format GIF or JPEG depending on color depth Set JPEG Quality Always JPEG ae S O Always PNG Set PNG Quality Open Save Cancel _oK Enter a filename with the extension html or htm For photos we recommend selecting the Always JPEG option under Thumbnail file format If you have comic strips mixed up with photos select GIF and JPEG depending on color depth Always PNG makes sense only if you want to work with the lar
229. iew v Filmstrip preview V Show duration Quality M Scale up small previews Always recreate JPEG previews Date Style Medium Restore to Defaults x Last Values Cancel __OK RAW text for raw files displays RAW in the lower right hand corner of the regarding thumbnails Color Mode displays the color mode in the lower left hand corner Most pic 236 The Browser tures are RGB or CMYK Label in front of and after filename makes the label better visi ble for selected pictures Icon GPS position Flash Rotation IPTC Caption and Keywords and Unapplied XMP Changes allow you to display icons at the corners of the thumbnails that indicate whether a flash was used for the respective picture or whether the picture contains GPS data Geo data orientation data for rotating IPTC Caption or Keywords or unapplied XMP Changes Select Show Icons on gray box to make the icons better visible The icon for rotating is displayed when a picture was taken with a camera that has an orientation sensor Click the icon to rotate the picture depending on the EXIF orientation tag If the camera was looking straight down or up the orientation tag may be wrong so following you have to rotate manually until you reach the correct orientation It is possi ble you need to rotate manually several times Multi frame preview for movies shows four pictures from the movie instead of the first picture as a preview which helps organization and is particu
230. ight target sizes but up to 20 is new If you want to save a target size in an automatically generated subfolder enter the name 293 New in GraphicConverter 7 4 of the folder in the Add to Name box followed by a slash and the format suffix Size Sharpen Add to Name 370x535 with crop 5 _x50 180x260 with crop 5 _x60 275x398 with crop 5 _x65 85x123 with crop 5 _x180 60x87 with crop 5 _x275 880x1272 with 5 _x370 50x50 with crop 5 _x880 Changed shortcuts for rotate left and right to the default shortcuts on Mac OS X Rotate right Command R was Shift Command R Rotate left Command L was Command R Added erase text background option Double click the text tool in the toolbox to open the dialog for the Erase Background option Added import of xmp metadata from pdf Optimized fetching of exif data in the browser Added automatic rename option for dicom files You will find this option in the Rename dialog that you open via the Action Misc pop up menu in the browser toolbar Select the Specials tab At the very bottom you will find Format Specific Options Add time code after name for DPX pictures and Add patient id and date for DICOM pictures Minimum spacing in browser view reduced DICOM import of 16 bit grayscale lossless compressed images with only 12 used bits much enhanced IPTC import export can transfer private tags The IPTC standard covers 255 fields of which not all are occupied The free fields are used fo
231. ile The change immediately affects the file on the hard drive and in the RAM In the General Display Windows section of the Preferences you can display rulers You can set the ruler units to cm for example with a pop up menu eco IMG_1025 jpg RGB 1250 1878 2800 Biz 19 Converting a picture with Save as Please note that the values in cm mm etc depend on the resolution Therefore change the resolution beforehand to 300 dpi for offset printing or to 180 dpi for printing on inkjet printers via the Picture Resolution dialog Right clicking or Control clicking the title bar of a picture allows you to call up a cus tomize dialog via the context menu Filter Layer View Window vV Icon and Text Icon Only Text Only Te Hide Toolbar ae Use Small Size Customize Toolbar The customize dialog allows you to set up direct access to the labels the Share function for online services the navigation tools and functions for Adjust brightness etc with their options Select Customize Toolbar from the same context menu to open the dialog shown below ee Untitled RGB z Options Adjust Save Undo Redo Previous Next Save amp Next 0 Drag your favorite items into the toolbar yA gt Options Adjust Save e F bi p Und Redo N Py Save amp Next Delete amp N Rating EEEE a u Labe Rotate Right Rotate Left Share Or drag the default set into the toolbar y e282e0e0 F Ne
232. ile You can also enable and disable ColorSync in the lower frame of image windows by clicking the circle Edit Color Profile Color Profile M Use ColorSync color matching Source sRGB built in n Display Cinema HD Hagen Tag You can change the display profile in the ColorSync control panel Printer None 7 Default Profiles Will be used if the file doesn t contain a profile but requires one sRGB SRGB icc s EXIF uncalibrated AdobeRGB1998 icc mel RGB sRGB IEC61966 2 1 icc gt CMYK ISO Coated v2 300 ECI icc Check if the image contains a profile a Conversion Priority Quick a _ Ignore invalid color profiles Cancel ok If an image does not contain a profile nor EXIF information or if the EXIF information is Uncalibrated or does not have a standardized entry you need to decide yourself how GraphicConverter should proceed Select one of the three options in the large pop up menu at the bottom of the dialog 143 Color Management with Profiles and ColorSync 1 Ask if the image has no profile With this method GraphicConverter shows the following dialog when an image is opened Assign Color Profile The image doesn t contain a color profile Please select one Source None gt You may disable this dialog box from the File menu Edit Color Profile Don t ask again Don t assign a color profile OK This method is recomm
233. ile format for exchanging vector and bitmap graphics Chyron The export option only covers the basic elements cicn Icons CINEON 277 Supported Formats Format Import Export Comment CISCOlpPhonel mages CLP Windows clipboard format cpbitmap Format from iOS devices for the start screen and background picture cri CRW Canon cameras raw format csource Graphics as C source code CT Scitex color graphics CUR Cursor format CVG Calamus vector format CWK Apple Works document format All images contained are imported DCS C M Y K documents are combined in a complete CMYK image DCX Contains several PCX files DDS Format of some graphic cards DeltaVision DESR VFF DICOM Graphic format used in medical technology Direct icns Discus YUV Format from television production DJ1000 Camera format DL Animation format with 320x200 pixels for 8 bit Normally contains x rated elements dm2 dm3 Gatan format from digital microscopes DNG Digital Negative Doodle DPX Dr Halo Dr Halo program format with 256 colors Drawlt PDB Drawlt Palm OS Duotone PSD Import as grayscale ECW Only in Carbon Version of GraphicConverter 278 Supported Formats Format Import Export Comment Electronic Electric Image Format can contain animations Image EPSF Encapsulated Postscript Format G
234. iles Printing Ignore Extensions THM TXT HTM HTML EXE DLL P C PAS CC ASM COM SYS LST DOC XLS PST OST INI PPT INF SIT ZIP TAR MIM GZIP ARJ MDX MSH RTF WEBLOC TEXTCLIPPING XMP General Store printer driver settings in preferences This may not work with some drivers Restore to Defaults Last Values Gancel so Under Print Header you can specify whether the filename today s date and a sequen tial page number should be printed in the header Font and Size allow you to select a font in a specific size for the additional information You can edit the list of file extensions that are ignored in multiple files printing with File Print Folder Mac OS saves the settings of the print dialog If the settings are lost when printing again select Preferences Print General Store printer driver settings in prefer ences to save the settings in GraphicConverter s preferences This may not work with every printer driver When you print all files in a folder with File Print Folder the folder may also contain files that are not image files and should not be printed These files are ignored automati cally if their extension is in the list of extensions to be ignored 94 Print Catalog Tip If the manufacturer of your printer cannot supply a driver for your Mac OS version you can try using a free driver from Gutenprint http gimp print sourceforge net MacOSX php Print Catalog Print in the File Catalog menu allo
235. ilm color filters were a popular way to increase the contrast of certain color ranges or create effects Filters are not used in digital photogra phy because effects can be achieved more flexibly with software filters Yellow filters are suitable for suppressing slight hazes and restore the lost contrast in portraits after con version to black and white Red filters lighten skin and can dramatically set off clouds Green filters can be used to highlight the differences between various green hues You use the circle at the bottom left to select the brightness and contrast while you can color the image with the circle at the bottom right The popular sepia tones are at the top slightly right of center Do also try blue tones If you click Order now to buy a license Xe847 and Pure Carbon will be activated simultaneously 106 Color Range Color Range With Filter Color Range you can create color effects similar to the pictures of Andy War hol Segmentation lets you select in how many shades of grey the picture is devided Click the color fields besides the sliders to select colors and rate the active sections to your taste You can make the effect even more interesting by using other filters of GraphicCon verter in the next step Highlights and Shadows In some pictures the light areas are too light and the dark areas too dark This problem can be reduced slightly if you move the slider for the shadows to the right and the slider f
236. ilm or animation in the dis play but all pictures from the film Select the Best Interpolation algorithm to obtain the optimum image quality for nor mal applications A range of other algorithms are available for special tasks Picture size an example If you cut a person s head out of a picture and want to glue it onto another person s body in another picture the head will often be too big or too small in the new picture Display both images at 100 zoom level and reduce the larger picture with the scale function Picture Size Scale by entering 80 as the width for example see above If the new size does not fit return to the initial version with Ctrl Z and reduce again with a more suitable percentage As soon as the size of the head fits the body in the other pic ture select the head with the lasso and copy it Using Command V paste the head into the other picture You can position it freely there Resolution Each picture file is made up of pixels and information on the size of the picture on a prin ted page The pixels are square rectangular in a few formats To help explain this imagi ne a picture that is 300 pixels wide and tall The file also contains the information that the picture has a width and height of one inch One inch is 2 54 cm Our picture therefore has 300 pixels placed horizontally next to each other and also ver tically one below the other At this density the picture resolution is 300 dpi This
237. in the Preferences Slide Show General Repeat Slide Show is disabled When saving in BMP format you can deselect Reduce to 1 bit if possible You can use Effect Concat all Images to concat all open pictures horizontally or vertically This is handy for collages as they are often used on web pages Saving in Apple iOS Icon set format can save the variant with 512 pixels or 512 x2 pixels too Scanned color negatives scanned by Vuescan are displayed inverted automatically World Map Data can now be displayed in the lower frame of a picture window If there 320 New in GraphicConverter 9 4 is World Map Data in a sidecar file GraphicConverter displayes it in the lower frame of a picture window In order to see the data you need to enable the option Preferences General Display Windows Show Position and color in footer All windows you open afterwards show the x and y value for the current mouse position and the color value If World Map Data is available the values for the current mouse position are displayed With Effect Lens Corrections you can correct the distortions that are caused by virtual all lenses even in central perspective In the Edit or Add EXIF Data dialog you can edit the aperture in an additional entry field as f number too Open the dialog via the context menu Effect Gradient intensity brings out the contours of a picture as colored lines Areas rather turn to black The effect often is suited to mak
238. in the head of the image file to a value like 300 dpi as this would only cre ate extra work Canvas Size Picture Size Canvas Size allows you to enlarge the picture by adding margins that are more or less like a work area You can use this option for example if you want to add something to the right hand picture edge to make the picture wider Enter the new val ues for the Width and the Height in a selectable unit You can select the position where the previous image should be placed on the new larger working area by clicking the cor responding box under the input boxes Color specifies the color of the added margin If the picture contains an alpha channel it will be set to transparent in the area being add ed Canvas Size Current Size 97 0 MB Width 4368 pixel Height 2912 pixel Width 4 368 gt pixel Height 2 912 pixel Position Size 97 0 MB Remember previous values Cancel 115 Picture size an example Enable Remember previous values so that the values are available when you next call up the dialog You can also use the Add Remove Margins option It makes adding or removing a spe cific value on two or more sides more easy Add Remove Margins You can use Picture Size Add Remove Margins to change the size of a picture by adding or deleting margins This function is useful for example when you need more space for other picture parts in picture montages Add Re
239. in the window title and select Browse All Versions from the pop up menu that opens Alternatively you can select File Revert to Saved 9 Hilfe Bearbeitet v Sch tzen Duplizieren Zur zuletzt ge ffneten Version zur ckkehren Alle Versionen durchsuchen Similar to the TimeMachine display all older versions of the file will now be displayed on the right next to the current version On the right hand side of the screen you can choose which of the older versions you want to display Click the required time bar or drag the time bars while holding down the mouse button to browse Click Restore to make the selected version the current document If you select the wrong version you can repeat the process to find the right version since all versions are kept 11 Auto Save and Fullscreen Mode Auto Save helps you during your work by adding Edited to the filename in the window title which appears as soon as you modify the image If you want to prevent further mod ifications select Lock from the window title pop up menu Locked will appear instead of Edited Protected files can also be unlocked again via the pop up menu for the window title with Unlock We recommend creating a protected version once you have reached an editing stage that you want to keep If you do not edit a file for two weeks Lion will auto matically change the status to Locked Select Unlock when you want to edit the file again Alternatively you can create
240. ing while 6 9 set some of the labels or whether you want to set labels with 0 7 while Control with 0 5 sets the ratings Y 1 5 set rating 6 9 set label red yellow green blue 0 7 set label control 0 5 set rating 0 9 moves to sort folder use context menu for rating and label 4 A third option is to specify that files are moved or copied to the folders defined under Folders Move Folders with the keys 0 9 The same keys and shortcuts work during the slide show Preview Creation Ignore Extensions allows you select file formats like for example EPS for which previews are not created because it would take too long Browser Misc Preferences General Display _Open Preview Upon program launch mM Open browser Thumbnails laeran on Lion or later if restore windows upon launch option is Edit Redirect double click to Edit O Open with Finder O Open With Open With Application J Adobe Photoshop CS3 K Misc Focal Length Calculated to 35mm Google Earth Speed 1 0 E Extension Ignore Extensions THM TXT HTM HTML EXE DLL P C PAS CC ASM COM SYS LST DOC XLS PST OST INI PPT INF SIT ZIP TAR MIM GZIP ARJ MDX MSH RTF Allow Extensions leave empty to show all Restore to Defaults CD 239 The Browser Browser R ek os CAN B od EnaA SG E a lt General Open Save Print SlideShow Convert Browser Folders Search General i Display Open Preview Upon p
241. ings that have been set will not be saved with the file when you save it again and will therefore be 216 The Browser deleted Therefore make sure that XMP is kept enabled in the format options when you work with ratings JPEG JFIF Quality 90 Before After y low medium high O Always use selected quality Set default quality to source file quality if possible Codec Baseline standard Progressive Lossless only special usage Subsampling 4 2 2 default Calculate File Size Original Size 3 7 MB New Size 573 8 KB Y Embed metadata if available Show Preview IPTC y XMP EXIF ICC profile Don t embed sRGB profile gt EXIF Options Special Filesize Options Show this dialog before saving JPEG files Cancel OK Click Refresh to update the list for the current browser window This is useful when you have modified files and folders in other programs since GraphicConverter is for example sometimes not informed quickly enough about whether something has been changed on operating system level Action menu options Open With Finder transfers an image to the Finder when double clicked so that the file is opened as if it has been double clicked in the Finder You can change the setting in the Finder for example by clicking any JPEG file and displaying the information for that file 217 The Browser with Command l In the Open With section select the required program from the pop up menu and click the Chan
242. inst the white background was created in a separate picture The whole picture content was selected with Command A and copied with Command C In the target picture with the bridge the clipboard contents have been 153 Selection pasted with Command V and placed in the top left hand corner The Transparent copy with background color option was disabled this time Z aw oa 0 2 PAYS YESI PENA ga fN NS The selection was cleared with the Escape key esc The Transparent copy with back ground color option was enabled again and the Z pasted from the clipboard again White was selected as the background color With this setting the white background of the letter Z turns transparent and our example you can see the blue sky around the Z As long as a moved selection is not yet placed at its destination this effect can still be enabled or disabled using Transparent copy with background color No matter what you set for transparent copying in the same dialog you have the option of defining a selection more precisely than with the mouse Enter the top left corner and the width and height of the selection Alternatively you can enter the distance of the right hand edge of the selection from the left edge or the distance of the lower edge of the selection from the top edge with Right and Bottom instead of the width and height If you want to insert a selection of a certain size with the mouse select the P
243. ion displays any problems that occur during the con version Batch Functions Remove after quit will prevent you accidentically using a batch again during the next conversion 45 Convert amp Modify Under Quick Convert Subfolder Name select a name for the subfolders created auto matically during convert processes that are started via the pop up menu in the browser or via the operator 02 Februar 03 Marz 04 Aprit os Mai v 06 Juni 07 Gochsheim 08 Loki G11 Loki Kirche Pfarrhof B 14 Altargruppe 15 Loki Pfarrhaus Kirche w 16 Loki Damm M llers gt 16 tj Gp 17 Loki Kirche Kunst Gi 18 H hner JG 19 Wiedereinweihung Loki i 20 Wiedereinweihung Loki 21 Abschied Teninger Fahi Qi 22 Katzen Schwanne 24 Esther u Johanna 25 Tom erstes Treffen 26 TenSing Premiere 27 Jauerkas Tom 28 Tom 1 Mal in Loki 29 Geb Phillip G30 Elbhafen Katzen 07 Juli 08 August 109 September 10 Oktober 11 November Gp 12 Dezember B Sammlungen n Pictures Movies AX hagenhenke Henkes 2010 Lo ts If the When Error Occurs option is enabled a log file containing all error messages will 101_0133 1 jpg 101_0138 jpg a 4 101_0141 jpg 101_0136 jpg 101_0139 1 jpg 101_0142 jpg 57 items v No Batch 1200 15 Scharfen 1200 9 Scharfen 15 Scharfen 1800 15 Scharfen 2000 Pixel 15 Scharfen 2200 Pixel 15 Scharfen 2600 Pixel 15 Scharfen 3000 Pixel 15
244. ion reduced by a multiple of 2 User Custom Value displays a box where you can enter the required zoom value 254 Slide show Stretch to Fullscreen displays the pictures distorted Pictures with an aspect ratio of 3 4 are stretched widthways to an aspect ratio of 16 9 which makes faces in particular look unnatural Crop to Fullscreen enlarges the pictures so that they fill the screen If the aspect ratios of the picture and the screen do not match the picture will be cut off at the top and bot tom or left and right Crop Only Landscape Images to Full Screen limits this option to landscape images only Tiled display displays the picture as tiles Use B Spline interpolation for upscaling enhances the quality in most cases The pop up menu No conversion of 3D content for display allows you to convert 3D pictures to formats like 1080p Frame Packing during slide show Subfolder Depth allows you to define how many levels of subfolders are included Enter a value for Movie Playback to define how many seconds the play head jumps ina movie when you press command arrow left and right 255 Slide show Key shortcuts for the slide show Key Combination Press cursor up Result Pauses the slide show Command Alt F Shows the selected pictures in the browser as a slide show If nothing is selected subfolders are included Press cursor left Previous picture or start previous film Page up key Previous picture o
245. ious or next picture with the arrows You can also use the left and right s to page for wards and backwards in the slide show The symbol for pause turns into the symbol to continue playback when you click it End the slide show with the X in the circle or the Escape key You can rate JPEG and TIF images displayed in the browser during the slide show with 0 5 stars using the keys 0 5 or 6 9 for the lables Settings for Slide Show General Change Picture After delay allows you to specify how long each slide should be dis played After mouse click is practical if you want to show the individual images for differ 247 Slide show ent lengths of time If you want to start the slide show from the beginning again after the last picture select Repeat Slide Show You can specify whether the list of pictures should be reloaded before the loop or after any change These options are useful if you copy more pictures into the displayed folder during the slide show Slide Show a E Lire Jas CaN 0 g eee a a General Open Save Print Slide Show Convert Browser Folders Search General More Change Picture After delay _ After mouse click Transitions 4 00 seconds Export to Movie _ Repeat Slide Show Metadata Reload file list before loop Misc a _ Reload if source folder content changed Optimize V Open Images at reduced Resolution Enhance _ Improve Image Quality with Xe847 Technology Show _ File name with
246. is also available in the dialog of Rename Find duplicate files If a browser window is open you can use Edit Find compare and replace Find dupli cate files to search for duplicates in the folder currently displayed including all subfold 257 Find duplicate files ers You can then delete any files you do not need A dialog opens where you can specify whether only completely identical files should be found or whether similar files should also be displayed as identical If you decide to search for similar files you can use the slide to specify how tolerant GraphicConverter should be Select the more tolerant setting to display versions that differ more greatly as duplicates Duplicate File Search Find exact matching files only fast O Find similar files slow More image similarity Less image similarity Use more memory Compare in grayscale Cancel m During the search GraphicConverter will display the progress The process may take a while if you search your whole picture folder Duplicate File Search Exact Mode Reading file list 12349 Comparing files step 1 0 Comparing files step 2 0 Comparing files step 3 0 GraphicConverter will compare the file size first then the file content 258 Find duplicate files When GraphicConverter finds duplicate pictures it will display them in a dialog Check Duplicate Files Item Found Duplicates IMG_5266 jpg Delete This
247. isplay of selected items added to browser O key added during slide show for editing support for character during renaming in the browser added added shortcut for select existing added support for more EXIF tags New in GraphicConverter 7 4 The new 3D formats JPS PNS and MPO can be opened and saved JPS is a 3D version of JPEG format and PNS is a 3D version of PNG format MPO stands for Multi Picture Object MPO images have a similar structure to a GIF animation MPO files are however concatenated JPEGs with additional metadata JPS and PNS formats use Cross Eye display that displays two images next to each other on computer monitors If you want to see the 3D effect you can try to look at the images cross eyed so that your right eye looks at the left hand image and your left eye looks at the right hand image Another possibility to view 3D images on a computer monitor is to convert them into Red Magenta or Red Blue Anaglyph via the Effect 3D menu The two images have different color coding and are copied to an image You need a special pair of glasses to view them The disadvantage of the method developed in Leipzig by Wilhelm Rollmann back in 1853 is that the colors are not displayed realistically On modern 3D capable televisions JPS PNS and MPO files are displayed as three dimensional images with acceptable colors because the two individual images are displayed for example alternating in quick sequence or with different pol
248. it number is need ed for each pixel either one or zero This single point is called a bit Black and white pic tures without grayscales therefore have a data depth of one bit and use only one channel RGB images with a color depth of 8 bit per channel have a total color depth of 3 x 8 24 bit and can contain 16 777 216 colors Under Picture Color these pictures are displayed as 32 bit pictures as 32 bit is the maximum of this mode 172 Colors Mode and Colorize Color depth and the maximum number of different colors are related in the following way Depth in bits Colors 1 2 B amp W 2 4 4 16 8 256 16 32768 32 16 7 million 64 over 281 trillion The number of colors is not the calculable maximum value because Macintosh comput ers only use 15 bit for 16 bit 24 bit for 32 bit and 48 bit for 64 When you add an alpha channel the value for the used bits increases to 32 or to 64 bit 16 bit per channel RAW files of digital cameras contain 12 or 16 bit per color channel From version 8 1 GraphicConverter supports up to 16 bit per channel for TIFF and RAW files on import With 3 x 16 bit these pictures reach a total color depth of 48 bit which is also called Deep Color and can display 281 474 976 710 656 color over 281 trillion Under Picture Color these images are shown as 64 bit pictures as 64 bit are the maximum of this mode 16 bit pictures can be saved in TIFF format only with full color d
249. ity level when you save pictures in JPEG format Select File Save as in the file selection option set JPEG JFIF as the format and click Options The lower the quality the smaller the file Data reduction is used in addition to data compression particularly for low quality levels The dialog for selecting the quality opens automatically after you click Save unless you disabled this 67 Preparing Pictures for the Internet The compression rate of JPEG format is also very large at the highest quality level This is why this level or a value over 80 is recommended Try out the lower quality levels if you require small files The loss of quality is clearly visible below the medium level 50 JPEG JFIF Quality 90 Before low medium high O Always use selected quality Set default quality to source file quality if possible Codec Baseline standard Progressive Lossless only special usage Subsampling 4 2 2 default Calculate File Size Original Size 3 7 MB New Size 573 8 KB Show Preview Y Embed metadata if available IPTC XMP EXIF ICC profile Don t embed sRGB profile EXIF Options Special Filesize Options Show this dialog before saving JPEG files Cancel OK The preview allows you to judge the loss of quality The section can be moved with the mouse Creating the preview and calculating the file size may take longer on slower computers You should only select Lossless if you are sure that recipient
250. ize Holding down the Shift key allows you to draw only vertical or horizontal lines Double click the line tool to select a style for the line You can also create arrows 54 Work Environment With a held click on the line tool you can select the cross hair tool you can use to mark points as often necessary in astro photography for example to mark a star Double click the tool to select the number of lines the angle or additional circles The Filled Rectangle Filled rounded Rectangle and Filled Circle tools allow you to draw the respectively shaped areas onto the picture in the foreground color Rectangle Rounded Rectangle and Circle allow you to draw the respectively shaped frame in the picture Select the line thickness further down in the toolbox The fore ground color is used for the color The Fill tool sets the current color for the pixel you clicked and all neighboring pixels with the same color To fill a larger area the tolerance normally needs to be set to a value around 60 The Stamp copies the content of an area that you Alt click to any position in the pic ture This option is useful for example for removing scratches when you are touching pictures up Radius Smoothness Always use unstamped picture as master Don t move stamp source The Blur tool softens the parts of the picture you use it at while Sharpen sharpens these parts The Smudge Tool allows you to smudge parts of pictures for
251. l automatically receive messages about updates when an Internet connection is present and can install them automatically with a click If you have not been online much for a while you can search for updates with GraphicConverter Check for Updates or on the www lemkesoft com pages We recommend that you always use the latest version All updates are free with a few exceptions Your registration and default settings are not affected If you bought GraphicConverter from Apple s Mac App Store you will receive notification from the store as soon as an update is available for automatic installation Auto Save and Fullscreen Mode Under Mac OS 10 7 Lion the new options include Auto Save and fullscreen mode Auto Save can be disabled in the GraphicConverter Preferences under Save General If you shut down your computer under Lion and have programs open at that moment these will be lauched automatically on the next start of your computer with all windows opened which were open when you shut down After quit and relaunch of a Program the windows will be opened again too You can disable this option in the System prefer ences under General in Mac OS 10 7 If you leave this option active you can exclude GraphicConverter in the GraphicConverter Preferences part General Misc Upon Launch Restore last Windows Under Lion if you shut down your computer while programs are still open they will be automatically restored when the computer is restarted
252. laces the names of all files with the new text Don t forget to enable the option with the check box beforehand Simply writing the text in the box will not work Add text before and Add text after allow you to add text before or after the name In the dialog shown you can see how the word Celebration_ is inserted in front of the name NNOO Rename Name amp Extension Index Date Specials Label Current Name Change to A F IMG_ 0114 jpg Celebration_IMG_0114 jpg L Change filename IMG_0115 jpg Celebration_IMG_0115 jpg Add text before IMG_ 0119 jpg Celebration_IMG_0119 jpg IMG_ 0120 jpg Celebration_IMG_0120 jpg l Add text after IMG_ 0121 jpg Celebration_IMG_0121 jpg Insert amp parent into the above field to IMG_ 0122 jpg celebrations INGO rez pg use parent folder name IMG_ 0123 jpg Celebration_IMG_0123 jpg Find and replace IMG_ 0124 jpg Celebration_IMG_0124 jpg 3 IMG_ 0125 jpg Celebration _IMG_0125 jpg Find IMG_ 0126 jpg Celebration_IMG_0126 jpg Replace with IMG_ 0127 jpg Celebration_IMG_0127 jpg IMG_ 0128 jpg Celebration_IMG_0128 jpg Change case to UPPERCASE IMG_ 0129 jpg Celebration_IMG_0129 jpg Make filenames UNIX and Web compatible IMG_ 0130 jpg Celebration IMGLOTZ0jpg IMG_ 0131 jpg Celebration_IMG_0131 jpg See Ony IMG_ 0132 jpg Celebration_IMG_0132 jpg Lowercase and uppercase IMG_ 0133 jpg Celebration_IMG_0133 jpg Make filenames Mac OS 8 9 compatible IMG_ 0134 jpg Celebratio
253. larly helpful if the first picture is black It can take a moment to create the multi frame preview Filmstrip preview makes it easier to recognize video files Quality Scale up small previews zooms small previews This can be helpful especially for very small pictures of 32 x 32 pixels for example Use Always recreate JPEG previews if you do not want to use existing previews which are in the picture file because they are too small or show wrong content If you have selected Thumbnails Generation Fast use only available icons in the General sec tion you can define an exception for JPEGs with Always recreate JPEG previews 237 The Browser Browser Edit Preferences Fe ee sal E Ags 0 ad wen ey S a General Open Save Print SlideShow Convert Browser Folders Search General Display Options Preview JPEG M Use lossless JPEG rotation mirroring Thumbnails ll Do not modify EXIF data C Do not warn Misc Label Write in XMP metadata Rating l Write in extended file attribute IPTC C Write into NEF files RAWs Create THM Keyboard Space key does toggle QuickLook O Space key does toggle label between orange and no label 1 5 set rating 6 9 set label red yellow green blue B Preview Creation Ignore Extensions PDF EPS EPSF PS C Restore to Defaults Last Values Cancel _ Cor You should leave JPEG Use lossless JPEG rotation mirroring enabled at all times so that JPEGs are
254. le Sort By Name AAZ La es 1 of 83 items When you hide and display the drop area again the selection is kept The number of files in the current folder is displayed in the center of the lower window frame If you have made a selection the number of pictures or objects selected is indicated to the left of the number of pictures Type the first letter of the filename to find the image more quickly The corresponding graphic is selected in the thumbnail section of the browser In the directory structure only folders that contain other folders have a triangle for opening folders All other folders do not have to be opened per se but are opened with a click The graphics they contain are displayed in the middle section The size of the middle section with the smaller images can be changed by clicking the scrollbar on the right border of the middle section and then moving it to change the size of the overall image Because the small previews are sorted in a grid the window also dis plays this format when the previews are larger or smaller in size If you change the width of the middle section the spacing between the preview images and the number of col umns will be adjusted 212 The Browser The width of the left section can also be changed by moving the scrollbar This is neces sary for deeply layered directory structures You can change the size of the right section with the handle in the bottom right hand corn
255. le Save Alt clicking the red ball at the top left of the window closes all open GraphicConverter windows This option is part of the Mac OS and is available in all programs The current window is closed with File Close Save All saves all windows Force Save All saves all windows with the settings that you selected for the first picture This option is useful for example when you have scanned in a large number 25 Save a Copy as of individual pictures and want to save them You can also save to UFS partitions under Mac OS X Save a Copy as Save a Copy as allows you to save a copy of the picture in a different format while you are still editing it The format of the open picture is not changed only the saved file has another format Convert amp Modify Summary You can use File Convert amp Modify to convert and modify several pictures at the same time There is an icon at the top left of the browser that you can use to turn the browser into a window for multiple conversion Simple text conversions Mac lt gt PC are also possible Batch actions such as changing the resolution to 72 dpi that are run on all pictures in a directory can also be defined using Use Batches in the Convert dialog see page 244 If you need to convert a number of pictures at the same time the File menu contains a useful option called Convert amp Modify that saves you having to open and save each pic ture individually Select
256. le PHONES cece cece nee eee eee tence teen e eee een eeees 76 SliCESics cou rds Goad ate emi A casas A S T ead meee at hea deat ene as 76 Photo Albums on the Internet Catalog cece cece cence cence ence tenn enees 78 CloUd SERVICES isincsscaesaeiewabowdioesaaseurebadtesactuwebhadecveateusesadentebsaanes 89 Uploading and Downloading Documents cece cece eee tence nent eenenees 89 On Paper Paper POMnmMat vans easiwawsnts tes cuastin tec teem aves EE EEE Ve hater sas pene aw enwte 91 PHANG ante aha 2 ulate da ewe Relea Medan cae hla te ada et hh le Res ara retake aetna dad 92 PRG Cale OO ser oai pacticton A E E atau oaks TEAT mine La A ER 95 Print Folderi enasna ea s ue iit eels ie te a n hited Sates 99 Processing Pictures Non destructive image editing with the Cocooner cece cece cee teen e ee enee 100 Color correction with Color Balance 0 ccc cece ence cence eet een en tenn ennens 102 Color correction With Xe847 ccc ccc ccc cece nce e cence eee eee ee tent entenneenens 103 P re Carb OM Filter meere anaia as a E AE ieee anteabade Guava a aA awe 105 Colon Range aseene raa be E aE E se Mane 505s beard EE eA 107 Highlights and Shadows ssussssnnssensnssenssernssersseresssereseersseress 107 Cropping for Photo Prints 245x613 vedscked sd dae danadedes hinted eae ebedserkad seaareds 109 PictureSize 5 is nan aS ease iaamatey aera y Saeed Iya so wha ae ayaa sae Wasa 113 Scanning with GraphicCo
257. le Space Destination amp Format Convert Action Search Up Trash Refresh New Folder Scan Find ie E Lacs Find Duplicates Crop Open With Edit IPTC Upload Make Preview or drag the default set into the toolbar la GZ lt W oF eS Subfolder jpg J amp Gey Back View Convert amp Modify Edit Rotate Left Rotate Right E Mail SlideShow Print Catalog Destination amp Format nver Action Search Show Icon amp Text C Use Small Size Done The Flexible Space icon pushes all icons to its right to the right hand edge which is often where the Search input box is placed At the bottom left of the dialog you can specify whether large or small icons should be used and whether the name of the func tion should appear as a text label under the icons You can also display just the text to save space This could be useful on smaller MacBooks The toolbar in picture windows can also be customized via the context menu see p 20 onwards Click the picture to display a larger version of it in the right section of the browser You can also select several pictures A histogram is displayed above the enlarged picture This is only interesting for professional users In the lower section you can display information like the EXIF information or the Geo information You can display and hide the histogram and the information with the blue icons To select several pictures use Shift and Command click for example to move them to a different folder
258. lection tool and enter the desired size in pixels Click the place in the picture where the upper left corner of the selection should appear to insert the selection 299 New in GraphicConverter 7 6 1 and 7 6 2 New in GraphicConverter 8 2 In the Preferences you can specify under General Map whether the current position where the computer is located should be displayed Limit Number of Pins to 100 allows you to avoid speed problems during display You can disable use of Google Maps so that generic maps are displayed for which an Internet connection is not required This is recommended for example when you are travelling and do not have an Internet connection or if you do not want to receive data for reasons of cost Mac OS 10 7 Lion now only supports the Carbon library in 32 bit which is why pictures with less than 8 bit total color depth are always converted into 8 bit pictures upon opening If a picture only uses the colors black and white GraphicConverter will however save these pictures automatically with a color depth of one bit PICT images can be opened With some images there can be slight quality losses depending on the image content We therefore recommended converting all PICT format images into PNG format Start GraphicConverter in 32 bit mode for lossless conversion In the Finder click the GraphicConverter program file and call up the information dialog with Command l by selecting 32 bit mode before you start GraphicCo
259. lette Color table Palm image Format of the Palm organizer stream stream PAM Open Source Format Paperport max Format of scanners with automatic feed PBM PGM Standard UNIX file format for easy exchange of PPM graphics Supports 1 8 or 24 bit per pixel The file can be coded as binary or ASCII PCD Kodak PhotoCD format PCX PC Paintbrush file format Supports 1 4 and 8 bit per pixel The new version also supports 24 bit per pixel PDB FireViewer Palm Pilot format In the UB version of GraphicConverter PDB FireViewer images with type 2 compression cannot be imported and exported as no SDKs are available If necessary use the X version of GraphicConverter under Rosetta 283 Supported Formats Format Import Export Comment PDF Import and Export only in Carbon Version Mac OS X PDS3 IMQ files with MOC compression PEF RAW format of Pentax cameras PFM Open Source Format PGC PGF PGPF Sony Clie Format Photo PDB JPEG Photoshop The contents of these pictures are used in Pattern file Photoshop as a pattern Photostudio PIC Format used under Mac OS 9 B W Atari file format 640x400 pixels PIC PC Paint file format PIC Psion format Supports 1 or 2 bit per pixel PIC 32K Black and white Atari format with 640 x 400 pixels PICS Animation PICT Standard Mac OS graphic format Contains vector and or bitmap graphics The PICT images created by Keynote are also
260. lette and editing the text in the same way as you would in a word processing program You cannot however select the complete text with Command A In the tab GPS a world map is displayed If the selected image has geo data the position is shown by a small red cross Click somewhere on the map to show the positon in Google Earth Settings for the individual pictures frames for example for an animation can be made in the GIF Animation palette 000 GIF Animation Delay 3 00 s Global color table Transparent Ee Dg Apply to All Local color table M Loop 63 Work Environment You can specify details for the display of windows under Edit GraphicConverter Pre ferences in the General Display Windows section Preferences Save Print Slide Show Convert Browser Clipboard Display Content Editor s Tool Windows Display Windows Detail Show center dot Edit External Editors Image Capture Memory Misc Show Rulers Position and color in footer Main Window Resize mM Window after scale zoom l With reposition When Opening a New Window Retain Last m Selected colors mM Selected tool M Settings Restore to Defaults Last Values Carel O Detail Show center dot shows a marker in the center of the detail palette Resize Window after scale zoom This setting always adjusts the size of the image window so that the picture fits exactly in the window If for example you re
261. lide show if a folder with alias files is selected Change Filename or the E key without additional key opens a dialog where you can change the filename Use Rotate Left and Rotate Right to rotate pictures If the pixel width is divisible by 16 it is automatically rotated without losses Edit opens the picture in GraphicConverter for editing This stops the slide show Select File Continue Slide show to continue the slide show where you left off 246 Slide show Click the printer icon to print the current picture Clicking the Edit IPTC icon opens the IPTC dialog where you can make entries on the object and the copyright The slide show continues when you close the dialog File Info Caption Keywords Categories Credits Origin Copyright Contact Keywords separated by semicolon Count 4 Tree Forest People Leaves People separated by semicolon Remove EXIF Remove XMP ez C Cancel C OK amp Previous C Kanet EOR Label shows the label of the current picture or Film and allows you to change it In JPG and TIF images the label is also written in the XMP data and is therefore also available in programs like Adobe Bridge If you move the mouse cursor across the screen GraphicConverter will display the Navi gation toolbar for the slide show at the bottom if the Navigation toolbar option is selected in the Preferences part Slide Show General More You can switch to the pre v
262. loki_24_08_02 mow 4 Aug mating use Peeceeee Predigt_1_6_03 mov a a m amp Show All availabie 2 Sort Dy name B Ali S Oh ste Lot 4 items The controls for the movie on the right hand side only appear when you move the mouse cursor over the movie Some digital still cameras can create movies that consist of two files A THM file with the same name is saved containing the information on date and camera type in addition to the actual movie file in AVI format GraphicConverter reads the THM file automatically and displays the information If you rename AVI or CRW files with the Rename option the THM files are also renamed automatically MP2 files can only be displayed if you purchase the MP2 add on for QuickTime from www apple com Rotate left and Rotate right rotate the image counterclockwise or clockwise Slide show displays the selected images as a slide show You do not have to select the pictures The content of subfolders is not included If you select images and folders only they and the respective folder content will be displayed in the slide show 207 The Browser The Print button allows you to print one or more selected pictures If you print just one picture and want to display a preview in the print dialog open the picture by double clicking and select File Print Catalog opens a pop up menu where you can select HTML to create Internet pages on which your pictures are displayed
263. ls in the Browser with Actions Metadata EXIF IPTC Edit complete EXIF you can open a dialog in which you can select and change all EXIF fields To do so click the checkbox at the beginning of the line and click on the value in the right column twice with a short stop in between like you know from renaming files in the Finder If only certain entries are possible you can select one of them from the PopUp Menu e Edit or Add EXIF Data o Add Group Tag Name Property Description Value IFD0 Make Make Canon IFDO Model Camera Model Name Canon EOS 60 IFD0 XResolution X Resolution 300 IFD0 YResolution Y Resolution 300 FDO ResolutionUnit Resolution Unit inches G IFDO Software Software Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 5 3 Mat IFDO ModifyDate Modify Date 2013 12 21 18 14 30 IFDO Copyright Copyright Hagen Henke ExiflFD ExposureTime Exposure Time 0 005 ExiflFD FNumber F Number 13 ExiflFD ExposureProgram Exposure Program Aperture priority AE o ExiflFD ISO iso 160 ExiflFD SensitivityType Sensitivity Type Recommended Exposure Index lt gt ExiflFD RecommendedExposurel Recommended Exposure Index 160 ExiflFD ExifVersion Exif Version 0230 ExiflFD DateTimeOriginal Date Time Original 2013 10 25 10 46 34 ExiflFD CreateDate Create Date 2013 10 25 10 46 34 ExiflFD ShutterSpeedValue Shutter Speed Value 0 00500000065770912 ExiflFD ApertureValue Aperture Value 12 9999980343497 ExiflFD ExposureCompensation Exposure Compensation 0 ExiflFD MaxApertureValue Max Aper
264. lty TIFF files that will no longer open Add XMP file as ANPA resource writes the IPTC data from a separate XMP file to the ANPA resource of the corresponding image file Additional XMP files are written by Pho toshop CS2 if an image is saved in a format like DNG or RAW that does not support meta data The XMP files have the same name as the image file but have the extension xmp As they are split into two files the image file will be easier to read in other operating sys tems under which there is not an ANPA resource However many programs in the Macintosh field in particular cannot read the IPTC data from a separate XMP file This is why GraphicConverter can write the IPTC data from the separate file in the ANPA resource In the list on the left of the Convert dialog select all images and XMP files and convert them to a format that supports IPTC data like TIFF and JPEG for example One advantage of the XMP data is that all content is encoded with Unicode which is useful for example for languages like Japanese GraphicConverter can read the XMP data from the resource fork of PNG files that were written by Photoshop CS 3 or newer 42 Convert amp Modify The following diagram shows how image files are built on a Mac Data fork When you copy image files from a Mac to Windows the resource fork appears as a file of its own beginning with a _ as name When you copy image files from
265. m Embedded Path you can create an alpha channel from a path stored in the picture This function is also available as a batch The Picture Colors Change to Sepia function is now also available as a batch The settings document and the folder with batches etc can be displayed in the Finder via the Help menu since they are located in the library that is no longer displayed under Mac OS 10 7 The pre installed Xe847 plug in can be used via the Filter menu for color corrections The filter Xe847 Automatic is free but has no dialog for adjustments You need to purchase a license for the filter Xe847 with dialog which will also cover the Pure Carbon plug in that you can use to fine tune the contrast and brightness of different grays during black and white conversions Drag the control ball from the center towards the color on the edge of the circle that you want to filter the picture with For example drag the ball to the yellow area to achieve the same effect as a yellow filter on the lens The names of the alpha channel options have been improved The option for printing all pictures from multipage image files has been added to the dialog for printing catalogs Numerical sorting is now used for switching to the previous or next picture In Preferences Slide Show General under Keyboard you can select with which number keys you want to set labels or ratings It is also possible to use the number keys to move files to the sort folde
266. mage during export from GraphicCo nverter If you want to send a picture as an e mail attachment to a Windows user limit the file extension to three characters for example name jpg Select the Save web ready without resource option when saving Resource saving can be disabled under Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences in the Save Resource Fork section The file is then saved without resource as this can cause problems under Windows Files with out resource do not have a thumbnail in their icon If you receive an e mail from a Windows user that has a compressed file named Win mail dat attached you will be able to open this file with GraphicConverter All readable images it contains will be opened in a multiple page document You should compress images in CMYK mode before sending by e mail as e mail pro grams cannot show CMYK mode images correctly The file is transferred correctly but appears completely black or with the wrong colors in the e mail program preview If the recipient opens this kind of file in GraphicConverter or another program that supports CMYK mode the colors will be displayed correctly again Alternatively you can convert the pictures into RGB mode before sending by e mail Picture Mode RGB Color 72 Pictures for your mobile phone The picture data needs to be encoded when you send pictures as e mail attachments since only normal letters and numbers are allowed in e mails 7 bit A s
267. mage folder The filename corresponds with the image filename The extension is changed to XMP If you want to change part of the IPTC information for several pictures or for a large col lection of pictures select them in the browser click Find and Replace IPTC Data Find and Replace IPTC Metadata _ fs Replace with You can t undo this operation Please apply it only to a backup copy of your files _ Cancel Coa Therefore you can for example search for Agency X after your company name has changed and replace it with the new name Picture agency Y General Change Resolution Value lossless lets you change the resolution for example from 72 dpi to 300 dpi without saving the picture again There is then no loss in quality 225 The Browser You can rotate JPEGs in the browser without any quality loss using the context menu if the graphic width can be divided by 16 This means that you cannot open the graphic as you normally would Digital cameras create pictures whose width can be divided by 16 so that the automatic JPEG compression is optimized A message appears if the picture width cannot be divided by 16 If a JPEG is modified and then saved as for example a TIFF the normal rotate option can be used because the file suffers no additional quality loss when saved The comment can be edited without losses using Edit Comment the context menu in the browser Image files in Photo Raw format
268. mand for deleting images from the drop area added Backspace cannot be used as it deletes the image file Improved functions A warning message appears if more than 10 files are opened from the browser When the Search and Replace Color dialog is open you can click the image to select the colors The Move to Folder command no longer stops the slide show 289 New in GraphicConverter 7 3 Memory and color info in the information palette improved The Number of files and Zoom level display details have been added to the slide show EXIF tool updated Backspace and Delete can be used during a slide show The preview picture of films is removed after 10 of the film Print dialog greatly improved A selection is moved by 5 pixels with Shift s New in GraphicConverter 7 3 Suport for Mac OS 10 7 Lion autosave fullscreen mode The folder GraphicConverter with color profiles and saved batches etc was moved as a preparation for Mac OS X 10 7 Lion from Library Application Support GraphicConverter to Documents GraphicConverter Please note This folder was moved back to the former location in GraphicConverter 7 3 1 see below in the paragraph on versin 7 3 1 XMP files of RAW files can be copied into the RAW files This makes sense for further processing in other programs which are able to process RAW files with XMP data inside Copy as data URI in the submenu of Edit Copy copies the picture content in Base 64 codi
269. mation portrait format pictures will be rotated without losses upon importing if the Rotate JPGs upon EXIF option is enabled If the file date does not coincide with the date in the EXIF information the date from the EXIF information will be set for the file in the computer You should leave Add File Icon and Preview to Images disabled as a preview is no lon ger required in the resource these days Modern computers are fast enough to create pre views in the required size with the Mac OS Corelmage technology whenever necessary The resource is therefore no longer needed which means that compatibility with other operating systems is increased You can select Delete Images from Camera after Download to delete the pictures once they have been imported You can enable Embed ICC Profile by clicking Select Profile to select a color profile The selected profile will be attached to all images upon import as many cameras do not include the profile with the pictures to make the files smaller You do not need to embed the sRGB profile as GraphicConverter automatically uses the corresponding profile when ColorSync Edit Assign Profile is enabled if it is included in the EXIF information of the image file as a color model Apply Stored IPTC allows you to add IPTC information which has previously been entered and saved in the IPTC dialog to the image during import We recommend using this function if you have a general term for all of the pictures lik
270. milar to JPG format but has poorer image quality with the same file size and can contain metadata in newer versions only Therefore write your copyright visibly in the image Option added to display the color under the mouse cursor and its coordinates at the bottom of the image frame File Merge Folder into One Image allows you to also calculate the maximum value via the submenu which can be useful for example for astronomical pictures to show the paths of stars If the images from a camera or a memory card in a card reader are displayed in the browser you can select the import options at the bottom right of the browser In the File menu Browse Recent allows you to open one of the last used browsers via a submenu If you click and hold the Dock icon a menu with GraphicConverter functions appears All sizes are available for the Apple Touch icon upon saving Select the format Apple iOS Icon Set and click Options Command Option Tab switches to the next window Option for enlarging small previews added Option to display hidden files in the browser added Option to display all files except for RAWs in the browser added Option to disable anti aliassing for text added When opening an image from the clipboard with Command J you can chose whether the image should be opened as TIFF or PNG Option to reload the file list at the end of a slide show added Copy transparent with background color option added Context menu com
271. move Margins Settings Unit pixel Background Color which will be used for filling of all added area 2790 0 00 0 00 4186 Margins 0 00 Type in the number for each margin in the selected unit Positive values add to and negative values subtract from the margins Cancel 0K If the picture should be enlarged on the right hand side for example enter the corre sponding value in the box to the right of the gray square At the same time you can add a margin on one side and delete the margin on another To delete enter negative values for example 30 Background allows you to select the color for the added areas Scale with last Values If you want to scale several pictures with the same values this option saves you having to repeat entries Select Picture Size Scale with last Values to display the last values used in the Scale dialog and enter new values there or use them without changes Burn In Using Picture Size Burn in you can create a file from a picture as displayed on the screen enlarged or reduced If the current zoom level for display is 50 for example this option reduces the picture to half size The display is then set to 100 since the picture is 116 Picture size an example then always displayed unzoomed This function is particularly useful if you want to quick ly reduce a picture to 50 for example Scale to main desktop size This option scales the current pictu
272. move this rectangle with the mouse to change the section shown in the picture window The Detail palette shows the section marked as an enlargement The zoom factor can be selected in the lower left corner using the minus and plus but tons and is displayed next to the plus button You can change the size of the palette using the handle at the bottom right Keywords GraphicConverter supports certain Keywords entered on the Comment tab in the Infor mation window Some programs use these keywords to sort pictures or to search for pic tures The keywords should be entered in the Comment box as in the following example OWNER Thorsten Lemke COPYRIGHT 1998 DESCRIPTION Row of houses on canal bank 60 Work Environment The following table shows how the keywords should be entered in the GraphicCon verter Comment box and their counterparts in TIFF and VPB formats GraphicConverter Keyword TIFF VPB TITLE Not available Title OWNER Artist 315 Owner CATEGORY Not available Category DATE Date 306 Date TIME Not available Time DESCRIPTION Description 270 Description COPYRIGHT Copyright 0x8298 Not available HOST Host 316 Not available SCANNER Scanner 272 Not available SCANNERMAKER Scanner Make 271 Not available SOFTWARE Software 305 Not available The numbers are the tag IDs in TIFF format A complete comment is always saved in the GIF JPEG and TGA formats The metadata
273. n Date creates a Folder named after the year in which it creates a folder namend after the month in which it creates a folder for the day in which the files are moved The date is taken from the EXIF data If there is none it will be taken from the IPTC data If there is none too the date of the file will be used In the Mac App Store version of GraphicConverter you can now register to receive upgrade offers from us Files in snagproj format can be opened In the dialog for the EXIF data you can now enable or disable every entry field singly by a checkbox to not change all fields with every edit If you have data in Microsoft s SkyDrive or in Amazon s Cloud Drive you can display these directly in the browser by selecting SkyDrive or Cloud Drive in the left section In Convert amp Modify you can select Combine Files with Same Index to PDF as Function in the upper left section to combine files with same pattern index into a PDF file Such files result from sonographic devices in medical technology for example If there is the number of the patient at the beginning of the file s name followed by a seperating character then for every patient a PDF file is being created Die Befehle Vor im Browser und Zur ck im Browser sind unter Bearbeiten Navigation jetzt getrennt von den Befehlen zum Blattern um eine Seite The commands Forward in Browser and Back in Browser now are seperated in Edit Navigation from the commands for scolling F
274. n be used to create an additional alpha channel that is completely black to begin with If you receive an image to which you want to add an alpha channel that is saved in another image you can copy the alpha channel into the target picture via the clipboard Open the source image select everything with Command A and copy the contents with Command C Next switch to the target image and insert the alpha channel with Edit Paste Paste into Alpha Channel If you open a picture with an alpha channel but do not achieve the desired effect this could be because the alpha channel needs to be inverted first Select Picture Alpha Channel Invert Alpha Channel or Picture Invert Alpha Channel 198 Layers If you delete parts of the picture with the eraser tool deleting is also carried out in the alpha channel If you draw a line a circle or a rectangle in a picture it is also drawn in the alpha chan nel Disable the Draw in alpha channel too option if you do not want to draw in the alpha channel E Size from Center Clip to image size E Use backcolor to fill and forground color to frame Antialias Draw in alpha channel too Open the options dialog by double clicking one of the tools The preferences apply to all drawing tools Layers In GraphicConverter you can now use layers in pictures Layers are like overlayed trans parent films It is not yet possible to save the layers You can use layers for example to pr
275. n folder in new browser opens a folder in a new browser window Enable Focal length calculated to 35 mm if you want to display the focal length under the thumbnail calculated as a value for a camera with 35 mm film Google Earth Speed allows you to select how quickly the virtual camera in Google Earth flies towards the destination 240 The Browser Context Menu Show copyright URL entry Enable this option to display the function Open Copyright URL in Webbrowser in the context menu If a picture contains a valid web address like for example http www lemkesoft com in the URL box of the IPTC information the additional function Open Copyright URL in Webbrowser will appear in the context menu of the open picture allowing you to display the corresponding Internet page in the Internet browser Enter all filename extensions that you want to ignore in the Ignore Extensions box Files with these extensions are not displayed in the browser This option is useful for fold ers that contain Web pages or text files in addition to graphics The excluded file types are also ignored during the search for duplicate files Edit Find Compare and Replace Find Duplicate Files Allow Extensions leave empty to show all allows you for example to enter only JPG JPEG TIF TIFF in order to only display the files that have one of these extensions Use a space as the separator As soon as you enter one extension the ignore list will no longer count Yo
276. n of image X resolution Y resolution Resolution unit File date and time Y and C positioning Exi Exposure time F number Exposure program ISO speed rating Exif version Date and time o data generation Unknown tag 36868 Meaning of each component Shutter speed Aperture Exposure bias Metering mode Flash Lens focal length Supported Flashpix version Color Space Valid image width in pixel Valid image height in pixel Focal plane x resolution Focal plane y resolution Focal plane resolution unit Custom image processing Exposure method White balance Scene capture type Canon EOS 5D 1 72 0 ppi pixel per inch 72 0 ppi pixel per inch inch 2009 10 31 13 16 14 co sited f IFD 1 800 s 16 0 Normal program 800 0221 2009 10 31 13 16 14 2009 10 31 13 16 14 reserved 9 6 APEX 1 790 s 8 0 APEX F16 0 0 0 Pattern Flash did not fire compulsory flas 125 0 mm 0100 sRGB 4368 2912 3086 9 873600 283 ppi pixel p 3091 3 1456000 471 ppi pixel inch Normal process Auto exposure Auto white balance Standard Interoperability IFD Interoperability Index Interoperability Version R98 0100 GraphicConverter displays any information that can be found in the Comments tab if a manufacturer does not adhere to the standard for EXIF information The EXIF information can be copied to the clipboard with Copy EXIF as Text in the E
277. n select variants of the tool from a bubble that opens at the side You can switch between the individual tools using the keyboard For example pressing V selects the text tool You can disable this option in the Preferences under General Edit You can check which letter is assigned to which tool in the tips that appear if you hold the mouse cursor over a tool for a moment To let you use the key shortcuts for the tools even when the tools palette is hidden these are listed in a submenu in the Window menu 53 Work Environment The Pointer serves for pinpointing picture features during presentations and for shift ing selected contents in layers Select the Hand tool to move the picture section if the image does not fit completely in the window Alternatively while you are working with a different tool you can hold down the spacebar to switch to the Hand tool You can use the Lasso to select an object with an irregular shape for example a flower As soon as you release the mouse button a line is drawn from the current position to the starting position enclosing the selection For more details see page 155 Polygon Selection allows you to copy a contour with a series of mouse clicks to create a selection Close the selection by pressing return regardless of the mouse cursor posi tion For more details see page 156 Selection allows you to define a square selection If you need a specific aspect ratio you can select one at t
278. n use this function for example for images from an infrared camera that only contains information in the red channel The other channels are discarded and you will see a grayscale picture In the pop up menu under Convert and Modify Extract Keywords allows you to write all keywords from the selected pictures in an alphabetically sorted text file named keywords txt The file is saved in the picture folder and can contain all characters from the UTF 8 standard In the Preferences under Browser Thumbnails you can specify that XMP changes are not indicated by a small icon with an eye XMP changes are for example written into picture files for example by Lightroom or in a satellite file with the same name and the extension XMP if you save the optimizations for example the brightness in Lightroom with Command S During the slide show you can zoom into and out of the picture with gestures on a trackpad Clicking the rotate icon at the top of a thumbnail opens a dialog where rotating can be done according to EXIF The rating for a picture can be selected in the Operator and in the slide show toolbar In the Preferences under Browser Misc you can select a folder that is always opened when the program is launched In the Preferences under Browser General Use EXIF Preview if available makes GraphicConverter use any EXIF previews present in the images for display in the browser Old PictureClippings can be opened in 64 bit These
279. n_IMG_0134 jpg C Make filenames Windows compatible IMG_ 0135 jpg Celebration_IMG_0135 jpg C Change extension IMG_0171 jpg Celebration_IMG_0171 jpg Use ge file form Choose Presets Clear All Cancel C Rename If you want to insert the name of the parent folder in the filename enter amp parent in the respective box without the inverted commas 36 Convert amp Modify Like in word processing programs Find and Replace allows you search for spaces and replace them with underscore characters to make the filenames suitable for use on the Internet Change case to changes all letters to UPPERCASE or to lowercase Title Case and Sentence case changes the first letter of each word or each sentence to an uppercase let ter Make filenames UNIX and Web compatible Make filenames Mac OS 8 9 compati ble or Windows compatible modifies the filenames so that they can be used under UNIX on the Internet under Mac OS 8 9 or Windows without any problems You can choose between only lowercase and lower and uppercase for UNIX and Web Change extension allows you to change the extension for example from jpg to tif if the extension has been set incorrectly Select Depending on image file format if exten sions are incorrect and you want them to be set correctly Index Select Change existing on the Index tab to change an existing index In our example we want to raise the index by 1 so 0114 becomes 0115 and so on Enter 1 as Off
280. nagement with Profiles and ColorSync have greater performance and can display larger color spaces The monitors on some devices today in particular low cost notebooks can still not even display all colors in the sRGB color space Professional monitors for example from Eizo can display about 97 of the Adobe RGB color space as shown by the triangle in the following diagram 0 9 0 8 ee 0 3 04 05 06 07 08 X Source Juanjfb through Wikipedia The top corner reaches considerably far into the green area but also into the blue yel low and orange hues the color space goes further than the sRGB color space which makes bright colors for example on yellow flower petals look considerably more natural If a hue cannot be depicted in a color space the closest hue will be used A bright yellow will then usually become a dull yellow As only very expensive printers can display color profiles that are larger than the sRGB color profile it is only worthwhile using the Adobe RGB color space if the pictures are dis played on high performance monitors or are printed on professional printers that are as close as possible to the Adobe RGB color space Almost all print services exclusively use the sRGB color space The photo service provider Saal is an exception and provides a pro file for their development http www saal digital de If you have a standard workflow from the digital camera to printing or want to use the imag
281. nd click Go Rename Files can be systematically renamed with Rename For example this option is useful if you want to use pictures that were individually saved using video software for another program Filenames such as DSCN5120 jpg consist of three parts The numbering is 35 Convert amp Modify named the Index The first part is called Name and everything after the period is called Extension Select the files you want to rename in the list on the left and click Go A dialog opens in which the OK button cannot initially be selected as one of the options needs to be enabled first In the right hand part of the dialog the filenames before and after are displayed with the current settings If identical filenames will result they will be displayed in red to warn you The Clear All button allows you to clear all check boxes on all tabs if for example you want to start over again At the bottom of the dialog you will see a pop up menu that allows you to save the cur rent settings in the dialog and use them later on Click Save current settings as and enter a suitable name in the dialog that opens After clicking OK the saved settings will appear in the pop up menu and are then available for selection Save current settings allows you to save the current settings in the selected set of settings that you have modi fied Delete current settings deletes a set of settings Name amp Extension The Change Name option rep
282. nd of margin is often created when the rectangle used in the scanner software to select the area to be scanned is made larger If the picture has a different structure than a picture with a typical black margin for example an error message will be issued The background color is used as the search color for the margin In the context menu you can use Count Pixels of Selection to display the number of pixels in a selection Selection Tool Rectangular selections can be made with the selection tool at the top right of the tool box If you cannot see the toolbox you can call it up by selecting Window Toolbox from the menu Hold down the mouse button and drag the cursor to form a rectangle Select the aspect ratio in advance in the pop up menu at the bottom of the toolbox If you do not want a fixed aspect ratio select None An elliptic selection can be made with the Elliptic Selection tool which can be selected by clicking and holding the tool for the rectangular selection Holding down the Shift key at the same time creates a circular selection 151 Selection The size and thus indirectly the position of a rectangular selection can be changed using the handles If you want to move the entire selection click outside the selection directly besides the selection line If you click inside the selection you move the content If you prefer to move just the selection by clicking into it you can select Preferences General Selection
283. nd with the extension xmp If you display a JPG or RAW image with a separate XMP file that contains instructions in the XMP data in the Browser with GraphicConverter this will be indicated in the Browser preview by a symbol We recommend exporting this kind of picture from Lightroom to begin with unless you want to edit an unedited file with a program other than Lightroom or ignore the instructions Under Preferences Slide Show Misc Tiled display allows you for example to display small pictures tiled to check the effect as a background picture for a Web site If you start a slide show with File Slide Show or Command D the file selection dialog opens where you can select which picture the slide show should begin with You can also select a random order During a slide show you can zoom into and out of the picture with the trackpad by moving two fingers apart or together In the pop up menu for the text tool fonts the text is displayed with its own font to make selection easier The text toolboxes open when the text tool is selected When unskewing the handles can be set to the outermost corners of the pictures with Option Delete Control Delete returns the handles to their initial position On the Keywords tab in the IPTC dialog the number of keywords that have already been entered is displayed at the top right This is useful if you prepare pictures for agencies that require at least 40 keywords for example Via the con
284. ng it at the corresponding angle in the scanner Do not rotate the picture several times Return to the original version by selecting Edit Undo and try again The Other Value with Line and Other Value with live Rotation options do not open a dialog at present Drag the helper line across a line in the picture that should be 129 Rotate vertical or horizontal A dialog where you can check or modify the angle and the algo rithm opens Rotate Angle 3 94518 gt Use Quartz 2D Use internal algorithm more accurate but much slower orrect r Add Alpha Channel _ Auto crop white margins for small angles Keep proportions Values positive rotate counterclockwise negative rotate clockwise Cancel i GraphicConverter s own algorithm is a lot slower but provides better results than QuickTime The Error Correction option should always be selected because each pixel is calculated on the basis of the exact color content of the source pixel This improves the picture quality especially around the edges If you select Add Alpha Channel an alpha channel with the picture is created without the corners added by the rotate action This alpha channel can be used in DTP programs to hide the corners against a colored back ground for example GraphicConverter updates the alpha channel after any further rotate processes Once an alpha channel has been created you cannot create another one Auto crop white margin
285. ng to the clipboard This makes sense for small pictures in HTML Code of web pages or HTML e mails as the data has not to be read from the web server to display the picture Import and Export of HTC splashscreens rgb565 added Preference for display of start dialog in case it had been disabled Please note This feature is no longer available in GraphicConverter 8 or newer as color palette technology is not possible in Cocoa programming environment Use Picture Colors Edit Color Table on grayscale and palette pictures to color them with custom colors Define a start and an end color by clicking the first or last color and enter the values for red green and blue Click Create Gradient and OK to color the picture AAI Import added The preview in the right hand section of the browser is normally displayed from soft to 290 New in GraphicConverter 7 3 1 sharp To avoide that disable Preferences Browser Preview Show cached preview first The preview will be displayed a little later but sharp from the beginning More presets in Picture Size submenu for web designers Shortcut Command Shift O for open with program in browser added The dialog for editing color palette displays unused colors by a black field with a small red square in the upper left corner You can for example click one of the fields to define a color for text you want to add Pictures can be exported to Outlook 2011 PDS import improved DCM import update
286. nly Image files in Photo Raw format may also contain a JPEG version of the image that you can export with Extract JPG from Photo Raw PhotoRAW only Convert to Photostrip compiles all pictures in a horizontal strip 33 Convert amp Modify Multiscale allows you to scale images to different sizes by clicking them This is a use ful tool for product photos that appear in online shops Multiscale Size Sharpen Add to Name 370x535 with crop 5 _x50 Method Scale proportional to Width and H 180x260 with crop 5 _x60 Size 275x398 with crop 5 _x85 85x123 with crop 5 _x180 Sharpen 60x87 with crop 5 _x275 Add to Name 880x1272 with 5 _x370 150x50 with crop 5 x880 Note enter subfolder as folder name in the add to name field Append addition at the end Append addition before last Convert to sRGB Use JPG for all sizes Use GIF first size and JPG for all others Use PNG for all sizes Format Options JPG GIF PNG Open Save Cancel OK Using as many lines as you require define the target size a sharpening value and a name extension The extension for the name can be added at the end or before the last occurrence of the character entered in the box Method allows to select a method for scaling Scale exactly to Size Scale proportional to Width and ignore Height Scale proportional to Height and ignore Width v Scale proportional to Width and Height with cropping Fit into Box proportional maybe one Side smaller S
287. not re compressed when rotated in 90 degree steps and there are no qual ity losses Do not modify EXIF data ensures that the camera specific EXIF data for example the maker is not deleted If the EXIF data is re written it will be more compatible however Do not warn suppresses all warnings about quality losses when you rotate pictures whose pixel width cannot be divided by 8 or 16 due to the coding for example after they have been cropped You should disable Label Write in XMP metadata if the labels do not have to be com patible with Photoshop CS2 as the labels can be set considerably faster in this way Enable IPTC Write into NEF files if you want to write the IPTC metadata in your NEF files This can be useful if you want to pass on NEF files and if the recipient cannot read the XMP file with the metadata An XMP file is always created if you enter IPTC data You can use RAWs Create THM if the THM files are missing because for example they have been deleted or were not included in an import The files will be written as soon as the folder is displayed in the browser Keyboard Space key does toggle QuickLook causes GraphicConverter to behave like the Finder and opens or closes a medium sized quick preview of the picture Alternatively you can specify that the Space key toggles between the orange label and no label 238 The Browser In the pop up menu underneath you can specify whether the keys 1 5 should set the rat
288. nt to enlarge a person s face click the face until it is displayed large enough To reduce hold down the Option key and click the pic ture You can also drag a rectangle across the area which is to be enlarged The zoom level is selected so that the rectangle content fills the window The rectangle therefore automat ically has the same proportions as the window If you select very high zoom levels such as 1000 to edit individual pictures it may become difficult to see the individual pixels in single color areas You can therefore select the Show pixel bounds options in the General Edit section of the Preferences to dis play a thin black line around the edges of the pixels These lines are not part of the picture and are not saved in the picture file The maximum zoom is 5000 169 Levels Levels Summary By selecting Picture Levels you can modify the levels for white black and midtones Picture Auto Levels has the same effect as clicking Both in the Levels dialog Each normal photograph contains lighter and darker areas The levels form the path be tween the lightest and darkest points The further these points are apart the better the picture looks Which brightness levels occur how frequently in the picture is shown in a diagram in the Levels dialog under Input Levels Levels Picture Before Output Levels 0 Bo Auto Levels Both Black White Tolerance 0 50 a ran Apply to all frames _last V
289. nverter 0c cece cece eee ence een cence ence nennens 118 Using the Stamp for Touching Up cece cece cence eee e nent e nent ennennenes 119 Importing Pictures from Digital Cameras ccc cece cee cence ene ence eneenes 120 TAMMING fs sas dy ne eel wees estat ata tas ale EE boa eee eae pula aaa eateries 124 Rotate 9 cccteys section wwe acon Moya eon A ana ek eared Ase Gow E ath team E AE 125 Unsharp Mask and Sharpen Edg S cece cence eee ene nee ence nent ennenee 131 Enhance local Contrast onae sans oes ae ahaa ees bees Oe Se EAE EES Sa 134 Brightness Contrast Saturation 2 334 204534454085 Gand dawaiow haan bebe wea tiaa tes 135 Vignetting COMe CtOMN seoser i i a ila aes ee ee ete So 137 OperatOl eonna t DnE EEEE Pea dea E oni eh T scene dae wade asad 138 Color Corretto N a oy anaoa daniel ganar R T aA E N oh oh Ea A T a ENER 141 Color Management with Profiles and ColorSync cece cece een e ences 142 Selection ss Baits oh conchae ed e a et as wis ae ieee heer eee eiei 150 REMOVING R d EVES nuso rear ces an cea teendeven AE ai caterawad vane aS 158 VIAT O daGuceteacabedus tex woass ane hatauneede weed dak wlaceuewsa haute ce 161 RGB aNd EMYR heia aaar T EOR arcane T TEE ol T A A 161 Transparent 445 2 ned once gcteaed tena ra E Wa a Ea aa E a E EA Conk aed N i 166 ZOOM a n E R E E A i ore Sees E EEE A E E HN E E OE R A 167 kev lS i modi morientes r E ad cat yaa eed ween ea a a cee delaras 170 Colors
290. nverter Do not forget to return to 64 bit mode after the conversions GraphicConverter is signed for Gatekeeper Under Mac OS 10 8 Mountain Lion you can specify in System Preferences Security amp Privacy that only programs with Gatekeeper signature can be installed to increase protection against malware Photoshop compatible plug ins can be used if you do not need Photoshop functions Install the plug ins under the path Library Application Support GraphicConverter Plug ins Under Effect Channels Frames you can use Split Red into Same Window to make the red channel the picture content The content of the channel is displayed as a grayscale image The other channels are deleted Split Blue or Green display the respective channels This is useful for example to make scanned in ancient papyri easier to read with Split Red In the Preferences under General Misc you can disable the Use decimal style for Numbers in Dialogs The number 1 000 50 will then be displayed as 1000 50 Text can be inserted from the clipboard using the menu or Command V when you use the text tool In the Preferences under Browser Thumbnails the Date Style can be set long or short so that it fits under large or small thumbnails In the Preferences under General Edit you can use Disable Double click for cropping selection to specify that a double click in a selection does not crop the picture Cropping is then only possible with Return In the Pre
291. nvolution is particularly interesting for artists art experts and perception psychologists You will find more information on the Internet at http math1 uibk ac at liedl 188 Color Permutations Color Rotation by 15 Degrees Clockwise All colors are moved 15 degrees clockwise in this color permutation The change compared with the original can hardly be seen but the effect is increased when you apply the filter several times Applying it five times results in a total rotation of 75 degrees and the changes become more noticeable Centric Involution Centric involution replaces all colors with their complementary colors As the values for S and V are not changed this is not the same as invert which would create a color negative 189 Color Permutations Complete inversion is available in the Picture menu Centric involution corresponds with a color rotation of 180 degrees Cold Warm involution swaps all cold colors for warm colors and vice versa Yellow green and purple colors are unchanged the results are similar to chromatic involution The involution axis is turned clockwise slightly but starting from yellow violet unlike chromatic involution 190 Color Permutations Isothermal Involution Isothermal involution keeps cold colors cold and warm colors warm Orange red and turquoise blue colors the sea are not changed Yellow green colors are replaced with violet hues however Involution around th
292. o Defaults Last Values X Cancel ox Date Keep original after conversion leaves the original date after the file conversion The filenames for multiple conversion or copying can generally be changed with the Index options that can be selected in the preferences under Convert Index You can also use the Rename option for this You can convert files at the same time more easily if you change the index in the filename using the Index Settings in the Preferences This is useful when pictures that may have been saved as individual pictures from a video using a grabber program are the source material These pictures may have unsuit able filenames for further editing For example Name_001 jpg or similar Name stands for any part of the filename The number is increased by one for each of the subsequent pictures For example Name_002 jpg etc The numbering should for example be at the start of the filename if these pictures are to be put together for a movie with Adobe Premiere Enable Index conversion to automatically move the numbering to the start of the file name Specify how many digits the numbering should have with Minimal Digits Num ber If you specify five digits the first picture has the number 00001 47 Convert amp Modify For example if you specify three digits and the source pictures have a five digit number ing GraphicConverter will then delete the first two digits The name within the files can be chang
293. o the other respective area This is useful if 224 The Browser you want to continue work with the data in another program that can only display one of the areas Copy file name to object name is recommended when you have files with descriptive filenames for example Forest jpg and want to copy the filename to the IPTC object description The file extensions are left out You can also use this option for several selected files and for complete folders Copy file name to caption copies the document name to the IPTC description Use Copy Filename to End of Caption if the Caption box already contains text that should not be deleted Copy EXIF date to IPTC date simplifies your work if you want to transfer the EXIF date to the IPTC data You can use Copy Windows EXIF Tags to IPTC if you receive pictures that have been indexed by the Microsoft Windows Explorer Windows Explorer enters the keywords in a non standard EXIF section GraphicConverter recognizes these entries and moves them to the corresponding fields in the IPTC section with this option Copy Spotlight comment to IPTC caption copies the spotlight comment to the IPTC caption In the same way Copy Spotlight comment to IPTC keywords copies the spot light comment to the IPTC keywords We do not recommend working with spotlight com ments since they are not included when you send a file by e mail for example Create XMP Sidecar File creates an XMP file with the XMP data in the i
294. oduce collages from several pictures Select Picture New and create a new picture that is large enough to accommodate your content and has the right aspect ratio Select a suitable color for the background for example beige and color in the background with the fill tool Open the layers palette via the Window menu and insert a new layer with the plus sign x Layers fe Layer 1 2 Pa e Layer E u Background Layer E ka Copy the content of the other picture by opening it selecting everything with Com mand A and copying with Command C You can also select part of the picture for exam ple with the lasso Insert the copied content into the new picture with Command V and position it as required Continue with further layers and content until your collage is fin ished To move the content of the layers again click the required layer on the layer pal ette 199 Text in Pictures You can change the order of the layers with the mouse This is useful if there are overlaps Clicking the eye symbol on the right of the layer palette allows you to hide the content of the respective layer Clicking the transparency symbol you can change the opacity of the layer Clicking the gear at the bottom right of the layer palette takes you to most func tions of the Layer menu New Layer creates a new layer Duplicate Layer creates a new identical layer Delete Layer deletes the selected layer Merge Layers makes one layer out o
295. of writing it in the image files as is the standard Use this option to write IPTC data from the Descript ion file in the image files whenever necessary You will then no longer need the Descript ion file and can delete it 226 The Browser The Submenu Date Open With Finder Open With gt Reveal in Finder Edit Filename Move to Trash Duplicate Make Alias Export gt Metadata EXIF IPTC gt Set Creation to Modification Date Set Modification to Creation Date Move Folders gt Set File Date Rotate Mirror gt Shift File ae Change Folder Date Misc gt p Set Creation to Modification Date is useful when you are editing files that for example have been given an incorrect creation date like 1904 by your scanning software since the modification date is set by the operating system and is therefore often correct Set Modi fication Date to Creation Date allows you to transfer the date in the other direction Set File Date opens a dialog where you can edit the creation date and the modification date Set File Date a Set creation date to 7 11 05 9 09 36 AM _ Set always to mod date mi Set modification date to 6 1 10 10 46 19 AM C Set always to creation date Add Offset to Each File 0 f seconds Cr GD You can use Set always to mod date to change the creation date to the modification date Set always to creation date allows you to change the modification date to the cre ation date Add offset
296. ol clicking the toolbar allows you to customize the toolbar via the context menu for example to add the Delete amp Next icon Drag the required icons onto the toolbar or off it e080 E IMG_3080 JPG RGB a GF en Q 2 eGoes Options Adjust Previous Next Save amp Next Share Label Drag your favorite items into the toolbar A ea lt Options Adjust Space Flexible Space Previous Next gt e eGosessuse amp va 2 Save amp Next Delete amp Next Label Rotate Right Rotate Left Share or drag the default set into the toolbar Z P lt Q 2 eGoeeae Options Adjust Previous Next Save amp Next Share Label Show icon and Text Use small size Done Delete amp Continue deletes the current picture and goes to the next one Label shows the current label and allows you to select another label Before you work with the operator you should select the settings by clicking Options Options Drawing Show grid during rotation M Crop white areas from rotated images prior to saving M Keep proportions Saving _ Next Previous save image if modified Change label after save to x aj Format JPEG JFIF JPG JPEG Sy Options Save to source folder Will overwrite original if same format _ Save into sub folder Save to source folder and copy original into sub folder Save onto desktop Trash Delete amp Next permanently deletes the file without moving it to the trash Cancel
297. olders in the Preferences under Folders Move Folder Disable Navigation if you do not want the navigation elements to be displayed when the mouse is moved 249 Slide show If you disable Monitor Fullscreen the slide show will be displayed in a window with a toolbar 000 Slideshow You can display and hide the toolbar by clicking the oval lozenge button Under Mac OS 7 Lion you can hide the toolbar via the context menu You can scale the slide show win dow by dragging the bottom right corner The current picture will be displayed less sharp after enlarging If you switch to the next picture and then back the picture will be dis played sharp Automatically hide and show toolbar only displays the toolbar in fullscreen mode if you move the mouse cursor to the top edge of the screen You need to cross the area where the toolbar appears Darken all screens is useful on systems with several monitors because the other moni tors could be distracting or too bright during a slide show For presentations it may be useful to Show next image on second to aid orientation On systems with several screens you can specify which monitor is the main screen in the Primary Screen pop up menu The resolution is indicated to help you identify the monitor 250 Slide show Keyboard You can select with which number keys you want to set labels or ratings It is also possible to use the number keys to move files to the sort folders
298. olution The pictures gradually become finer as the data is transferred MITA nd ELIRHARLHIHE Most Web designers prefer this method as if the Internet connection is slow an overall impression quickly emerges after you open a page and the constantly refined pictures have the effect of an animation to a certain extent Note that there are limitations when the Web site uses tables as tables are usually only displayed when they have been com pletely transferred Save your pictures for this display type in JPEG format and enable the Progressive option in the Save as dialog under Options or in GIF format and switch the Row Order option to Interlaced in the Save as dialog under Options or in PNG format and enable the Adam 7 option in the Save as dialog Note that not all WYSIWYG HTML editors can process every variant when you are creat ing Web sites Minimizing the File Size The size of a file can be affected by different factors File format and compression rate Scope of the color palette Picture size The picture size is dealt with in the chapter on page 78 66 Preparing Pictures for the Internet File Format and Compression Rate Use JPEG GIF or PNG formats for the Internet and select the Save web ready without resource option in the file selection option File Format JPEG JFIF JPG JPEG B Options O l Create LOWSRC M Set Format from Extension mi Save web rea
299. on jpg is missing GraphicConverter will add it automatically Select a JPG quality level for the pictures with Quality for scaled images 208 The Browser Delete all Metadata from JPEGs deletes the preview and the EXIF information along with all other metadata As the preview causes problems with some programs in Win dows we recommend this setting to increase compatibility Add Filename to Image adds a white area to the bottom of the image where the docu ment name is inserted You can select a font and size for the document name Mark images with a red cross adds a red cross to the pictures as copy protection so that they can only be used for demonstration purposes Use this option if you want to show your customers pictures that they can buy from you or you can license for them The source file is not changed Store files always on desktop saves the files on the desktop in a folder which is cre ated automatically Apply batch allows you to edit the images before export using a batch that you previ ously defined in the browser or in the Convert dialog You can add a copyright note for example Choose your e mail program from the pop up menu E Mail with and click E Mail to send the images at the chosen size to your e mail program If you choose a different size to Original temporary files will be created from the scaled images and automatically deleted later on To avoid problems when the recipient wants to print pictures th
300. on directory The preview pictures are saved in this folder Next to Picture Path enter a folder name or leave the default name images A folder with this name is created in the selected destination directory The large pictures are saved in this folder HLINK specifies the color for links that have not yet been clicked VLINK specifies the color for links that have already been clicked Click the boxes under the options to change the colors Title specifies the title of the HTML page that is shown in the window frame and appears as a bookmark when users create a bookmark a favorite for the page Create link from thumbnails to images creates links from the preview pictures to the large pictures This should always be enabled as it never causes any harm and allows for intuitive operation of your Web site Open images with navigation creates pages with the large picture and links to the previous or following pages with large pictures Another link called Index takes you back to the overview Open pictures without navigation creates pages with a direct link to the large picture This is then displayed in the browser window without links to other pages In this case surfers can return to the overview using their browser s Back option 83 Photo Albums on the Internet Catalog Open Images in a new window creates links that display the large picture in a new browser window Leave the target _blank entry in the entry box bel
301. one or more files or a folder whose content should be converted 26 Convert amp Modify by clicking in the previews on the middle section of the Convert And Modify window Files in subfolders are also converted e00 C Auswahl Convert And Modify 0 Function Multiscale Images Destination Format JPEGJJFIF JP Options WWW Ready F Use Batch Batch Table Name Options M Resolution 72x72 ppi 2009 10 _3574 jpq 2009 10 _3574 jpg 2009 10 _3578 jpg 2009 10 _3578 jpg 2009 10 _3585 jpg 2009 10 _3590 jpg 2009 10 _3590 jpg 2009 10 _3593 jpg bl f D remo In the preview section on the right open a target directory where the converted files should be saved Use the pop up menus above the lists or drag and drop the required folders from the Finder to the list sections to select the directories Click the blue arrow above the previews to set the source path as the target path This is useful when the tar get folder is a subfolder of the source folder In this case you only have to open the target folder The desktop should not be selected as the target You can also open pictures in a multiple conversion window for example to check details From version 5 9 2 of GraphicConverter more than 32766 files per folder can be edited Only the Mac OS limits the maximum number
302. only the Finder label will be set Use Set XMP label depending on Finder file label to assign an XMP label to pictures that only have a Finder label The Transfer RAW EXIF Date to JPEG option is intended for images from digital cameras that save a RAW and a JPEG file simultaneously If the JPEG files do not contain EXIF data you can transfer the date from the RAW files to the JPEG file using this option Transfer RAW EXIF Record to JPEG allows you to transfer all EXIF data You can use Combine Folders to a Single PDF to convert several image files into a PDF file The source files can have different formats and are deleted when the PDF file is cre ated All other file types like for example those from movies or Internet pages are not modified and not converted The folder name is used as the filename for the PDF file with the extension PDF The preferences for the target format and the target folder are ignored by this option This option is useful if you want to assign patient numbers to image files for example as a patient number will then only need to be assigned once to the PDF file Fix Lumix FZ20 2GB TIFs repairs TIFF image files that were written incorrectly by the Panasonic camera model Lumix FZ20 44 Convert amp Modify Further Settings for Convert amp Modify In the Convert Misc section of the Preferences you can select how many subfolders out of a maximum of 10 subfolders should be processed in a multiple conversion
303. onvert to Interleaved allows you to convert 3D pictures into interleaved format without modifying the resolution Effect 3D Convert to 1080p Interleaved allows you to convert 3D pictures into Interleaved or Interleaved 1080p as some beamers and monitors require this 1080p means that the pictures are scaled proportionally so that they correspond with the height of Full HD If necessary black bars are added at the edges letterbox Another possibility to view 3D images on a computer monitor is to convert them into Anaglyph Red Cyan or Red Blue via the Effect 3D menu The two images have dif ferent color coding and are copied to an image P1000545 MPO RGB 33 3 OQ od x y 1435 11 rgb 252 216 216 You need a special pair of glasses to view them The disadvantage of the method devel oped in Leipzig by Wilhelm Rollmann back in 1853 is that the colors are not displayed realistically 165 Transparent Transparent For the Internet and also for printing you may need pictures with transparent areas through which something in the background is visible The transparent areas are marked in an alpha channel Newer internet browsers like Safari 3 or FireFox 3 use an alphachan nel for transparency First select the transparent area The transparency tool is in the right hand column of the toolbox you may need to select Picture Show Toolbox If you click a pixel with the transparency tool all ot
304. opens It may be different to the one shown depending on your Mac OS version the screenshot is taken from Max OS X 10 2 e Open a im Bilder 2 Auflage c Favoritos Namo Date Modified Size Kind E Recents cc File Selector Open DE tif m cc Kontext Menue Finder EN tif 2 Dropbox cc Kontext Menue Finder DE tif All My Files cc_context_menu_finder_de tif iCloud Drive cc Graphicc im Mac App Store 5 D tif 1 1 iT M FF cc Volume Image Fenster tif cc EXIF Editor EN tif 30 M 20 23 2M TIFF E Desktop cc EXIF Editor DE tif A M cc Farbbereiche EN tif May 2 42 8 ME FF A Applications S Documents Pn cc Farbbereiche tif aE nagenhenke cc JPEG Optionen D tif y Pictures cc Akt Versch nach QR Code E tif cc Akt Versch nach QR Code D tif Downloads Geo icon tif senfkorn Juni Juli 15 cc Einst Dia Versch E TIF 4 Ne 4 11 14 M IFF J Jahrbuch Werkschule cc Einst Dia Versch D JPG cc Einst Alig Landkarte E JPG cc Einst Allg Landkarte D TIF LensTRUE cc Schieblehre Optionen 2 E JPG man Cahinhinhen Ontinnan 2 9 TIE E Jahrbuch Werkschule File Format All Formats Cancel 16 Starting the Program and Opening a Picture Alternatively you can use the browser option to open files if the small preview icons in the list are too small Select the folder containing the picture you want to open with File Browse Folder A browser window opens where a larger preview of all the pictures can be displayed Open a pictur
305. opens when you select the text tool 200 Text in Pictures The size of the text object adapts itself to the text as you write so that you do not necessarily have to use the handles at the corners You can rotate text via the palette Position To do this switch to the pointer tool and click the text object Click the round control in the palette and turn it like a real control knob You can also enter the angle in the neighboring input box Here it is easier to adjust the control in small steps if you hold down the mouse button move it away slightly from the control and adjust it there The size and the position of the upper left hand corner of the selected object is also displayed in the palette CH Position dss CEE ES g Pie EA 264 pixel Rotated Text 1309 Em RO Pal 117 oas EA KP Angle Gor ig If you click next to a text object a new text object will be created You can edit the different text objects by clicking them and then double click the text to show a cursor The cursor keys move the text frame you can also use the mouse Sankt Laurentius Zu Lorenzkirch Wer nicht liebt der kennt Gott nicht denn Gott ist die Liebe 1 joh 45 201 The Browser All text objects are listed in the Text Objects palette The start of the text in the object is automatically used as a name Click a text object in the list to select it x Text Objects Saint Laurentius Lorenzkirch Delete Flatten
306. or export GPS data Set or export GPS data Not many cameras have a built in GPS receiver that allows your exact position to be writ ten to the EXIF data of the image file when you take a photograph There are additional devices for some camera models that can be connected to the camera and add this func tion GPS trackers provide a good alternative and are often no bigger than a USB stick They write your current position at a selectable time interval to a file without a connection to the camera At the end of a vacation you then transfer this file to the computer and apply the position data to the image files Select the image files in the browser and open the Geo menu B from the menu bar Select the GPX CSV or NMEA file using Open GPX NMEA Files Show GPX NMEA data displays the data in a list so that you can check it Some GPS trackers write a new file in a folder every hour In this case open the folder with Open GPX NMEA Files Use Apply GPX NMEA file to selected images to set the GPS data from the GPX file suitably for the selected images GraphicConverter sets the matching GPS data from the GPX file for the selected images A dialog opens allowing you to select the time zone of the location where you took the photograph if you adjusted the clock in your camera to the local time Timezone Please select the timezone of the exif data in the selected images Timezone UTC WET GMT ry Cancel oK In the GP
307. or the highlights to the left in the Picture Highlights and Shadows dialog When 107 Equalizer trying settings you will soon see that extremely high values will make these areas look unnatural Therefore only use low values Highlights and Shadows Shadows O Highlights M Show Preview Reset Cancel 0K Pictures that have been taken indoors without a flash are a good example for use of this function Often faces that are looking slightly downwards are too dark since the lights on the ceiling are the main source of light This problem can also occur with an indirect flash via the ceiling If you use a flash on the camera the faces of people in the foreground are normally too light Drag the sliders for the highlights slightly to the left in this case If you want to avoid this problem you can position one or more flashes on stands fur ther away from the camera and use a remote release The best results are obtained with good wireless flash triggers like the Yongnuo RF 603 Various types are available for dif ferent cameras at www enjoyyourcamera com Call them for advice if you are interested You can also remote control release your camera simultaneously with a suitable cable connecting the receiver with the camera The TTL data for exposure control is not trans ferred when the flash is triggered by this device Therefore you may need to reduce the flash level manually or adjust the exposure manually The mod
308. ormation their functions are also described Geo Coordinates Images can contain geo data for the location where the picture was taken in the EXIF in formation This is useful if you travel a lot and do not want to or cannot note the location for each image Geo data can also be interesting when you pass on images because the recipient can easily see where the pictures were taken Geo data can be provided by GPS receivers or from the Google map in the Browser s lower right corner or transferred later on from a map or Google Earth 260 Geo Coordinates Google Earth is a free program that displays satellite pictures of the earth You can download Google Earth at http earth google com The earth appears when you start the program Cong Karim Ous sexberen Amih Tosi Venzafigen Hate OG SHE muo Ocoee O At the top left enter the name of a place like Lorenzkirch Germany and press Return The globe then starts to turn and the camera zooms closer to the surface until you see the entered location E Congo tarth Dum mesen Anche 2090 hee Tash OG Ht nun 9an O Google You can move the picture section with the mouse or zoom in further using the plus sign at the top right The GPS coordinates of the mouse cursor are shown at the bottom left Back to GraphicConverter If you want to enter the GPS coordinates of the photo loca tion in the EXIF information of images select the images in the browser show the respe
309. ost pictures Ordered Dither in the Effect Black amp White menu forms a pattern made up of squares You need to select the size of the squares in pixels from a submenu Here is an example of squares with 2x2 pixels 175 Colors Mode and Colorize If you select 4x4 pixels the pattern will become accordingly coarser the squares are so large that their structure enters the foreground L With 6x6 pixels greatly This impression only goes away when you look at the picture from a great dis tance PEETER Y awh h 176 Colors Mode and Colorize You can dither a picture correctly with the Effect Black amp White Dither option Various dither options are available As the dither types have a different effect on each picture you should try out several variations if you are not sure Dither Type _ Darken Linear _ Triangle nnn anno BEA Bene BEE BEE BED ETD Random Matrix Matrix Size 4x4 300dpi Cancel oax Each pixel in the source picture is displayed by a field made up of 4x4 black or white dots for example The size of the field can be selected in the bottom part of the dialog The more pixels you select for the matrix the larger the resolution of the picture in dpi The different possibilities for the field can be set in the dialog using Darken Linear and Triangle to display the different lightness values of the pixels from the source picture as best po
310. ough If a creased white shirt is to be selected the tolerance needs to be set a lot higher to about 70 This technique does have its limits however and you will not always manage to select a reasonably single colored area properly with the Magic Pen Don t give up too soon though Once you ve mastered the Magic Pen you can definitely work faster than with the Lasso Polygon If you want to define a selection exactly around an object you can work with the Polygon tool Hide the Operator by clicking the oval button at the top right of the window if it is displayed Zoom as close as possible into the image and click along the outline of the ob ject at short intervals to produce a line The smaller the intervals the more accurate the selection will be You will not see a point after the first click It will only become visible with the line and the second point after the second click Close the polygon by placing the mouse cursor over the first point and moving the mouse slightly until the cursor changes to a crosshair Now press Return on the keyboard to close the polygon As soon as the polygon is closed it will behave like a selection 156 Selection whose content can be trimmed copied or moved The position of the individual points can now be moved with the mouse Move the mouse over the point until a point appears next to the mouse cursor and then move the point You can also move individual points before you close the polygon
311. ow all points on a map If a picture contains geo data you can add the name of the nearest town and the coun try name to the respective IPTC fields with Reverse Geocoding from the Geo menu Select one of three data files in Preferences General Map by clicking Reverse Geoc oding Settings A dialog opens in which you select the data file Select the larges one for most accuracy If you have less disk space or download capacity a smaller data file may be useful General Pf Sj A A Q path General Open Save Print Slide Show Convert Browser Folders Search Clipboard Display Content Map Options Display Windows Enable Maps Selection Edit External Editors Show current User Location Limit Number of Pins to 100 Image Capture TWAIN Radius 1 00 km Memory for single pins Default Location for Images without GPS Data Misc Latitude 39 116 North Spaas Longitude 106 447 West This values are used from the Add Edit GPS command if the image has no location data Reverse Geocoding Settings Restore to Defaults Last Values Cancel OK You need to download the file only once It is not pre installed as it is comparatively big 350 MB Disable Enable Maps if you do not want to display maps in the lower right corner of the Browser for example to save mobile bandwidth when you are on the way or if you want to tag many files with geo data at once Show current User Location shows your current position on the map Limit Numb
312. ow and delete the resource using the Convert amp Modify dialog The files can then be read by all programs in Windows or other operating systems without any problems You can also use the option if the EXIF preview is too poor or if it was not rotated for portrait pictures Remove EXIF Preview deletes the EXIF preview which is no longer necessary after GraphicConverter has created a normal preview with a better quality Edit or add EXIF data allows you to change the EXIF data for the manufacturer of the camera the model the software or the date Edit Add EXIF Data Maker Model Canon EOS 5D Software File Date 2011 1 22 05 11 07 PM Date format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Cancel OK 223 The Browser You can use Delete Host amp Software correct File Date to delete useless data in JPEG images that were written in the files by other programs Other programs sometimes set their name in the EXIF data When you import images using the program Image Capture the file date is set to the date of the import It is more useful however to use the date when the picture was taken As this does not appear at any other point in the EXIF data GraphicConverter can correct the date If you have imported images with the program Image Capture you should also use the Rotate depending on EXIF option from the same submenu so that portrait pictures are not only displayed correctly in GraphicCon verter but also in screensa
313. ow it Only HTML experts should enter other commands here Set new window bounds to image bounds ensures that the new browser windows displaying the large pictures are the same size as the picture Determine how thick the border should be drawn around the preview pictures with Border This border shows that the picture is a link Normally Web designers do without this edge particularly as the color can be altered by the surfer s browser settings Add Tabs to HTML does not change the appearance of the HTML page but makes it clearer for editing the source text in HTML editors than the disabled lt TD gt lt TD gt in one row option The options are intended to keep the HTML files as small as possible Dis able Add Tabs to HTML and enable lt TD gt lt TD gt in one row to minimize the file size of the HTML page created The effect is only slight however Enable Add Tabs to HTML and disable lt TD gt lt TD gt in one row to create HTML files that are clearly formatted so that they can be easily edited in the source text mode using an HTML editor If you only edit the pages with for example Dreamweaver in preview mode you will not need to format the source text tidily In this case select the smaller files by disabling Add Tabs to HTML and enabling lt TD gt lt TD gt in one row Choose whether linked images should be saved in a new folder in the destination direc tory with Create Images folder All uppercase lette
314. owser Edit you can therefore specify whether the renamed picture should remain selected or whether the next picture should be selected e You can now also determine the difference in brightness and contrast between two colors with the measuring tool This is helpful if for example you want to check a website for W3C conformity Double click the measuring tool with the slide rule and select Contrast Measurement between two Points Now click two points one after the other The information pallet opens automatically and shows the measured values and the differences You can select and copy the text in the information pallet e You can now select a tolerance for finding and replacing colors Edit Find Replace and Compare Find and Replace Colors e Inthe IPTC dialog you can now enter the Origin If the file contains geo information 324 New in GraphicConverter 9 5 you can insert the origin by clicking the button Inverse Geotagging File Info Caption Keywords Categories Credits Origin Copyright Contact Special Instructions l J Date Created 15 Oct 2014 Today City State Province Country Reference Location Inverse Geotagging will fill the fields city country and maybe location depending on the gps location stored in the file Save Open Cancel OK When you export as HTML you can now choose between the name or the EXIF date for sorting In the operator you can now select the original format a
315. owser M Scan image for preview GEM Metafile frets A 3 sal Use low quality image version for preview jee Page When Opening File Show dialog Check this setting to open dialog with image preview where you can make settings for RAW anges PSD Mm Use toolbox if possible sl M Import with deep colors 16 bit per channel if possible Yuv Color Profile Adobe RGB Movie sRGB Restore to Defaults if Last Values Cancel x We recommend working with the Adobe RGB color space because for example deep red hues from red jackets are often displayed in the wrong color by the sRGB color space If you order prints of your pictures from a normal service you will lose this advantage because you have to convert the pictures to the sRGB color space beforehand We there fore recommend using a service like http www saal digital de that supports the Adobe RGB color space If your pictures do not feature any vibrant bright colors you may not notice any difference between an sRGB version and an Adobe RGB version If you want the diagram for a color space to also show the different brightness levels of the hues it will be shown in three dimensions as a cube or a cloud S indicates the black point and W the white point Source Horst Frank through Wikipedia The sRGB color space was developed in 1996 for work with tube monitors and covers the colors that could be displayed by most monitors at the time Today s monitors usually 147 Color Ma
316. owser s context menu you can use the Move Folders defined in Preferences Folders Move Folders With Command F you can open a search function in the Browser New to this is the ability to search for labels When you show a slide show with two monitors or a monitor and a beamer you can choose in the Preferences that on the second monitor instead of the next picture the current is displayed When you work with a Laptop and look to the audience during your presentation you no longer have to turn around to see the current picture Select Preferences Slide Show General More Show on Secondary Screen Same image In the Preferences for the Slide Show you can select Preferences Slide Show General Delete Forward in sorted oder if slide show uses random order If a Slide Show is displayed in random order you go back to normal order after deleting an image so you can work on further pictures of a row easily With Effect Fish Eye you can add the distortion typical for fish eye lenses or take back the distortions of pictures taken with a real fish eye lens With Filter Four Colors you can color pictures similar to Pop Art The picture is devided into four brightness levels You can assign a color to every level and adjust the level In Preferences Browser Misc you can select Quick Look Use Full Screen Preview so instead of the small preview a full screen preview is displayed when you hit the space key In this full screen pr
317. paper size that you are using If your printer can print with out margins select the borderless version of the format from the submenu 92 Printing You should preferrably select landscape format for landscape format pictures and por trait format for portrait format pictures as the Orientation If you select GraphicConverter in the center pop up menu the following options will be available The Image Size and Fit to Page options both influence the size of the printed image pinter Presets Standard a Copies iti Collated Pages All O From 1 to 1 GraphicConverter be Image Size Original Size O Scale to Fit O Custom Scale Image Position Absolute Centered B Fit to Page Scale Behavior for printing images that are larger than the page PDF v Cancel Print Image Size Original Size prints the picture in the original size With most digital pho tos this means that only part of the image is printed If Fit to Page Scale is simultane ously selected further down the paper format will still be filled however Image Size Customer Scale also scales the image to the full page Fit to Page Overlap allows you to print an image very large in tiles on several individ ual pages that you then stick together Trim from the same pop up menu will be rarely useful because this option only prints the center of the image Since GraphicConverter always leaves
318. pg l Transfer EXIF data to the filename IMG_ 0121 jpg IMG_0121 jpg IMG_ 0122 jpg IMG_0122 jpg IMG_ 0123 jpg IMG_0123 jpg amp name original name IMG_ 0124 jpg IMG_0124 jpg amp extension original extension IMG_ 0125 jpg IMG_0125 jpg amp hexcode camera model according IMG_ 0126 jpg IMG_0126 jpg So eects IMG_ 0127 jpg IMG_0127 jpg IMG_ 0128 jpg IMG_0128 jpg Remove M Following text IMG_ 0129 jpg IMG_0129 jpg ea IMG_ 0130 jpg IMG_0130 jpg l Char range at the beginning Me oip MG 0131 jpg E IMG_ 0132 jpg IMG_0132 jpg from lt to IMG_ 0133 jpg IMG_0133 jpg l Char range at the end IMG_ 0134 jpg IMG_0134 jpg a IMG_ 0135 jpg IMG_0135 jpg from to Format Specific Options l Add time code after name for DPX pictures Choose Presets 4 Clear All Cancel C Rename Char range at beginning deletes the fifth to seventh character of a filename if you enter 5 for X and 7 for Y for example Char range at end deletes the last and last but one character of a filename if you enter 0 for X and 1 for Y for example The file extension is not part of the name Add time code after name for DPX pictures reads the timecode from DPX pictures taken from professional videos and adds it to the filename The DPX metadata is dis played in the Information palette on the Comment tab 39 Convert amp Modify RegExLite is a standard for renaming files with regular expressions For more informa tion please read the introduction on progr
319. picture does not have an alpha channel yet Shadow Size of the Shadow Co pixels Cancel o 182 Unskew Unskew Often the perspective of houses or other rectangular objects appears distorted on pho tos The following example picture was taken from above to minimize the reflection of the flash To unskew the picture choose Effect Unskew Four red lines appear over the image with handles at the junctions Drag these handles to the four corner points of the object 183 Unskew that is to be unskewed and press Return to start unskewing Alternatively you can click You can stop the procedure with Escape Unskew EXPOSITION UNIVERSELLE DE 18 A PARIS lt LE JURY INTERNATIONAL ENE M DAILLE DARGENT ALLUMETTES DE JON OSES ee wee A dialog opens where you should select Auto Fit to obtain the approximate size If you require a specific target size you can select it with Manually Enable Try to unskew com plete image to obtain the edges i Unskew Auto Fit Manually Original Width 400 Original Height 600 _ Try to unskew complete image Cancel a 184 White Correction Unskewing the picture may take a moment The result is an unskewed picture Trim the image as required to remove any unwanted edges EJ 0SCN5317 b tif RGB EXPOSITION UNIVERSELLE DE 1867 A PARIS LE JURY INTERNATIONAL ENK M DAILLE WARGENT FABRIQUE DALLUMETTES DE JONKOPING ASIC L
320. profile Click the circle with the four sections in the lower window frame of the opened image Now the broken color profile is not active any more and the image should appear correctly 272 Troubleshooting In this case delete the broken color profile and correct the settings in Edit Assign Profile The color profile file is located in the folder user Library Application Support Gra phicConverter Profiles The tilde character stands for the name of the respective user To open the Library folder hold the Alt Key and select Library from the Finder s Go to menu If you cannot replace the broken color profile file with a backup open an image contai ning the profile GraphicConverter saves the profile automatically into the profiles folder Users Group Visit our website to enter yourself in our mailing list to receive help from other users http www lemkesoft de en products graphicconverter user forum 273 Shortcuts Shortcuts The shortcuts for the slide show are in the chapter for the slide show see p 256 General Shortcuts Key Combinations Ctrl with mouse click Result Opens the context menu The contents are dependent on the window that is open Tab key Hides all open palettes and shows them when pressed again Shortcuts in Picture Windows Key Combinations Command key and or minus Result Zooms to the next higher or next lower level Option key on the pict
321. r editing and then only edit that file If necessary you should only create a JPEG version once you have finished editing the file Unsharp Mask and Sharpen Edges It is often necessary to slightly increase the sharpness of digital pictures In the Effect menu GraphicConverter has the Unsharp Mask and Sharpen Edges options The Sharpen Edges option has been available in GraphicConverter for a long time and re sults in slightly more defined lines than the newer Unsharp Mask option We recom mend that you always use the Unsharp Mask option first and only use Sharpen Edges if you are not happy with the results of Unsharp Mask Always select zoom level 100 when you are using Sharpen Edges as you can often not see problems at lower zoom lev els The results can only be properly assessed at 100 Unsharp Mask Select Effect Unsharp Mask and try the value 60 for Amount first Switch to full pic ture preview to obtain a better impression of the result One good practical tip is to move the dialog to the lower right hand corner of the screen so you can see more of the pic ture Unsharp Mask Picture Radius ee a 1 00 pixels Amount oo Threshold o levels M Show Details M Full Screen Preview Cancel OK Select 1 as the standard value for the Radius and 0 for the Threshold Some pictures require a high level of sharpening At a value of 160 there are normally no problems with unedited scanned pictures Just inc
322. r in the context menu of the open picture allowing you to display the corresponding Internet page in the Internet browser You can save the pictures contained in an open multipage TIFF image separately by using Split Multipage TIFF into TIFFs in the picture context menu The Find and Replace Colors function now displays the color table for palette pictures New in GraphicConverter 7 6 Under Picture Highlights and Shadows the light areas of the picture can be darkened and the dark areas of the picture can be lightened Use this function sparingly It is particularly suitable for example for indoor photos taken without a flash or pictures with faces that are too bright You can make color corrections under Picture Color Balance This function is particularly suitable for removing a color cast from a picture Picture Histogram Equalization allows some pictures to be optimized The function smoothens the histogram and can increase the contrast and saturation gently Added metadata tab to slide show preferences fontsize color and metadata General IPTC and EXIF can now be chosen In the Preferences dialog you can now search for an option The Page Up and Page Down keys now use the system setting for natural scrolling under Mac OS 10 7 and later Network scanners are recognised during scanning with the Image Capture program 295 New in GraphicConverter 7 6 1 and 7 6 2 With Picture Alpha Channel Create fro
323. r individual content by some programs These fields will now be read upon opening and written to upon saving Display of iptc tags in list view of browser enhanced Added format options to toolbar as an option Display speed of small joeg thumbnails in the browser improved In the Preferences you can choose to display the rating with stars in the Browser Thumbnails section During the slide show you can call up the dialog for renaming the current file by pressing the E key without any further keys 294 New in GraphicConverter 7 4 1 New in GraphicConverter 7 4 1 In the drop area s context menu the command Copy Images to has been added You can use it to copy the pictures of the drop area to a folder Copy Images to with Index adds an Index like for example 1 2 3 etc to the file name If a picture contains geo data you can add the name of the nearest town and the country name to the respective IPTC fields with Reverse Geocoding from the Geo menu red icon in menu bar In the pop up menu of Convert amp Modify select Convert HPGL to PDF vectors to create vector PFD files from HPGL files in order to keep the file size small New in GraphicConverter 7 5 Xe847 filter for correcting colors and brightness added to the Filter menu If a picture contains a valid web address like for example http www lemkesoft com in the URL box of the IPTC information the additional function Open Copyright URL in Webbrowser will appea
324. r start previous film If the slide show is in random mode the page down key will go to the previous picture in sorted order Press cursor right or Space or click image Next picture or start next film Page down key Next picture or start next film If the slide show is in random mode the page down key will go to the next picture in sorted order Command cursor left or right Fast backward or foreward during film for x seconds as set in Preferences Backspace or Delete Alt L or L without Alt key Places the current picture in the Trash Turn constantly counterclockwise lossless for JPGs Alt R or R without Alt key Turn clockwise constantly lossless for JPGs A Turn temporarily counterclockwise picture file will not be changed Turn temporarily clockwise picture file will not be changed Mirror vertically lossless for JPGs Mirror horizontally lossless for JPGs Mirror temporarily vertically picture file will not be changed Mirror temporarily horizontally picture file will not be changed Open the current picture Show hide metadata under picture you selected in Preferences part Slide Show Metadata E Rename Open IPTC dialog Plus or Minus key Zoom in or out Alt Scroll wheel Zoom in or out Move two fingers up or down on trackpad from Mac OS 10 7 Zoom in or out 256 Find duplicate files
325. r the normal version of GraphicConverter available for download from www lemkesoft com free of charge Send the receipt that you received from Apple by e mail to support lem kesoft com We will then send you a serial number by e mail If you installed the normal version of GraphicConverter first you will need to drag it to the Trash before installing the sandboxing version from the Mac App Store After install ing the sandboxing version you can drag the normal version out of the Trash again for example to a subfolder in the program folder You can use both versions parallel and also start them simultaneously If for example you have received a promocode for GraphicConverter because you are a journalist click Redeem under Quick Links at the bottom right of the start page of the Mac App Store GraphicConverter will start downloading immediately after you enter the promocode since the code contains the information about which program should be downloaded GraphicConverter services In the Finder you can use some functions of GraphicConverter via a sub menu of the con text menu When your computer starts the Finder reads the services of all installed pro grams and shows them in the context menu Send files with TeamViewer Set Desktop Picture Reveal in Windows Open File in BBEdit Reveal in Finder GraphicConverter Show in slideshow GraphicConverter Show in browser GraphicConverter Set file date to EXIF date GraphicConverter
326. rage occurrence The measured value 255 represents white and 0 represents black The coordinates of the rectangle are also given 57 Work Environment With measure angle with Two Lines you can determine the angle with two auxiliary lines which are inserted in the upper left corner of the image Position the lines by drag ging the handles at the ends The angel is displayed in the information pallet You can select and copy the text in the information pallet With Contast Mesurement between tow points you can now also determine the dif ference in brightness and contrast between two colors with the measuring tool This is helpful if for example you want to check a website for W3C conformity Double click the measuring tool with the slide rule and select Contrast Measurement between two Points Now click two points one after the other The information pallet opens automatically and shows the measured values and the differences You can select and copy the text in the information pallet Click a picture with the Zoom tool to switch to the next zoom level up When you hold down the Alt key you switch to the next zoom level down For more details see page 169 The Red Eye tool allows fast correction of red and other colored eyes for example that occur on animals that were photographed with a flash Click the eyes with the tool to color them black You can adapt the size of the tool witha slider on the lower edge of the window If you have
327. raphicConverter s Browser like the labels were before You can copy the tags to the metadata of your pictures via the context menu Large Picture Files Support for 64 bit is new in version 8 of GraphicConverter It allows you to open and edit very large image files like for example panorama views Please note that you require sufficient RAM for the picture since the Mac OS will otherwise transfer parts of the data to the hard drive The transfer of data will slow down editing considerably 64 bit support will not essentially accelerate picture processing You can expect an approx 5 increase in speed for standard processing 64 bit technology shows its real advantages when you open images with file sizes of one gigabyte or more edit them with filters and then save them The reason for this is that old 32 bit systems can only use four gigabytes of RAM while modern 64 bit systems can address up to 16 million tera bytes of RAM Sandbox and Gatekeeper Apple has introduced Sandbox technology with Mac OS 10 7 Lion to protect your data against malicious programs and data theft Programs that have integrated Sandbox protection cannot access services that they actually do not require on your computer and on your network The Sandbox version of GraphicConverter cannot for example read the data in your address book nor send e mails by itself You will therefore not notice the Sandbox tech nology at all Since your data will be protected consider
328. raphicConverter requires a plug in to open all EPSF files other than Photoshop EPS files ESM ESM format Facesaver Favicon ICO Format for pictures with 16x16 pixels that are displayed in the address bar in front of the URL Windows ICONS is used as the file format Adapt and insert the following HTML code in your Web site and copy the favicon ico image to your server lt link rel shortcut icon href http www lemkesoft de favicon ico gt lt link rel icon href http www lemkesoft de favicon ico type image ico gt FAX CCITT 3 coded fax file FaxSTF FaxSTF program format fep fig With installed xfig fink package on X First Publisher art FITS Flexible Image Transport System Format FLH FLI FLC Animation from the Autodesk Animator program FLI supports 8 bit for 320 x 200 pixels FLC supports 8 bit for 640 x 480 pixels FLH supports High Color FPX FlashPix file format QuickTime 4 or higher is required for opening these files Freehand 10 The browser can display a preview of a Freehand preview file This preview can be opened as a picture but not as a Freehand file FUJI GATAN Microscope format Supports 256 grayscale GEM Vector graphics GEM metafile created by the GEMDraw program 279 Supported Formats splashscreens IBL Format Import Export Comment GFX Xgrabber program format GIF Supports 1 to 8 bit per pixel T
329. ratio from the None pop up menu Drag a rectangle across the picture and position it with the mouse if necessary by clicking the line between the handles 152 Selection Define User defined allows you to define an aspect ratio yourself 1 pixel Normal v None v Select User defined a x b from the same pop up menu to use your self defined aspect ratio Refer to the chapter Cropping for Photo Prints from p 109 In some cases you may want to set a color in the selection to transparent at its destina tion instead of fixing it like a sticker If for example you copy a red Z which is on a white background the white can be defined as a transparent color As a result as soon as you start moving it the white background around the Z in the selection becomes transpar ent and you can see the picture behind it Even after pasting in the required position only the red Z remains The white background is no longer there To achieve this effect open the following dialog in the target image by double clicking the selection tool in the toolbox Select the Selector tab and enable the Transparent copy with background color option Selection ion i Predefined Left ol Width 4 159 Top oll Height 2 765 gt Type Width amp Height _ Type Right amp Bottom _ Lossless JPEG Selection Cropping M Transparent copy with background color In the following example picture the Z aga
330. re to the size of the desktop After scaling you should improve the sharpness slightly with Effect Sharpen Edges Picture Use Picture as Desktop Image places the picture on your desktop This option also scales the picture to the required size if necessary Scale to main desktop size is therefore intended for creat ing desktop pictures for other users or for use later on Scale to pixel count If you know how many Pixels your picture should have in total you can enter the total number of pixels in the dialog for this option Scale to Pixel Count Pixel Count 200 000 pixels Scaling Algorithm Best Interpolation lt Cancel ox Not all numbers are possible as the picture is scaled proportionally After scaling open the dialog again to display the number of pixels used to scale your picture Algorithm allows you to specify which subprogram algorithm should be used for scal ing In most cases Best Interpolation provides the best results Aspect ratio Crop to 3x5 like the other aspect ratios immediately trims centered to the selected as pect ratio The aspect ratio 1 root 2 is the aspect ratio of DIN paper sizes like DIN A4 or DIN A5 If you want to specify the section yourself you can use the Export Crop for Photo Service option from the browser Action menu You will find a detailed guide in the chapter Cropping for Photo Prints from page 109 Scale to Scale to 1080p with borders allo
331. rease the value until you cannot see any more faults 131 Unsharp Mask and Sharpen Edges Sharpening involves increasing the contrast of neighboring pixels If you increase the Radius more pixels will be incorporated in the process giving coarser results You should therefore leave the radius at 1 in most cases If you increase the Threshold the sharpness is reduced because the contrast of neigh boring pixels is only increased if they are more different than those at the edges There fore keep the standard value of 0 for normal pictures The Before After display helps you find the best sharpening value The After window shows the effect of the current setting In the Picture window you can change the pic ture section displayed in the Before After windows The function has been given a name from traditional printing which may not seem appropriate The sharpness is optimized using a mask which more or less masks off the unsharpness Sharpen Edges Effect Sharpen Edges allows you to set the extent of sharpening with a percentage val ue Select a value at which you think the picture is sufficiently sharp without spoiling the picture If the sharpening is too high lines are formed on the edges of color areas for ex ample Try a high value like 60 first and then a low one like 15 and then keep trying until you find the best Keep the character of the picture in mind so that the sharpened picture is not totally different to t
332. redefined tab in the selection tool dialog and enter the desired size in pixels Insert the selection by 154 Selection clicking the place in the picture where the upper left corner of the selection should appear Selection Selection Width 300 Height 200 You can set a new selection with the predefined values with a mouse click shift key alt key Cancel ox You can drag and drop from one picture to another If you select the Drag into top left of new window option in the General Selection section of the Preferences the selected picture section will always be pasted in the top left corner of the target picture no matter where you let go of the selection over the target picture This is useful for example if you want to add a copyright note to several pictures Lasso If for example a person s face is only partly in the sun this area will almost always be too light If you do not have another photo you can make things easier by clicking the Lasso at the top left of the toolbox you may need to select Window Show Toolbox first and drawing around the area while holding down the mouse button Only closed shapes can be defined with the lasso If you release the mouse button before you have returned to the starting point a straight line will be drawn to the starting point This effect can be used whenever you do need a straight line You ll need a steady hand for work with the lasso Small deviations in the sur
333. references to jump to the corresponding page We have organized this manual so that you can read it from start to finish and get to know GraphicConverter and its capabilities We have put conversion and important top ics like the Internet at the start after Installation and Support Chapters on the functions that are most frequently needed follow Scanning a picture sharpening optimizing brightness and contrast etc Please use the extensive index on the last pages to find spe cific sections 15 Starting the Program and Opening a Picture Starting the Program and Opening a Picture Double click the program icon to start GraphicConverter The First Steps dialog appears where you can select one of the basic options First Steps Welcome to GraphicConverter Show a browser endl Start slide show Ss Do a batch conversion m Show this dialog on startup Close Create a new image opens an empty image window whose size you can specify in a dialog The following three features open the file selector allowing you to select an image to open or a folder to browse or display as a slide show Do a batch conversion opens a Browser window in convert mode You can access the options listed in this dialog at any time via the File menu Choose Open an image and click OK Alternatively you can deselect Show this dialog on startup and click OK You can then access the file selection dialog with File Open The file selection dialog
334. res to the iPod The images are then reduced If your iPod can be used as a volume like the iPod Nano G3 the option Include full resolution photos will also appear You can use this function to copy the photos to another computer The image files will be copied to the path iPodname Photos Full Res olution Year Month Day If the photos were taken on several different days we recom mend using a USB stick to which you can copy the images via the Finder Slide show Click File Slide Show to show a slide show on the screen A file selection window opens where you can select a folder The graphics contained in this folder and its subfold ers are displayed on the screen against a black background for a set amount of time At 244 Slide show the bottom of the file selection dialog you can choose which picture to start the slide show with and whether a random order should be used You can start a slide show from the browser easily by selecting the required pictures and clicking the slide show icon or press Command Option F To compile pictures from different folders in a slide show you can drag the pictures to the drop area at the bottom of the browser Display the drop area by clicking the icon with the arrow in the browser footer Start the slide show using the context menu that you open by Control clicking the drop area For more details see p 211 onwards You can also start a slide show of the pictures in a folder from the Find
335. resse als Schweizer Taschenmester und Uneverssigerne fur die Bikdbearbeting af dem Macrtosh geteert Umbenennen unterstitzt Metadaten aus PCDs 39 99 HOG impot verbessert Kundenbewertungen Durchechnatiche Bewertung flr de aktuste Version te th i tk Jk 5 Bewertungen Diese App bewerten t dk the ake ak The Mac App Store is not a Web site but instead a program that is pre installed on your computer from Mac OS 10 6 January 2011 You will receive a message in the Mac App Store program as soon as an update is available The update is installed automatically with one click You can install GraphicConverter on all Macs on which your iTunes account is active The Mac App Store will supply a version that supports sandboxing This technology increases the protection against malware but brings along a few limitations The folder for Apple scripts must be created manually e mrSID import is not possible ecw import is not possible e To display directories in the browser you sometimes need to select them via the File Browse Folder command or move them to the favorites using drag and drop e It is not possible to export the iPhoto library into the normal folder structure One further limitation to the version from the Mac App Store is that newer versions are delayed considerably because of Apple s testing process Installation If you want to avoid these limitations you can obtain a normal serial number fo
336. rogram launch _ Open browser at path Thumbnails Start up directory lt None gt Cache Edit Redirect double click to Edit in Image Window Image Verification C Edit in Cocooner Open with Finder Open With Show in Slideshow Double click _ Open folder in new browser Open With Application lt None gt Misc Focal Length _ Calculated to 35mm Google Earth Speed 1 0 Context Menu _ Show copyright URL entry Extension Ignore Extensions THM TXT HTM HTML EXE DLL P C PAS CC ASM COM SYS LST DOC XLS PST OST INI PPT INF SIT ZIP TAR MIM GZIP ARJ MDX MSH RTF WEBLOC TEXTCLIPPING XMP Allow Extensions leave empty to show all _ Apply Extensions Filter to Folders too Restore to Defaults Last Values Cancel OK Upon program launch Open browser opens the browser last opened Under Mac OS 10 7 Lion or newer if the Restore windows option is enabled this option will be ignored in GraphicConverter Start up directory allows you to select a folder that is opened upon every launch of the program Redirect double click to Edit opens the picture in GraphicConverter Edit in Cocooner opens the Cocooner with the picture selected Open with Finder has the same effect as if you had double clicked the picture in the Finder Open With opens the picture with the program selected below as the Open With Application Show in Slideshow starts a slideshow starting with this picture Double click Ope
337. rograms SPC Spectrum graphic format Supports 320 x 200 pixels for 512 colors SR2 Sony Raw ST X SBIG Supports 256 grayscale 286 Supported Formats Format Startup Screen Import Export Comment Graphics in this file format are displayed when your Mac is started if they are in the system folder STV Medizinisches Format SUN SUN Raster file format Supports 8 or 24 bit per pixel Super Hi Res Apple ligs graphics with 32000 colors 3200 SVG Import with Mac OS X only with ImageMagick as helper http www imagemagick org SWF Using QuickTime Macromedia Flash System 7 clip Clipboard format when copying or moving data on System 7 or higher TBCPlus TCL TCL format TealPaint PDB TealPaint Palm OS Save for PDB Select the format using the Options button TEX Texture TGA Truevision Targa format TIFF Complex format for all color depths The GraphicConverter can import and export the following types of compression uncompressed packpits Izw ccitt3 ccitt4 fax3 fax4 32 bit IEEE TIFFs are supported TIM PSX TN ATARI TINY format TRS 80 TRS 80 format VBM VFF Uses 4 bit per pixel VGS 8 Used by microscopes VITRONIC Vitronic Format Supports 256 grayscale VOXEL Format with 512 x 512 pixels for 256 grayscale VPB Quantel Videosystems format VPM 287 New in GraphicConverter 7
338. rounding dark area can be tolerated Now use Picture Brightness Contrast to darken the area of the picture which is too light see page 137 It is a lot easier to draw around areas if you set the zoom level as high as possible and use a professional mouse that has a click lock function enabled in a control panel With this function you only need to click once let go of the button and then you can work as if you were holding down the button When you move a selection made with the lasso one color can defined as transparent You can reach the corresponding settings dialog by double clicking the lasso in the tool box You will find detailed information on this in the chapter on transparent copying and pasting with a rectangular selection from page 151 as this works in exactly the same way 155 Selection Magic Pen The magic pen is the second down in the right hand column of the toolbox you may need to select Window Show Toolbox If you click this tool you can select all adjoining picture sections that have the same color with a single click To also select parts of the picture that are not joined use Shift click A tolerance value can be defined for the Magic Pen All pixels that do not differ from the clicked pixel more than the set tolerance value are selected Tolerance e In practice you will need to try a few times to find the right value If an even blue sky is to be selected a low tolerance of about 10 will be en
339. rowser 213 Print Catalog 92 95 Print Folder 99 protan color blindness 267 R Random Matrix 179 Rating 216 Remove Alpha Channel 197 removing red eyes 158 Rename 232 Rename several files 35 Replace Color 179 replacing a color 179 resolution 114 Reveal in Finder 215 218 Revert 161 RGB 161 Rotate a picture 126 Ruler 64 ruler 19 S saturation 137 Saturation HSV model 187 Save a Copy as 26 Save as 21 Save for web 69 Save only selection 24 Save Slices as 77 Save web ready without resource 67 save without selection 24 saving 25 saving a picture without a selection 24 saving a selection 24 Scale with last Values 116 scaling 113 114 scaling picture size 113 114 scanning with GraphicConverter 118 Search Color 179 Select all 151 selecting appropriate picture format 65 selection 150 selection tool 151 Set Format from Extension 22 25 Set Last Values 137 Sharpen Edges 131 Shortcuts 274 Shortcuts in Picture Windows 274 Show Alpha Mask Channel 196 Sides 125 slices 72 76 Slide show 244 solarisation 179 sorting in the browser 210 Source 30 Split JPEG data stream into single JPEGs 32 splitting 23 square 81 Stamp 119 starting the program 16 Sub Category 35 subfolders 45 support 15 System Requirements 5 Index T text conversion 29 Text in Pictures 200 text tool 194 200 THM file 207 threshold 174 Toast 219 Tolerance replacing a color 179 Tolerance when
340. rre sponding dialog Header amp Footer Header path folder page date Footer page Hagen Henke Cancel 0K Drag the light blue placeholders for variables like the page number into the header or footer boxes You can enter your own text like for example a copyright either addition ally or on its own You enter the copyright symbol with Option G In the Metadata dialog add the required data to the right hand list with a double click or with the Add button Metadata Available Texts Selected Texts Name Size Name without Extension Resolution Size File Format Resolution Colors Frames Add gt Memory Usage File Format lt Remove File Length File Creation Date File Modification Date Compression Req Time for Decompression Comment Cancel 0K Select a Font with Size and Color for the text You can output the images with a hairline as a frame for which you can select a color for the background Enable Print all pages from multipage files if you do not want to print just the first page Include subfolders includes all images from subfolders You should perform a test print in a PDF file to check the layout and other details To do this select Save as PDF from the PDF pop up menu in the print dialog Your print out may appear as follows in the Preview program 96 Print Catalog Before printing you should create a preview with the Preview button or the PDF func tion to c
341. rrect a flat picture with the Picture Bright ness Contrast option see page 137 Increase the saturation and the contrast particu larly for flat colors Colors Mode and Colorize Summary Under Picture Colors you can change the color depth of a picture to save memory space convert color pictures into black and white pictures or to create effects Change to Grayscale 8 Bit 3 Change to Deep Gray 16 Bit 4 Change to Deep Colors 16 Bit per Channel 64 Bit 36 Swap Colors Change to Sepia Colorize If you want to convert a True Color image into a grayscale image select Change to Grayscale 8 Bit Alternatively you can select Picture Mode Grayscale It is only worthwhile selecting Deep Gray 16 bit for pictures with Deep Color 16 bit per channel 64 bit in order to achieve better quality due to the finer graduation of the gray values If you take a JPG picture with a digital camera it will almost always be a True Color picture with 8 bit per channel that has a total color depth of 32 bit Pictures with Deep Color are for example created by most digital single lens reflex cameras in which RAW format was selected Select Picture Colors and then Swap Colors from the submenu to call up a dialog for swapping colors This option is only useful for certain file formats Swap Colors Color 1 E Color 2 Cancel Swap KISS CEL format defines for example the color with index 0 as transparent
342. rs Effect Channels Split allows you to display a picture so that only the red part of the picture is displayed Scroll horizontally to the right to display the green part and blue part or select a lower zoom level to display all three areas at the same time Effect Channels Join reverts the effect ano EONI me PIC inn et ACR LALA i fa Effect Channels Split into new windows allows you to split RGB or CMYK images into several pictures each containing one channel This is particularly useful with CMYK pictures if the pictures are being prepared or checked for offset print The individual channels are opened in separate image windows that show the content of the channel as a grayscale picture You can join these single images from the color channels to make a color image again by selecting Effect Channels Join Effect Channels Swap Red and Green sets all red pixels green and all green pixels red This is sometimes needed for infrared photo processing Effect Channels Swap 161 RGB and CMYK Red and Blue and Effect Channels Swap Blue and Green swap the colors accord ingly Effect Channels Optimize Blue Channel can improve the colors of some imported RAW pictures Effect Channels Split Red Blue Green into Same Window makes the red blue green channel the picture content The content of the channel is displayed as grays The other channels get deleted This makes sense to make scanned ancient pap
343. rs In this case you can set labels and ratings using the context menu BLP format If you need to mirror vertically after opening you can select Mirror vertically in Preferences Open Image Formats BLP Support for new French manual added Russian translation added New in GraphicConverter 7 6 1 and 7 6 2 Existing alpha channel not displayed in the browser preview Picture Equalizer allows you to set the brightness for highlight medium and dark tones separately in nine levels In the dialog for the IPTC data you can enter an address with URL and e mail address on the new Contact tab You can open this dialog for an open picture and for one or more selected pictures with Command I or via the File menu Under Mac OS 10 7 you can browse through the Versions of a picture If you edit a picture in Adobe Lightroom the changes will not be applied to the original file at first but instead will be written first in the Lightroom database as 296 New in GraphicConverter 7 6 1 and 7 6 2 instructions like for example Brightness 18 You will need to export the picture if you want to apply the changes to it In Lightroom the instructions can however also be written in the XMP data of the picture Metadata Save Metadata to File If you are working with JPG files the XMP info will always be written to the picture file Since some RAW formats do not support XMP data the XMP info is written to a file with the same name a
344. rs in filenames are changed to lowercase letters with Make filen ames lowercase This may be required for UNIX servers on the Internet The Correct extension option changes the file extension to the correct extension If a JPEG picture has the incorrect tif extension this is changed to jpg Use Macintosh line ends and Use UNIX line ends set the different characters at the end of the line Use UNIX line ends if you want to edit the created HTML files under UNIX Web browsers can display both versions correctly The three options Align Thumbnails TOP MIDDLE and BOTTOM set the position of the preview pictures This option is only useful when you have different sized preview pictures or to distinguish between portrait and landscape format If you have portrait and landscape format pictures in your catalogue we recommend using the Middle setting so that the landscape format pictures appear in the middle of the neighboring portrait for mat pictures when in vertical position Charset allows you to choose a different standard for the type set when you design a Web page in a foreign language The Navigation pop up menu allows you to insert different colored arrows into the HTML pages instead of Textlinks 84 Photo Albums on the Internet Catalog Click on image moves to the next only works when a single image is displayed On the HTML Text tab you can insert additional text in various areas of the HTML page Catalog General File HTML
345. rt pictures into pure black and white and determine the ideal threshold value with the slider The image remains in grayscale mode but is automatically saved as a 1 bit image There is no other way to do this under Mac OS 10 7 because the QuickDraw library is not supported in 64 bit mode The next time that the image is opened it is converted again into a grayscale picture which will not lead to losses in quality as long as you do not adjust the brightness etc Threshold Picture Before After Threshold 95 M Show Details M Full Screen Preview Cancel ox The dialog provides an overview in which a selection rectangle can be set and moved to display the before and after results Zoom is for the example section Please note that the best threshold value should take the important light parts of the picture as well as the dark areas If you want to imitate grayscales with 1 bit images you can use other dither patterns The Floyd Steinberg dithering creates particularly balanced pictures in which you can hardly see the structure You can access this option by selecting Effect Black amp White Floyd Steinberg The dither functions in the Effect menu return the results in a new win 174 Colors Mode and Colorize dow You can quickly switch back to the original picture if you are not happy with the results and want to try a different dither option Atkinson dithering is even better with m
346. s If you select Moov QuickTime Movie MOV in Convert amp Modify you can create a slide show from several selected pictures We added the feature for Framerate In the Map tab in the lower richt corner of the browser there is an entry field for finding a place The place will be displayed in the middle of the map and the geo data will be added to the selected images Zoom into the map as much as necessary to position the needle exactly with the mouse You can slide the map with the mouse by holding the mouse clicked Once you have scrolled the map you can get the needle to the mouse position by holding the mouse clicked for two seconds Every time you move the needle the geo data in the selected pictures get updated New in GraphicConverter 8 5 3 You can open the new palette for IPTC Keywords with Window Keywords When you print a picture larger than the paper in the printer GraphicConverter prints several pages you need to stick together In Preferences part Print General you can enter a value for Overlap Width New in GraphicConverter 8 6 In GraphicConverter you can now use layers in pictures Layers are like overlayed transparent films It is not yet possible to save the layers You can use layers for example to produce collages from several pictures Select Picture New and create a new picture that is large enough to accommodate your content and has the right aspect ratio Select a suitable color for the background for ex
347. s A file selection window opens where you can select the destination folder or create one The import starts after you click Open and the progress is shown in a dialog File Operations z Transfer GraphicConverter Import Test IMG_1481 CR2 x Processed 84 58 MB of 96 77 MB Speed 32 29 MB s Estimated time 00 00 00 121 Importing Pictures from Digital Cameras Download all Files from your Digital Camera Select Folder and Download Images into Selected Folder Download all Images into Folder 22 11 12 Film Sort Images into Subfolders Depending on Extension Sort Images into Subfolders Depending on Date V Lead ng Spaces Leading Zeroes V Add Month Names M Rotate JPGs upon EXIF Add File Icon and Preview to Images Delete Images from Camera after Download Embed ICC Profile Select Profile M Apply Stored IPTC Copyright Hagen Henk M Apply Rename Action EXIF Datum und Uhrzeit Process Files with an AppleScript after the Download Select AppleScript Select the Select Folder and Download Images into Selected Folder option at the bottom of the selection dialog if you want to load all pictures into a folder Download all Images into Folder 30 11 2012 Film 1 creates a folder with the date and a film number into which the pictures are loaded The date is always the date of the import Sort Images into Subfolders Depending on Date creates a subfolder in your picture folder with the structure year month day i
348. s for small angles trims the picture automatically after small rotate procedures You can use Other Value to enter an angle by which the picture should be rotated The same dialog as for Other Value with Line opens see above Since positive values are used to indicate counterclockwise rotation in mathematics GraphicConverter also follows this principle Negative values for example 0 7 will there fore rotate the picture clockwise It is only worth rotating by an angle if you know the angle Otherwise use the Other Value with Line option see above The picture quality is not affected if rotated 90 180 or 270 Larger pictures require longer processing times as new coordinates have to be calculated for each pixel You can only rotate JPEG pictures which you do not want to convert and edit without losses using the context menu browser Select File Browse Folder click the small picture preview and then Control click hold down the Control key and click the small picture preview The picture width needs to be a multiple of 16 This is normal however with pic tures made using a digital camera The loss of quality with JPEG pictures does not come from the rotation but from open ing and saving again as a JPEG because the file has to be recompressed each time it is 130 Unsharp Mask and Sharpen Edges saved The compression process causes a loss in quality Therefore it is always best to save JPEGs in TIFF format afte
349. s as specified in the file EXIF information if this data is provided Some digital cameras have an internal position sensor and note when the camera is held sideways to take a picture The orientation is written in the EXIF information as digital cameras can write landscape files only This option allows to you to select all pictures after importing new shots and automatically rotate the por trait pictures If you import the picture with GraphicConverter using the File Acquire Download images from connected camera option the portrait format pictures con taining the corresponding information will be rotated immediately and without losses You should use Remove double orientation tags and reset them if you receive an error message about orientation tags when you open images Images should only con tain one orientation tag Some pictures from iPhoto have this problem due to a bug in QuickTime Updating QuickTime can solve the problem for iPhoto Change orientation value allows you for example to change an orientation that has been set incorrectly by the scan program If you want to rotate an image that does not show up correctly in the Browser use the Rotate option from the context menu or use the Icon in the Browser s toolbar Rebuild EXIF preview creates a high quality preview with 200x200 pixels as an EXIF preview If you forward data to PC users you can use this option to add a high quality preview to all pictures in a browser wind
350. s cap Select the correction picture in the dialog and click OK 137 Operator Operator It is fastest to edit images with the operator After opening a picture click the Adjust icon at the top left of the toolbar to display the operator A blue bar with buttons and on the right of the picture a row of controls are then displayed eco El IMG_3080 JPG RGB w K A a gt Q 2 esco 685E Options Adjust Previous Next Save amp Next Share Label Adjust E Brightness iz Contrast of gt Saturation a Gamma Sharpness o Levels oR Rotate 0 00 Effect preview If the toolbar has not been displayed hold down the Control key click the title bar of the picture and select Hide Toolbar from the context menu that opens This function is not called Display Toolbar because it indicates the status If you want to process several pictures in a folder one after the other correct the image with the sliders and click Apply and Save amp Next In the Operator you can select Fast Mode under the controls to be able to move the controls faster The preview can decrease in quality a little bit You can use Last values to call up the values from the last picture again quickly if a pic ture needs a similar correction to the previous picture The image can be saved with File Save or Save as Many pictures taken with digital cameras appear better if the gamma value is reduced to 0 97 or 0 93 138 Operator Contr
351. s destination format if you do not want to change the format In the Operator click Options in the upper left corner The Reverse Geocoding now is more precise Files in landsat format can be imported File Print Preview allows you to check your print layout before printing and to adjust settings like margins header and position Create GPX File for Selection creates a GPX file with a list of all geo data from the selected files Programs such as GoogleEarth can read this file and display all points on a map Files in xcf format can be imported ImageMagick is no longer needed as a helper program In Preferences Slide Show Misc you can select the justification for images smaller than the resolution of the display You can select the style of a line with a double click on the line tool In the dialog Effect Edges and Frames you can select the new option Adjust frame depending on aspect ratio of image This option but is available for geometric shapes with a sharp edge only The heart and all frames with patterned edges are excluded Layers of text inserted into a picture can now be saved for later editing You need to save as GraphicConverter Image Document gcimgd 325 New in GraphicConverter 9 6 With a held click on the line tool you can select the cross hair tool you can use to mark points as often necessary in astro photography for example to mark a star Double click the tool to select the number of lines
352. s in the information window In Preferences Open Image formats PSD you can select wether and how layers of Photoshop files should be opened Layers of Gimp xcf files will always be opened The Microsoft formats Windows Media Photo wdp HD Photo hdp and JPEG XR jxr can be opened The format JPEG XR has nothing to do with the JPEG format In the Effect menu the function Auto Red Eye has been added You can use it to correct red eyes without defining a selection beforehand You can reduce images to a predefined palette with Picture Colors Reduce to Palette You can define these palettes yourself or load them from the internet GraphicConverter supports the gpl format of Gimp Open an image and select Show Palettes Folder in Finder from the submenu Copy gpl files into this folder to be able to use them after a restart of GraphicConverter If you want to define a palette yourself you can open a gpl file from Gimp and modify it with the color values you want The first three coloums contain the values for red green and blue In the context menu over an opened image the function Set Image as Folder Icon has been added Tiff files with uncompressed CMYK content and an alpha channel con be opened PSD files with CMYK content and an alpha channel can be opened Pictures with broken GPS data are not marked with the GPS icon in the browser any more Deltavision files can be opened with pixeltypes 6 and 16 bit per channel I
353. s of quality The optimum color table would be 128 colors for 91 used colors GIF Version 87a 89a Transparency and Comments are only supported by GIF 89a Row order Normal O Interlaced Color ordering of B amp W Images Mac OS O Windows Colors _ m Dither during color reduction l Optimize Creates smaller files Cancel oK It is possible to reduce the color table further using Picture Colors Change bit depth dynamically if a greater degree of quality can be sacrificed The picture quality is always reduced by this option It should therefore only be used if you want to reduce the file size greatly Try a low quality JPEG format instead 71 Pictures in E mails Pictures in E mails In the Browser click the e mail button to transfer images to an e mail program and shrink them automatically or use the context menu see p 208 This function is also available in the context menu over an open picture and in the File menu Blindkopie v Von Hagen Henke lt hagen henke gmx de gt ial E Mail GroBe 104 K8 Bildgr e _ Originalgr e A In Apple Mail Actual Size at the bottom right of the window needs to be selected as the image has already been reduced by GraphicConverter Only use this pop up menu if you have dragged an image that has not yet been reduced for example from the Finder into an e mail window or if you did not reduce the i
354. s of the picture can open this variant of the JPEG format A large number of programs cannot open images in lossless JPEG format Save your pictures in TIFF format if you want to save without losses as almost all programs can open TIFF format Select Baseline as Codec in normal case Progressive shows the picture from unsharp to sharp with the complete picture being shown straightaway That made sense in the times of slow internet connections and is not important any more nowadays In the Subsampling pop up menu you should select 4 4 4 if you want to avoid picture faults artifacts caused by the compression The high compression rate is achieved in JPEG images by saving one instead of four Y values for blocks of four pixels Use this option if you want to save an image with sharp edged subjects for example lettering in JPG format without serious picture faults The file size will increase however The settings 4 2 0 and 4 1 1 are mean values After saving the picture will not be displayed in its window at the actual quality level You need to close and reopen the picture to see the effects of the compression on the complete picture 68 Save for web Save for web You can also save images with File Save for Web A dialog where you can select the For mat Quality and Progressive opens Progresive makes images display from rough to fine the more data is received when the internet connection is slow Without this option pictures are displ
355. s the whole picture to the color that matches the average of all colors This feature is available as a batch too Measure Angle with two Lines allows you to measure the angle between two helper lines that are inserted at the top left of the picture after you select the option You can position both lines anywhere on the picture using the handles and after each change the current angle is displayed in the comment box of the Information palette that opens automatically You can copy values from the palette to edit them in other programs The helper lines are hidden as soon as you switch to a different tool The White Point tool allows you to re apply the white point of an image if the image has a color cast Using the White Point tool click the lightest area of the image that should actually be white The colors will then be corrected If there is no area in the image that should actually be white the correction will not work in most cases In critical situations we therefore recommend taking the picture with an unobtrusive piece of white paper somewhere in the shot We have provided a short video to demon strate this tool on the Internet at http www lemkesoft com content 213 videos html 59 Work Environment Back to the palettes The Overview shows the complete picture This is helpful if only part of the picture can be seen in the picture window Navigator The visible part is indicated in the overview by a rectangle You can
356. set and 4 as Number of Digits OLOWO Rename Name amp Extension Date Specials Label Current Name Change to ada 0114_IMG jpg 0115_IMG jpg jee 0115_IMG jpg 0116_IMG jpg m Change existing 0119_IMG jpg 0120_IMG jpg Remove existing 0120_IMG jpg 0121_IMG jpg All existing indexe 0121_IMG jpg 0122_IMG jpg Shi pdescattie DOONIO 0122_IMG jpg 0123_IMG jpg C Reset on Date change 0123 IMG jpg 0124_IMG jpg OR Ti h 0124_IMG jpg 0125_IMG jpg Eser On eee ere 0125_IMG jpg 0126_IMG jpg __ Reset on Folder change 0126_IMG jpg 0127_IMG jpg 0127_IMG jpg 0128_IMG jpg Index Position Before name 0128 IMG jpg 0129_IMG jpg O After name 0129_IMG jpg 0130_IMG jpg Ac extension 0130_IMG jpg 0131_IMG jpg r a 0131_IMG jpg 0132_IMG jpg SEE ly 0132_IMG jpg 0133_IMG jpg step i 0133_IMG jpg 0134_IMG jpg ae 0134_IMG jpg 0135_IMG jpg SUDAC index from offset 0135_IMG jpg 0136_IMG jpg Number of Digits 4a 0171_IMG jpg 0172_IMG jpg Remove additional digits Global Index Use z Separator _ Insert Choose Presets E E _ mmer Clear All Cancel Rename Another example Select Add new if your files still have no index and you want to add one If the first picture is to be given number 0001 enter 1 as the Offset and a 4 after Digits Select whether the index should be before or after the filename or whether it should be added as an extension The Step must be 1 Subtract offset from index subtracts the entered Offset from the in
357. so loca ted Always copy the XMP files together with the image files to retain the modifications Renaming a picture in the Browser will automatically rename the additional XMP file The modification instructions are not compatible with other programs Therefore they can only be used by GraphicConverter 9 Non destructive editing has the advantage that you can refine the editing at any time without having to start from the beginning if there are several editing steps You can also open and edit images from the Browser or the File menu in normal windows and if you save the edited version as a new file the original will also be kept unchanged We will explain the corresponding functions in the chapters following the details on the Cocooner 100 Print Folder In order to edit images non destructively open the Cocooner which will open its own large window like the browser You can open the Cocooner via an icon at the top of the browser or via the context menu jabs jabr tw iw a ee cw aiN aiN oit 20131072 00c EMEEN ac tye ail Silt On the left hand side you will find the functions that are available in the Cocooner Scroll downwards to see all functions The small sliding switch at the top right for each function allows you to switch the respective settings on and off The circular arrow resets the settings to their initial positions The largest area is taken up by the image to the right next to the functions Sel
358. sort order from bottom to top click the A Z button on the right and select Z A If the left hand section of the browser does not show the directory structure or if you want to hide it click the left List icon in the lower left corner m cs The Favorites area is underneath the file tree There you can drag frequently used fold ers to access them quickly 210 The Browser Click the center of the icon with the framed rectangle to switch the large preview on the right on and off Click this icon again to display the large preview image in a separate win dow that you can position anywhere 000 Preview moe EXIF EXIFToo GPS IPTC Name 2010 03 27_21 23 46_IMG_6256 jpg Date and Time Samstag 27 Marz 2010 21 22 Uhr MEZ Size 4368x2912 pixel 12 7 Megapixel Resolution 72 0x72 0 ppi Colors 16 7 Mill Colors RGB 32 Bit Frames File Format JPEG JFIF File Length 5 1 MB Compression 1 9 Spotlight Comment Rating label FJ BS BOSS This is very useful on systems with two monitors The preview window can be sized using the bottom right hand corner and the information underneath the preview can be hidden by clicking the iin the blue circle The preview palette can therefore fill large parts of your screen or completely fill a second monitor Single clicking the icon with the mountains allows you to display the histogram of the picture The icon with the arrow displays and hides the drop area to which
359. ssible The box on the top left has a black dot at the bottom left Four of these dots fit next to each other and above each other to fill the box This box is used for a white or almost white source pixel White areas therefore have a slight grid pattern The edges of the picture are quadrupled as 4x4 dots are placed for each source pixel A totally black source pixel will be represented by a square made from 4x4 black dots in our example In between values are assigned the closed field As a comparison here is a greatly enlarged section from a source picture showing an eye 177 Colors Mode and Colorize followed by a 8x8 dithered version of this section using the Triangle option k Bi ba lin in Mi is DB Mi Dithering makes pictures larger as several dots are set in place of each source pixel The edges are four times as long with a matrix of 4x4 The size of the matrix indicates the enlargement factor To avoid this you can reduce the picture before dithering After dith ering pictures can only be scaled with considerable quality losses Here is our example picture dithered with Darken Linear a matrix of 4x4 and reduced to quarter size beforehand 178 Colors Mode and Colorize The Random Matrix normally creates relatively balanced results with less prominent structures This option is preset with a matrix size of 4x4 pixels Here is an example with a random matrix and 4x4 pixels Find and Replace In pictur
360. st selected in the pop up menu will be used Using the pop up menu to the right of the icons you can convert the selected pictures and save them for example to a subfolder The pictures are saved in the format selected in the same pop up menu Click the Convert button to start the conversion Convert to subfolder automatically creates a subfolder called Converted Files in the source directory where the converted pictures are saved Convert to The Same Folder overwrites the source files if they have the standard end ing and if the source format is selected as the format If the source images are in JPG for mat and are being saved in TIF format the source files are kept along with the converted files 206 The Browser Convert to Other Folder allows you to specify your own destination folder after you have started the conversion Under Mac OS X 10 4 Tiger you can start a spotlight search with the search box Enter a search term to display all pictures containing the keyword The browser can also display movies and play the selected movie in the right hand sec tion If you select the Multi frame preview option in the Preferences under Browser Thumbnails four images from each film are shown in a preview in the center of the browser to give you a quick overview of the content of the movie This is particularly helpful for movies that start with a black picture e00 C Lorenzkirch a a DTi ams we Name
361. swaps back to the normal controls This provides subtle and iterative adjustments to specific color tones First pick a color by using the eyedropper tool then adjust the color tone towards it s neighboring colors or to a more darker or vibrant color tone If the effect is not strong enough just pick the same color area again and continue adjusting Color tones that are less colorful change less i e gray doesn t change at all very bright colors like a blue sky change the most As with all the other controls you can always undo and redo the last moves up to 20 itera tions Click the two circles of arrows to undo the steps you did with the controls or to redo Key shortcuts Undo left Redo right Toggle preview on off down The Xe847 filter is an add on for GraphicConverter that is pre installed for test pur poses Click Order Now to buy a license for the filter Enter the license key with Enter license to enable the OK button This license also enables the black and white filter Pure Carbon Pure Carbon Filter Select Filter Pure Carbon to convert color pictures into grayscale pictures Like with the Xe847 filter several circles are available to adjust the contrast brightness and tone 105 Pure Carbon Filter Use the top circle to select a color to filter the picture with This simulates fitting a colored glass filter in front of the lens when you take a picture In traditional photography using f
362. t be imported and exported as no SDKs are available If necessary use the X version of GraphicConverter under Rosetta MacDraw MacPaint Black and white format with 576 x 720 pixels MAG MAKIchan graphic format MAYA IFF Variation of the IFF format MathPad Text based format Graphics of the PSION 5 series MDC Meteosat 5 Meteosat satellite format MHT archive MonkeyCard Telephone logo format MonkeyLogo Telephone logo format Moov QuickTime animation MOS RAW format MP2 MP2 files can only be displayed if you purchase the MP2 add on for QuickTime from www apple com MPO MRC mrSID Mac OS X only with a plug in you can download from http www lemkesoft com en plugins htm MSP 1 bit graphics from Microsoft Paint Windows 2 0 MSX MSX2 MSX MSX2 NAA IPTC 282 Supported Formats Format Import Export Comment NASA Raster Format with or without several frames of the Metafile NASA missions NEO Format of the Atari NeoChrome program Supports 320 x 200 pixels for16 colors NGG NCG Nokia cellphone format NIF NIST PCT Nokia pict Export via the logo format NOL Nokia cellphone format NV12 Format for single images of a Microsoft video format ODF Format for multipage documents ONCOR Supports 256 grayscale ORF OTA PAC STAD Black and white graphics with 640 x 400 pixels of the Atari STAD program Pa
363. tallations ais eset ie Sheet tee ti ete ages te tee ad er ohh 5 Update nana reba iE ET area ER De ev er een E gener ee ore ora eer eer 10 Auto Save and Fullscreen Mode cc cece cence cence eee e nent e nee n een een tenons 10 MacOS 10 9 Ma YerickSi oce 6 05 kana hase ae hud ewes ye bbe Kea hI coat as aad se hee 13 SUD DOM o aa tobe cede one neal E T DNE ben lee aed ene cee einen ea ona Tr 15 PAIS Marital seien n iana a nde ns bo ete wlea ce cha ee EE E EE nln AEE ease A S e 15 Starting the Program and Opening a Picture cece cee cece cece ence een eenee 16 Converting a Picture With Save a5 0 cece ccc cence cee eee e teen e een ent eneenes 20 Saving and GlOsing 4 4 gt 601 4044o enwvadescndereestedieteshadvaad eds r end sanat ees 25 Savea CODY AS re cross dari Nene s ERE 4a krone Sari ba watts Cave ea eae Sa ered aaah dorian 26 Convert amp Modify 4 sc2254 total eet cet Ait wk Jena ee da ae eA a iR 26 Automatic CONVEMSION ireren de de vehi a ive ured i wenn el ei we ca Saas aeene 49 Work ENVIFORINVGNE 4 44 55 3 99 15555 ca apes syed shld pees wad ees eed Aa eee Nees 51 Internet Preparing Pictures for the Internet 0 cece cece cence eee ence nee ence eenees 64 Save LOVING oad ac ese Serene eld wie ip cde oe mee ca daalp ake oN ae as OAA a 69 Comparing Pictures c02ssscaces la leet sk vas esas nso i kisini taina auni eniras 70 Pictures in E mails spe denie a a seen tiles ek aad RS Bie 72 Pictures in Mobi
364. tandard Progressive Lossless only special usage Subsampling 4 2 2 default Calculate File Size Original Size 3 7 MB New Size 573 8 KB Y Embed metadata if available IPTC 7 XMP EXIF ICC profile Don t embed sRGB profile gt EXIF Options Show Preview Special Filesize Options Show this dialog before saving JPEG files Cancel OK Split makes several pictures from one picture that each contain part of the larger pic ture Enable the option by selecting the check box in front of the button If you click the split button in the file selection a dialog opens where you can set the segments accord ing to size or number For example if you want to split a picture with a width of 960 pixels into three parts widthways enter 320 pixels as the width for the segments _ a Set Segment with O size in Pixel O Number of Parts Width 320 pixel Height 200 pixel Naming n cc rr x Use the following characters for the name n name c column add more c s to add digits r rows add more r s to add digits absolute number add more s to add digits x extension Sample The naming n cc rr x will create the first segment of sample gif as sample 01 01 gif 23 Converting a picture with Save as If you select the Set segments with Number of parts option you can enter the num ber of segments for the long side and the short side Split Set Segment with O Size in Pixel O Number of Parts
365. ted files in the source directory Conversely Remove Resource Fork deletes an existing resource for all selected files This is useful for saving memory space for Internet usage or if you want to send pictures to PC users as they may have problems with the resource Under Convert Flle Create Icon Preview in the Preferences you can specify that an icon and a preview are created Only if one doesn t exist This option saves a lot of time when you convert a number of files Calculate Superpalette calculates an optimum color palette with 256 colors for all selected pictures This color table is saved as a file in the target directory and can then be used for manual color reduction or color reduction using Batch 40 Convert amp Modify Set a saved palette for a picture by selecting Picture Colors and select Options from the submenu A saved table can be opened and set for the picture with Open Lowercase changes all uppercase letters to lowercase letters for the files selected Uppercase changes all lowercase letters to uppercase letters for the files selected Insert Black Frame into Series creates an additional black image and saves it behind the source images In order to recognize a series you must enter how many characters of the filenames should be compared in the preferences under slide show Effects If for example you wanted to separate blocks of images from different photographers in a slide show you can create a
366. tes a clicked slice Delete All deletes all slices in a picture Save Slices as creates a file that should not be copied to the web server The file contains information about the slices and the links and is used to save slices and for example allows you to import them later for use in a similar picture Open Slice opens a slice file and displays the slices it contains Copy Slices as HTML MAP allows you to transfer the HTML MAP for example to a word processing program for editing 77 Photo Albums on the Internet Catalog Photo Albums on the Internet Catalog You should consider offering your pictures for download on the Internet if you do not want to deal with repeat orders of photos If you do not want to use an online service like www flickr com you can create catalogs for your own Web sites with GraphicConverter Collect all source pictures in a folder that you show as a small preview on the Internet and want to offer for download for example in larger printable versions Pictures that have been downloaded can be forwarded to photo labs who will print your pictures on photo graphic paper and send them to you You can create Internet pages that show the pictures as a small preview using the browser and the Catalog HTML option The picture name appears under each pic ture Click it and a larger version of the picture will be displayed on its own page You can download the picture by Ctrl clicking it and selecting t
367. text menu you can now use Copy Images to and Move Images to to copy or move the selected files to a folder that you select with the file selection dialog When printing a catalog you can select the Two Sided option to swap left hand and right hand margins On right hand pages it is best to make the left hand margin smaller than the right hand margin You can use Create Multiframe Previews for Movies to print a preview with four pictures from a movie instead of the normal preview The new Windows Theme Pack container format can be opened A workaround has been added for a Lion call up when displaying icns pictures due to a bug New in GraphicConverter 8 0 Backend completely re programmed to support 64 bit Sandbox is supported since it is prescribed for Apple s Mac App Store and increases the security of your data A version without Sandbox technology is alternatively 297 New in GraphicConverter 7 6 1 and 7 6 2 available from www lemkesoft com You can open pictures larger than 16 000 x 16 000 pixels cpbitmap format can be opened e Inthe preferences you can choose to display the elapsed time since the start of a slide show e cpbitmap format can be opened This format is used by iOS devices like the iPhone for their start screen and background picture e If you open a JPG picture in FLIR format you can display an additional saved grayscale image that shows the heat distribution via the context menu for an open
368. th the diagonal double arrow in the top left corner of the window to activate full screen mode in which GraphicConverter fills the whole screen so you can concentrate on the current document GraphicConverter 9 eee lt iol Back View Open C The menu bar is also hidden Move the mouse cursor to the top edge of the screen to display the menu bar again To end full screen mode click the green circle again or press the Escape key If for example you open a browser and an image and look at it in full screen mode you can switch back and forth between the image and the browser by wiping with four fin gers sideways to the right or left on the trackpad The Swipe between full screen apps option in the System Preferences Trackpad should not be disabled in this case Mac OS 10 9 Mavericks GraphicConverter supports the new features of Mavericks The new technology App Nap saves a lot of energy as programs in the background get frozen Especially MacBooks benefit of that technology as the battery life extends by about one hour Another interesting new feature are the tags that can be defined and assigned in the Finder The tags are the advanced labels which had fixed colors You can select any color for a tag and change it later Additionally tags have names that can be changed too You 13 Mac OS 10 9 Mavericks can and should change the tag Red to Projects or Family any time These tags will be displayed in G
369. the IPTC information from the pictures selected on the left to a text file created in the destination folder This text file is called metadata txt The source pictures are not modified If you want to create a text file for each image file you can select it under Preferences Convert Text Conversion Once you click Start a dialog opens where you can select whether the IPTC data or the comments should be exported In the subsequent dialog you can select which boxes should be exported and whether the file created should be a normal text file or a CSV file for further editing in a database or in Excel The encoding can be changed from the nor mal ASCII to UTF8 Select UTF8 if the IPTC entries contain characters from foreign fonts like for example Chinese The option for creating a separate text file for each source file is also available in this dialog 30 Convert amp Modify When you click Go Remove Metadata from JPEGs opens a dialog where you can choose which metadata to be removed Remove Metadata Remove M EXIF XMP l IPTC and Photoshop Metadata Micc M Comment F Delete Everything after EOI Marker only JPGs l APP14 only JPGs JFIF Header only JPGs All Other APP Markers only JPGs This function will also strip off the complete resource fork Please make a backup copy of your files before using this function _ Cancel lt D XMP is an area in which other programs for example Photoshop
370. the browser If you also want to upload HTML files you first need to remove 89 Uploading and Downloading Documents the file types HTML and HTM from the list of files to ignore under Preferences Browser Misc so that they are displayed in the browser General Display Open Preview Upon program launch M Open browser _ Redirect double click to Edit O Open with Finder M Fold ove Folders Open With Misc Open With Application J Adobe Photoshop CS3 HA Misc Focal Length Calculated to 35mm Google Earth Speed 1 0 A Extension Ignore Extepsians ane THM TIE E DLL P C PAS CC ASM COM SYS LST DOC XLS PST BELUNLEPIA F SIT ZIP TAR MIM GZIP ARJ MDX MSH RTF Allow Extensions leave empty to show all Restore to Defaults Last Values Cina ED Connect to the Internet then enter a URL your user name password and if necessary the path Click Upload to copy the files onto the Web server lon o URL Username Password Path C Overwrite existing files C D If you want to download a picture from the Internet onto your computer you can start the download with a Ctrl click or a held click on the picture depending on your Internet browser The picture is saved to the desktop on your computer or to your download folder You can open it in GraphicConverter from there 90 Paper Format If you know the path to a picture you can also enter it directly in Graphic
371. the filename not to be displayed at the top left above the picture you can select it in the metadata to display it under the picture You can hide the tools on the top edge with Automatically hide and show in the pref erences They are hidden again if you touch the edge of the screen in the middle with the mouse cursor T A A RS File List Metadata Trash Create Alias Change Filename Rotate Left Rotate Right Edit With the first icon or the tab key you open a file list that lists the filenames of the pic tures around the picture currently displayed You can scroll through the list and click the picture you want to continue the slide show with x File List 2010 04 10_11 53 09_IMG_7164JPG 2010 04 10_11 53 22_IMG_7166 JPG 2010 04 10_11 53 25_IMG_7167 JPG 2010 04 10_11 53 25_IMG_7168JPG 2010 04 10_11 53 26_IMG_7169 JPG 2010 04 10_11 53 26_IMG_7170 JPG The Trash moves the current graphic file to the Mac OS trash This is why the slide show is useful for cleaning up large numbers of graphics that you need to see in full screen mode before you can sort them out The icon to the right of the trash creates an alias from the current graphic file in the source folder If an Alias Folder is selected in the Slide Show Misc section of the Prefer ences the aliases will be written to that folder This makes it easy to collect your favorites to use at a later time without actually moving the files GraphicConverter also displays a s
372. this value is smaller than required due to rounded edges enter another value If the other value is slightly higher you can trim off the extra pixels in the next step with Picture Size Add Remove Margins If you reduce the pictures to the size of the display diagonal lines become too jagged and the whole picture seems too blurred The S700i display size is 320 x 240 pixels Pic tures with such a small size can mostly not be sharpened properly Therefore it is better to use the size of the photo images from your mobile phone If a picture with the large size appears too sharp on the phone you can use a smaller version On the S700i the small versions have the advantage that a mini preview is displayed in the overview The iPhone display size is 320 x 480 pixels Turn the landscape format pictures with Picture Rotate Rotate 90 Counterclock wise to use the display optimally Save the picture in JPEG format in a subfolder for example In the file selection dialog select the Save web ready without resource and Merge color profile into image for web usage and remove EXIFoptions In the options disable IPTC ICC profile and EXIF Transfer the picture to your mobile phone by copying it to your memory card using the Finder or transfer it via Bluetooth Select Send File from the Bluetooth menu in the Finder A file selection window opens where you can select the picture file You can also 75 Slices select several files After t
373. tion yourself and trim off parts of the picture that are not so important In our example it would be nice to see the whole of the boy s hand while the upper part of the picture is less important GraphicConverter has an excellent option for cropping pictures to an aspect ratio of your choice Open the desired folder in a browser window and select the pictures you wish to crop with Shift or Command click Choose Export Crop for Photo Service from the Action menu in the browser s tool bar A dialog opens where you can enter the aspect ratio of your photo paper This is always 3 2 for 4x6 inches and other standard sizes Alternatively you can also enter 4 6 Divide the higher number by the lower one If the result is not 1 5 you should enter the values of the format not the lower values of the aspect ratio which may not be exact Crop for Photo Service Display Options Aspect Ratio lt gt gt Li la gt R Auto Trim o Processing Selected Items _ Process images from subfolders If selection includes subfolders open images from these folders Copy files of another format into target folder Saving Options Resolution Save with resolution 72 00 ppi Format Save in original format if possible Save as JPEG with quality 95 Cl Crop JPEGs lossless M Remove all metadata Destination Save to automatically created subfolder Define destination folder Choose
374. to now a fade to a black frame was added at the end You can now disable that in the Preferences part Slide Show Export to Movie End with transition to black frame In the dialog Picture Color Colorize the option Limit Color Range has been added Enable the option to keep brightness differences when colorizing The difference becomes most visible if you select a brighter color for colorizing 321 New in GraphicConverter 9 4 In the Preferences part Open Metadata the option Check only if file has valid extension has been added If you want to display old picture files without file extension like for example jpg in the browser you should disable this option so all files are scanned for IPTC data As this lasts longer you should use this option when working with files without extension only When you insert the EXIF Date into the file name with the Rename dialog tab Date the date and time can be wrong This can happen as camcorders do not write a tag in the file for the date format which can be local date and time or UTC standard If you think the date and time have been set incorrectly you can select the option MOV Recording date uses UTC in the Preferences part Browser Edit The functions Highlights and Shadows and the Equalizer now can be used for grayscale pictures too If a picture file in PSD format contains a path this path will be saved in TIFF and JPG files Many small changes for Mac OS Yosemite In the Br
375. to each file allows you to select an offset which sets the time as 1 second later for all files to be modified for example The sort order is kept for the sort method according to date in the browser You can use Add Offset to Each File if you have a series of pictures with the wrong date for example because the clock in the camera is not set correctly If you know the actual date when the picture was taken you can calculate the difference and enter it as a 227 The Browser value in the dialog Enter negative values like 42 to reduce the value Set creation date to and Set modification date to allows you to choose which date should be changed _Shift File Date Add to or subtract from the file date the following amount a Months 0 g Days 0 8 H 4 jours 0 v Minutes 0 a Seconds 0 a l Shift creation date l Shift modification date Cancel Co Change Folder Date allows you to change the creation and modification date of fol ders Set always to mod date allows you to change the creation date to the modification date Set always to creation date allows you to change the modification date to the cre ation date Add offset to each file allows you to select an offset which sets the time as 1 second later for all files to be modified for example The sort order is kept for the sort method according to date in the browser Change Folder Date A Set creation date to 12 7 06 4 59 16 PM
376. to the time for every file as these are the sort criteria of Apple TV Additionally an index is added to the file name 0001 0002 etc Conversion between premultiplied and non premultiplied is now available as a batch too In Convert amp Modify Combine Folder to a Singel PDF you can select the quality With Edit Frame Selection with Foreground Color you can draw a line arround the selection which is interesting especially for polygonal selections Draw the desired shape with the tool for polygonal selections and use the feature In the Preferences part Browser Thumbnails you can select Context Menu Show Path to display the path of a single file GIF Animations play during Slide Show In Convert amp Modify you can select Function Delete even odd Pages from PDF to delete the even or the odd pages Color Permutations are available as batches You can use them to create variations of buttons for websites for example In the Rename dialog in the Specials tab you can select IPTC and EXIF metadata to be 319 New in GraphicConverter 9 2 and 9 3 transfered to the file name Sidecar files of pictures of the format JPG TIFF PNG and WebP are copied along automatically when you copy the picture Picture Auto color corrects faded pictures The colors become more intense by corve spread Speed of Browser is now optimized In Convert amp Modify you can select Multicrop images from the function menu in order to c
377. too At importing RAW streams from special devices 16 bit per channel are supported 313 Neu in GraphicConverter 8 8 When printing a catalog all metadata is printed in several lines if only one picture per page is printed When exporting as 16 bit TIFF all metadata is keept as no longer Core Image is used but own routines instead When you change color mode for example from RGB to CMYK the reslt is displayed immedeately In older versions of GraphicConverter you had to close the picture and reopen it in order to see the color changes Converting always uses the profile selected in Edit Assign Profile You can open that dialog via Picture Mode too In the Slide Show you can press C key to show and hide the metadata defined in Preferences Slide Show Metadata If you enlarge the picture with Picture Size Canvas size or Add Remove Margins you can select transparency for the added areas Neu in GraphicConverter 8 8 If a picture contains XMP Faces these will be displayed With XMP Faces technology you can mark faces in pictures with a rectangle and you can assign the person s name for example In GraphicConverter you cannot apply these marks yet In the Preferences General Display Content you can disable display of XMP Faces When you copy or move images with an XMP sidecar file in the browser these sidecar files will be copied or moved along with the picture file automatically Force Save All to saves all op
378. trimming 125 Toolbox 52 transparent 166 Triangle 177 triangle for opening folders 212 trimming 124 TWAIN 118 TWAIN Acquire 118 TWAIN Open Source 118 U UFS partitions 26 Undo 129 161 Unicode 213 UNIX formats 5 Unselect 124 150 157 Unskew 183 update 10 Urgency 35 user defined filters 186 V Value HSV model 187 Vectorize 196 vertical 180 video pictures 202 View as Non Proportional 169 View as Proportional 169 View at Original Size 168 View Item s in Slide Show 215 wW What is color depth 172 White Correction 185 Word file export images 32 work environment 51 www lemkesoft com 10 X XMP 31 333 Index X Resolution 114 Y Y Resolution 114 Z ZOOM 167 334
379. ture Value 4 Cancel OK With Windows Store current Tool Settings you can save the current settings of the tools like for example foreground color line style and arrow heads under a new na me With Windows Select settings you can activate saved settings In the bottom section of the Browser a second search fiels is available with which you can filter the content of the Browser with terms Enter for example bird to display only the files containing bird in the file name The search field in the top section of the Browser searches with Spotlight of Mac OS Via the context menu over the thumbnails in the Browser you can copy files into a des tination folder If you select two or more folders you can copy the content in ramdom order or interleaved into the destination folder This makes sense if you for example 328 New in GraphicConverter 9 7 you get left and right 3D files from another program separated in two folders To achie ve the desired sorting in the destination folder an index is added at the beginning of the file names Crop to Ratio is available as a new batch The picture gets trimmed equally at two sides as less as possible to achieve the desired aspect ratio The 3D coding Anaglyph is available as a batch now too 3D JPGs for left and right eye can now get converted into MPOs in Convert amp Modify Pages document contain a thumbnail in PDF format which now will be displayed in the Browser and opened
380. types of RAW files not documented by the manufacturers of digital cameras That is why GraphicConverter cannot open some RAW files Sony dsc f828 and bayer rggb are supported among others RGB RIFF Format of the Painter program Contains color and black and white graphics RLA RLE Utah Raster toolkits graphics RSB RTF Rich Text Format RW2 285 Supported Formats Format Import Export Comment SCR Sinclair screenshots Please note that the file extension SCR is also used by the Capture Tool in Word for DOS SCR Graphics created by Capture Tools from Word for DOS This format is identical to the PCX format Please note that the file extension SCR is also used by Sinclair screenshots Scrap ScreenShot Palm OS ScreenShots support for Handera and Hack PDB Sony CLIE V1 5 SCX ColoRIX format Supports 8 bit per pixel SFF Fax format from Fritz SFW Seattle Filmworks photo on disk format Variation of the JPEG format SGI Silicon Graphics Image format Supports 256 grayscale or 24 bit SHP Lighting Press or Printmaster graphic archive format Supports 1 bit per pixel SHS SIGMA SD10 RAW Format of the camera Sigma SD 10 raw Sinclair QL Sinclair QL format SIXEL VAX world terminal format SKETCH Variation of the MBM format smv Used by microscopes SNX Variation of the JPEG format Softimage Softimage format Supports 32 bit per image Used by video p
381. u therefore do not have to change the ignore list Select Apply Extension Filter to Folders too to filter folders with extension like Pic tures jpg too Searching in the browser window Command F or Edit Find compare and replace Find Files switches to the search mode that allows you to search the metadata The current browser window is searched or your computer if you click Where This Mac in the top line e000 Gran Canaria a el N m a S e amp n Back View Convert amp Modify Open With Rotate Left Rotate Right E Mail SlideShow Print Catalog Search gt I 2005 This Mac an Canaria GD Done gt i 2008 D Abz ge 2006 7 C e Agenturbilder Cop All of the following are true In the second line you can choose whether All of the criteria must be met simultane ously so that files are found You can for example select Size is greater than or equal to 18MB as the first condition Click the plus sign at the end of the line to insert another condition line For example select Created date is before 1 26 2012 from the pop up menus If All is selected as a condition only the files that were created before January 26 2012 and are at least 18MB in size will be found If you select None as a condition all other files will be found Select Any as a condition if you want to find all files that meet at least one of the criteria If the pictures contain keywords you can search for these key
382. ur den Befehl Neuer Ordner mit Auswahl steht jetzt die Tastenkombination Befehl Wahl M zur Verf gung There is a short cut for New Folder with Selection Command Alt M New in GraphicConverter 9 1 Effect Average sets the whole picture to the color that matches the average of all colors This feature is available as a batch too The format 422 is created by Magic Lantern can be opened It is a RAW format Magic Lantern replaces the firmware of some Canon DSLR cameras to add some functions 316 New in GraphicConverter 9 1 We assume no liability for using Magic Lantern http www magiclantern fm In the File menu you can open the folders of Google Drive Cloud Drive amazon Sky Drive Microsoft Dropbox und Copy com You need to install the free client software of the regarding service GraphicConverter scanns the user folder for the regarding folder on launch The folders must not be installed or moved to another location Send as E Mail Attachment is available in the File menu In the Operator you can select Fast Mode under the controls to be able to move the controls faster The preview can decrease in quality a little bit Antialias now works for the pen tool too Select picture content is availabe as a batch too RAW files are marked in the browser RAW so you can differ RAWs from other files easier You can deselect this in Preferences Browser Thumbnails RAW text for raw files If you want to see the color
383. ure surface The current tool is changed to the eyedropper when you hold down the Option key You have to press the mouse button to change the foreground color to the color under the mouse If a rectangular selection is defined this is moved on a point by point basis If no selection is defined the window contents are scrolled in the corresponding direction Shift s If a rectangular selection is defined it is reduced in size or enlarged horizontally on the right margin using the left and right s or vertically on the lower margin with the up and down s Command Up A browser window opens displaying the folder containing the current picture Shift Control s Moves the selection boundary Option s Shifts the complete image The part that is pushed out of the image is inserted at the other side PgUp PgDown on most keyboards these are slanted arrows The contents of the window are scrolled either up or down by a full page 274 Shortcuts Key Combinations Home End on many keyboards these are represented as arrows with two lines through them Result The contents of the window are scrolled all the way to the top or the bottom Esc Removes a defined selection If a picture section is inserted this can no longer be moved Space bar with mouse click Allows you to move the content of the window if the image is only partly visible Backspace or Del
384. use the GraphicConverter browser like a database for indexing and searching You will find detailed information on this in the chapter Crop starts the Crop for Photo Service for several pictures in sequence You can also call up this option via the Action icon with Export Crop for Photo Service Make Pre view recreates the preview This option is called Misc Create Preview in the menu of the Action icon In the Browser Display General section Redirect Open button to Open with allows you to specify that the Open button opens files in the default Open with appli cation that you set in the Browser Open with section In the Browser Open with section of the Preferences you can specify that double clicking a picture opens it with the Open with application that you can set in the Open With Application pop up menu If you select Photoshop as the default Open with application the double click and the Open button will open the selected pictures in Photoshop Default is open in GraphicConverter If you only occasionally want to open images with Photoshop leave the setting for dou ble click as Edit and use the Open With icon if you want to open images in Photoshop The other icons have self explanatory names The icons for the slide show catalog and for scanning have a small triangle Click and hold down the mouse to select a variant of the option If you click the icon normally the setting that was la
385. ustments Effects gt Size Crop Scale gt Alpha Channel gt Colors Profile gt Drawings gt Others 3D C 1080p Frame Packing 1080p HSBS E 1080p Interlaced F3 Mark as 3D E Swap left and right Cancel a Select the newly created file with the two pictures next to each other from the subfolder and open or create a destination folder in the right hand column Click Go at the bottom left to start the conversion The 3D file will be created in the destination 311 New in GraphicConverter 8 6 folder eoo eres C Function Convert Destination Format Multi Picture Object 30 mpo Options WWW Ready Ase Batch Batch Table A IMG_9739 Lmpo nae S Mark a5 30 Lot 2 ema 1 teme Open this file to check it and click the triangle pointing right in the lower window frame to switch to the second picture If the second picture appears the conversion was successful The MPO file is displayed in 3D on suitable devices In the slide show you can use new shortcuts for temporary or permanent rotating and mirroring 312 New in GraphicConverter 8 7 A Turn temporarily counterclockwise picture file will not be changed S Turn temporarily clockwise picture file will not be changed Mirror vertically lossless for JPGs Mirror horizontally lossless for JPGs F Mirror temporarily vertically picture file will not be
386. ut out several parts of one image for example for web applications New Alpha channels are included Opening PDF files with the Apple library can cause problems when the file contains a form that has been filled in partially In this case select Library dynapdf in the import dialog You can record mouse clicks with Edit Record Mouse Clicks This feature had been included in older versions of GraphicConverter via the context menu It makes sense to analyze maps from archeological digs for example see p 266 In the Keywords palette you can now export the list of keywords via the gear wheel menu as a text file Saving in PNG format supports the lossy variant Effect Color blindness Tritan simualtes tritan color blindness In the Rename dialog the otions for uppercase and lowercase are now easier to access as they are no longer in a pop up menu In the dialog Save for Web you can now select the PNG format in addition to the JPG format and you can save the settings In the Preferences Browser Misc you can select Apply Extension Filters to Folders too Folders with extension like for example Pictures jpg can also be filtered You can decrease the number of colors of a picture to any value between 2 and 255 with Picture Colors Change Color Usage dynamically Try values under 12 to achieve interesting effects When you have reached the last picture of a slide show you can start the slide show again with alt right if
387. ve General this information is written to the resource fork Comments in the resource fork are supported in the following formats JPEG GIF TIFF and PNG Under Mac OS 10 8 and 10 9 you can hide the top toolbar in the browser with the oval button at the top right Under Mac OS 10 7 Lion or from Mac OS 10 10 Yosemiti you use the toolbar context menu instead and to display it again the context menu that opens to the right or left of the folder name in the window title Preferences for the browser Browser General Browser The a p ad ew a General Open Save Print Slide Show Convert Browser Folders Search Display Appearance Preview Mode Standard Thumbnails _ Digital Lightroom Cache Text Size Normal Edit Misc Thumbnails Generation _ Fast use only available icons High Quality create previews from the image data Skip Files Larger than 200 MB _ Create custom enclosing folder icon _ Use EXIF Preview if available M ignore Previews in Resource Fork Misc On Error _ Create message log Original File Date Keep after modifying metadata iPhoto Library _ Use an alternative lt None gt Aperture Library _ Use an alternative lt None gt Restore to Defaults wel Last Values ___ Cancel OK Standard or Digital Lightroom allows you to select white or dark gray as the back ground color for the browser Five settings are available for the Text Size of the filenames etc und
388. vers etc Export EXIF data into text file creates a text file in the same folder that lists the EXIF data You can use these files for imports into databases Delete EXIF tags opens a dialog where you can enter the Hex code of the EXIF fields that you want to delete if for example you do not want to pass on the information about the white balance Remove Maker Note and Comment deletes the maker note and the comment Add or edit GPS values opens a dialog in which GPS values can be entered or edited when for example you have written down a position from a car navigation device GPS Latitude North 4 Longitude 0 00 East Cancel oK Copy EXIF to XMP copies the IPTC data to the XMP section without saving the image again It is a good idea to copy the EXIF data to the XMP section if for example you will be continuing work on the images in a program that can only read the XMP section You should use Copy XMP IPTC to other IPTC records if your images are to be further processed in other programs that cannot yet read the IPTC data from the XMP section In JPG files the IPTC data can be found in four areas of the image files In the XMP section this entry is used as the master Adobe Photoshop IPTC record The EXIF section can also contain IPTC In the resource fork in the ANPA record IPTC The Copy Comment to IPTC Caption and Copy IPTC Caption to Comment options copy the comment or the IPTC description int
389. viously opened folders and back with Command plus the left and right s e When printing the file name can be printed without extension Select the corresponding option under Preferences Print e Mark as 3D is then available as a batch in the Convert amp Modify dialog The marking is only required internally in GraphicConverter in order to distinguish 3D pictures from normal pictures If you have two individual pictures that you want to join to make a 3D picture you can create a file in which the left picture is on the left and the right picture is on the right by using the Concat function in the Convert dialog Save the picture in a subfolder to keep things tidy You can create the subfolder via the context menu 310 New in GraphicConverter 8 6 After clicking Go a dialog appears where you should select Only Horizontal s00 Ga Concated Objects Zot 3 ieren O iter In the second step select Convert and select the format Multi Picture Object 3D mpo which will only be displayed if you select Show All and open the pop up menu again In addition select the Use Batch check box and add the Mark as 3D batch by clicking the plus sign and by double clicking the batch under the 3D section of the dialog that opens or by dragging it into the right hand area OOA Add Batch Functions Sort By Cr Az E Ignore Even Pages E Set Creator for Saving i amp Use original Format Mark as 3D image gt Conditional gt Adj
390. ware provided Newly created monitor pro files are mostly installed automatically and appear in the list of profiles in the System Preferences under Displays Color If you are using a monitor profile for the first time the on screen display will seem wrong because you are used to the old display The colors often become paler The new colors are the correct colors however You will get used to the new colors after a few days You can make things easier by changing your desktop background You will not have to worry about the monitor profile after that GraphicConverter shows it in the color profile dialog to help you The monitor profile is not saved together with the image file It corrects the monitor display in the background If you want to work professionally you should ensure that the lighting in your office always has the same brightness Black out the windows and use fluorescent tubes with D50 rating Paint the walls white or gray and lay white or gray carpet or flooring Printers Select the printer or output device from the Printer pop up menu in the Edit Assign Profile dialog This profile changes the colors for printing If your printer prints the green hues too weakly they will be amplified by the profile When you install the soft 149 Selection ware for your printer the profile will also be installed automatically and be available in the Printer pop up menu The supplied scanner profiles often do not match up In
391. white edge white needs to be set as the background color and black accordingly if the edge is black The foreground and background colors can be set by clicking the color areas and using the eyedropper J 124 Rotate By selecting Edit Crop Options you can specify under Sides whether all four edges of the picture should be trimmed If for example you leave the bottom edge out the typ ical scanner edge will remain there Crop Tolerance of 0 255 Sides check all for normal behavior Top v Left 4 M Right v Bottom Only for Images with Millions of Colors Additional trim color E a Additional trim color For Images with Alpha Channel _ Trim all parts that are not full opaque Cancel _ OK If the scanned edge is not quite one color you can increase the Tolerance The larger the entered value the more lenient GraphicConverter will be about patches in the scan ner edges for example The correct value will have to be determined a few times by trial and error However before you spend a long time doing this just use a selection rectan gle When you use different colors in the edges two Additional trim colors can be defined for the current background color This option is only available for pictures with millions of colors If a picture contains an alpha channel it will be used for trimming if the Trim all parts that are not full opaque option has been selected If a single
392. with a double click Via the terminal of the Mac OS you can start a slide show with slideshow or open a browser with browser The function Auto Enhancement is available as a batch now In the bottom section of the Browser in the pop up menu Sort by the criteria Index in Name now is availabe Every number will be recognized as an index In the contextmenu over the thumbnails in the Browser you can copy the XMP date to the EXIF date with Actions Metadata EXIF IPTC Copy XMP Create Date to EXIF Date With the new batch Scale long edge virtual you can change the output size of a file in a length unit The pixel count is not changed With File Rename you can rename the picture With File Move To you can move a picture At the very bottom of the move menu you can use Other to select a folder with the file selector box In the contextmenu over the thumbnails in the Browser with Actions Metadata EXIF IPTC Copy IPTC Title in IPTC Caption you can copy the IPTC Title in the IPTC Caption With Edit Highlight selection you can color the selection with the highlight color of the Mac OS DICOM import was inhanced The pictures from the database of Apples program Photos can be displayed in the Browser via the Media Library The display time for pictures in the Browser now is shorter when slow drives are used Setting geo data from Google Earth for many pictures at once now works faster With Effect
393. words To do this select Keywords in the pop up menu If you enter keywords yourself we recommend always saving them with File Edit File Info IPTC in the Keywords section You can also use the keyword palette that you open via the Window menu 241 The Browser The search results are shown in the browser window To return to the normal start folder view click Done The search box in the toolbar is identical to the search box for the search mode How ever conditions cannot be defined and only the current folder is searched for the file name The context menu in the left hand area of the browser Hold down the Ctrl key and click a folder on the left hand side of the browser to open the following context menu Reveal in Finder Open Folder in New Browser Open Folder in Convert amp Modify Slide Show New Folder Rename Folder Print Catalog Print Folder Refresh Reveal in Finder opens a window containing the folder in the Finder Open Folder in New Browser opens the folder selected in the left hand column in a new browser window Open Folder in Convert amp Modify opens the clicked folder in conversion mode Slide Show shows all pictures from the clicked folders as a slide show New Folder creates a new folder and lets you move selected items from the middle sec tion of the browser into the new folder In the browser if you select several pictures whose names start in the same way the identical part will
394. ws you to print a catalog of all pictures contained in a folder You can also start the function with the Catalog Print icon in the browser toolbar This has the advantage that you can select images more easily if you do not want to print all images If you select the option via the File menu the file selection dialog will open allowing you to open the required folder After you click OK the Print dialog will open It will open immediately if you use the icon Drucken Drucker Voreinstellungen Fotoglanzpapier Fotodruck 34 Kopien 1 M Sortiert drucken Seiten Alle OVon 1 Bis 1 Katalog Allgemein e M Print header amp footer Define M Print metadata C Define Font Lucida Grande kH Size i0 Color l Print image frame using color _ Add background using color Print all pages from multipage files l linclude subfolders PDFw Vorschau Abbrechen Drucken Select the required printer if necessary a saved preference the number of copies and the page range Collated outputs the pages in reverse order This is useful with printers that output the pages with the printed side facing upwards The first two entries in the middle pop up menu are settings for GraphicConverter The other entries come from the printer driver Select Catalog General to define content for 95 Print Catalog the header and footer as well as other metadata Clicking Define opens the co
395. ws you to scale pictures to a format suitable for HD videos If the aspect ratio does not correspond with that of HD videos bars in the current background color are added at the right and left or top and bottom Scale to 1080p without borders trims off margins left after scaling The subject is cen tered If you want to define the trimming yourself you can first scale the images to the HD 117 Scanning with GraphicConverter width of 1920 pixels and then trim with the Crop for Photo Service function In this case enter 1920 1080 as the aspect ratio Scale to 600x600 72 ppi iTunes Cover allows you to optimize music album covers for iTunes Scale to 1024 x 768 as well as the other resolutions allow suitable scaling for typical monitor resolutions Scanning with GraphicConverter Summary You can call up your scanner software via File Scan Scan with TWAIN or Scan with Image Capture If a scanner plug in has been installed will be available in the submenu The picture is available in GraphicConverter after scanning Alternatively you can use the VueScan professional scanning software that is available for download and trial at http www hamrick com TWAIN With the TWAIN system the scanning software for your scanner only needs to be instal led once and can be started from different programs The word TWAIN is not an abbrevia tion and has no real meaning TWAIN is TWAIN say the inventors Under Mac OS X you
396. wser for an idea of how it will look on the Internet The font Color should be selected so that it is visible on the background A black font is not visible on a black background Display Name can be disabled In this case just the picture itself is a link In addition you can select whether the extension path IPTC caption dimensions and file size should be outputted Display text below or above image allows you to specify where the text should appear Select Replace Underscore with Space if you want spaces to appear instead of underscores in the displayed filenames The underscores will remain in the filenames of the picture files Only the HTML code will use the spaces Background Image allows you to set a background image for the Web page you cre ate Click Select to select an image as the background image Specify whether pictures should be displayed like framed slides in a square that is always the same size with Make Square on the right hand side of the dialog The color can be selected for these slide frames Click the color sample to change the color 81 Photo Albums on the Internet Catalog You can draw a frame around the picture with Frame and set its color with Color Shar pen should always be enabled so that the preview pictures are sharp enough The filenames of landscape format pictures do not appear at the same height as the file names of portrait format pictures when the Make Square option is disabled
397. y to move the right hand or upper borderline of a selection left and right or up and down with the s Use the Command key to move the left hand or lower borderline Hold down the Shift key to move in steps of five pixels You can make several selections by holding down the Shift key If selected areas over lap they are joined in a larger selection which can then be L shaped All combinations are possible even with regular and irregular shapes The pixels under the borderlines belong to the selection Use Command A or Edit Select all to select the whole picture With Hi or True Color pictures only the selected picture sections will be edited Adjustments to the brightness and contrast always affect the whole picture if it has 256 or fewer colors because the number of colors would otherwise increase If you want to copy part of a picture and paste it into another one select the required area and copy it with Command C Now switch to the destination picture and paste the selection with Command v The selection is pasted at the mouse cursor and you can adjust its size at the corners by holding down the Command key If you hold down the Shift key at the same time the proportion will be maintained You can move the selection to the desired position with the mouse and the arrow keys Hold the shift key to move the selection in steps of five pixels Select Picture Content selects just the actual picture without any single color margin This ki
398. yed next to each other on the right hand side of the browser 235 The Browser Additional Tabs allows you to select which tabs should also be displayed at the bot tom right of the browser in addition to the General tab Summary Tab List Define allows you to select which content should be shown on the Summary tab Disable Image Show cached preview first if you want to have the final preview dis played straightaway The display of the normal thumbnail can take slightly longer Browser Thumbnails In the Thumbnails section you can select whether Name File size with fork details Creation date Modification date Digital camera details EXIF Rating and Image size in pixels with resolution should be displayed under the thumbnail Number of files in directories shows how many files are contained in a folder under the folder Icons Browser s gt TIFF wo TAN oO LB ia amp sol S e Q General Open Save Print SlideShow Convert Browser Folders Search General i Display Show 4 Name Preview File size Thumbnails with fork details Cache M Number of files in directories Edit Creation date Misc Modification date Digital camera details EXIF Rating Image size in pixel oy RAW text for raw files Vv Color Mode v Label in front of and after filename Icon M cps position M Flash M Rotation v IPTC caption and keywords v Unapplied XMP changes M Show icons onto gray box Movies v Multi frame prev
399. you can adjust the aspect ratio of your pictures to the wider 2 3 aspect ratio of the photo paper You will find a detailed guide in the chapter Cropping for Photo Prints on page 109 DCF compatible file system allows you to export to the memory card of a digital ca mera for example If your DVD player has slots for memory cards you can then show your pictures on a television The export function automatically converts the pictures to JPG format and saves them in a compatible form E Mail file s as attachment lets you forward the selected images to an e mail pro gram to e mail them as attachments see p 208 iDVD or Toast allows you to transfer the files selected in the browser to iDVD or Toast Toast adds the data exported to its list of files to burn The files are not moved on your hard drive The pictures transferred to iDVD are inserted as a slide show The preview mode should not be selected in iDVD in this case Unfortunately iDVD does not evaluate the profile information from image files and therefore displays profiled images for example like those from digital cameras too pale Therefore you should always use the iDVD with merged Color Profile Slide Show option for images with profiles The iDVD Slide Show option is only suitable for pictures without profile Images without profiles are for example scanned pictures if no scanner profile was attached or pictures from digital cameras that were saved with the Merge
400. you can use the File Merge Folder into One Image option to overlap all images in a folder Calculate Mean creates a text file in which the mean values for the color channels RGB are listed This function is useful for agencies whenever large numbers of pictures have to be viewed and sorted out if they are too bright or too dark Repair TIFF allows you to replace a faulty directory with an intact one This is practical if you have pictures from a digital camera that have an identical directory If you can still open one of the pictures use it as a master On the left hand side of the Convert amp Modify dialog select the corrupt pictures and select the Repair TIFF option Click Go and select the master file in the file selection dialog that opens Once you click OK the directory from the master file will be written to the corrupt pictures that you should then be able to open again Only use a picture file that is identical with the corrupt file as the master If in doubt create a backup of the image files beforehand Split JPEG data stream into single JPEGs creates a single image from each picture in a JPEG stream file The individual pictures are saved in the folder selected in the list on the left hand side If you select a Word file as the source file all pictures contained will be written to the destination folder as files Extract EXIF JPEG previews allows the EXIF preview to be extracted from files and saved as an image T
401. yrus better readable Move Image as Grays into Red Channel is for scientific analysis However if color pictures are to be printed by a printing shop for example using an off set machine they need to be available separated in CMYK mode Cyan Magenta Yellow Key Key means black Key was chosen instead of black to avoid confusion with blue In this mode the picture contains information on how much of each of the four printing col ors is printed at what point GraphicConverter can open and save pictures in CMYK mode If you want to separate an RGB picture select the required profile under Edit Assign Profile with the CMYK Select Change button Edit Color Profile Color Profile Muse ColorSync color matching Source sRGB built in a Display Cinema HD Hagen Tag You can change the display profile in the ColorSync control panel Default Profiles Will be used if the file doesn t contain a profile but requires one SRGB sRGB icc al EXIF uncalibrated AdobeRGB1998 icc RGB sRGB IEC61966 2 1 icc Ai CMYK ISO Coated v2 300 ECI icc Check if the image contains a profile Conversion Priority Quick n _ Ignore invalid color profiles Cancel oK The profile file takes the equipment used in the print shop into consideration You can obtain the profile file from your print shop Copy the profile file into the folder User 162 3D Effect Library

This Manual - Lemke Software GmbH

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents